Home

ZyXEL NSA-2401 User's Manual

1. for internal business use only for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice You have the right to make one backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival back up or disaster recovery purposes You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by ZyXEL and all implied licenses are disclaimed 2 Ownership You have no ownership rights in the Software Rather you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect Ownership of the Software Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement 3 Copyright The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by United States Copyright Law and trade secret law and by international treaty provisions All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or Documentation NSA 2401 User s Guide 349 Appendix D Open Source Licences 4 Restrictions You may not publish display disclose sell rent lease modify store loan distribute or create derivative works of the Software or any part thereof You may not assign sublicense
2. Email Description Available Group s Group Membership Senior Managemer Group Membership The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Sharing gt Users gt Create a New Account LABEL DESCRIPTION Username Enter an account name The text may consist of up to 14 letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard with certain limitations due to the nature of the NSA system See Section 8 2 1 1 on page 179 for more details on account names Password Create a password associated with this account The text may consist of up to 14 letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard Password Confirm Enter the exact same password that you just typed in the above field Quota per volume Set how many megabytes of storage the account can use in each of the NSA s volumes You can set a different quota for each volume A value of 0 MB means unlimited storage The quota for an individual volume cannot exceed 500000000 MB 488 281 gigabytes or 477 terabytes Enter the user s e mail address Description Enter details about the user account The text may consist of up to 110 letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard except quotation marks or NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 51 Sharing gt Users gt Create a New Accoun
3. Snapsho obs Snapshot Images Display All w 1 i a I Ime i ame Capacity Ertan tae i I ens bee gt 2 00 GB 0 Used 100 volurei 2008 09 08 10 10 25 er Be ee eee NSA 2401 User s Guide 219 Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 86 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Delete Selected Images Select a snapshot image s and click this icon to remove the image s ome Delete Image Delete Image 2008 09 08 10 10 56 All irnage s will be DELETED Are you sure you want to DELETE the selected image s Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Status This icon shows whether or not the snapshot image is valid The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Select for which volume you want to show snapshot images or all This field identifies the volume that this image is a snapshot of Snapshot This field displays when the snapshot image was created in yyyy mm dd hh mm ss format Capacity This field shows the storage space available for the snapshot how much is currently in use and how much is still available 9 5 Backup Software Screen Click Protect gt Backup Software to open the Backup Soft
4. The disk drive PWR LED is oft e Check that the NSA is on see Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e Remove the disk tray and make sure e itis a SATA I or SATA II compatible hard drive it is installed correctly in the disk tray Push the tray back into NSA disk bay until it snaps into place and push the latch up see the NSA Quick Start Guide the hard disk is not faulty You could either try a different hard disk or test the original hard disk in a different NSA or computer e If the problem continues contact the NSA vendor The disk drive ALM LED is on e The hard disk has a problem Go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk screen select the disk and click the S M A R T icon to see status details about the disk If the hard disk is faulty replace it See your Quick Start Guide for information on replacing a disk and also Disk Replacement Restrictions on page 128 After replacing the disk go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk screen and check the status of the new disk You should also go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screen and check the array s status If it is Resynching the NSA is repairing the RAID array If it is Degraded select the array and click the Repair icon If the status is Down recreate the array volumes and sharing configuration e If the problem continues contact the NSA vendor A LAN LED is off NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troublesh
5. e Share names cannot use names reserved for automatic shares of external USB disk volumes be unique for example USB 0 9 1 2 that is a share named USB followed by a one or two digit number 7 4 2 NFS Session Screen Click Network gt NFS gt NFS Session to display the NFS session screen This screen shows which users are currently connected to the NSA using NFS Figure 150 Network gt NFS gt NFS Session SSNS Ce TTS Fy Ones es er 6 amp NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Network gt NFS gt NFS Session LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This shows that this is an NFS connection to the NSA NFS Share Path This displays the complete location of the NFS share in the NSA Username This displays the name of the user connected to the NSA Connected At This displays the date and time the user last connected to the NFS share in year day month hour minute second format IP Address This displays the IP address of the computer connected to the NSA OK Click OK to close the window NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens NSA 2401 User s Guide Sharing Screens 8 1 Overview Use the NSA s Sharing screens to manage user accounts groups of users and shares 8 1 1 What You Can Do In The Sharing Screens e Create and manage user accounts See Section 8 2 on page 175 for details e Create and manage
6. list Figure 38 Displaying the NSA Y DEVICES Macintosh HD iDisk 11800 nb Neighborhood mygroup Neighborhood nsa220 Neighborhood nsa2401 Neighborhood qisda Neighborhood trans Neighborhood workgroup Neighborhood 172 23 37 108 Server ll root s remote desktop Mac Server Y SHARED 172 23 37 108 amp ll root s remote de v v v v YVA Y Y PLACES E Desktop GS cemcpm A Applications Bi Documents gt SEARCH FOR NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Click the triangle beside the NSA s name to display the shares that Gonzo can use Figure 39 Displaying the NSA i rm FE no 7 Peis PN pi Q Y DEVICES Name Pate Modified F gt TZTZT7QT a G Macintosh HD gt 11800 nb Disk mygroup Neighborhood gt M nsaz20 Neighborhood Y SHARED gt amp nsa2401 Neighborhood ll 172 23 37 108 amp P gisda Neighborhood Il root s remote de gt trans Neighborhood Neighborh pod workgroup Neighborhood lil 172 23 37 108 Server Y PLACES E root s remote desktop Mac Server Desktop cpmcem A Applications Documents Alternatively you can also connect directly to the NSA from the Go Menu in the Finder Simply click Go gt Connect to Server Figure 40 Alternate Method for Displaying the NSA Back Forward Enclosing Folder Computer eC Date Modified Kine f Home EH Scat Neighborhood Desktop DPD ee Neighbo
7. Choose a master password to protect personal certificates Browsing Motifirations Set master password Content Fonts Downloads Programs Every time needed Ask for password Enable Fraud Protection Toolbars Shortcuts Voice NSA 2401 User s Guide 31 7 Appendix C Importing Certificates 3 In the Certificates manager select the Authorities tab select the certificate that you want to remove and then click Delete Figure 288 Opera 9 Certificate manager Certificate manager Certificate authorities 1 72 20 37 202 td AAA Certificate Services Actalis Root CA AddTrust Class 1 CA Root AddTrust External CA Root AddTrust Public CA Root AddTrust Qualified CA Root Baltimore CyberTrust Code Signing Root Baltimore CyberTrust Mobile Root Baltimore CyberTrust Root Certum CA Certum CA Level I Certum CA Level II Certum CA Level IIT Certum CA Level IV Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority G2 c 1998 VeriSig Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority 4 The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed a certification error appears ES There is no confirmation when you delete a certificate authority so be absolutely certain that you want to go through with it before clicking the button 318 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Konqueror The fo
8. Table 113 Power Consumption in Watts W SYSTEM IDLE HARD DISKS POWER SOURCE SYSTEM BOOT UP SYSTEM READ WRITE iy POWER SAVING MODE 240V 50Hz 77 8 peak 51 6 peak 24 2 120V 60Hz 76 5 peak 52 9 peak 23 0 100V 60Hz 76 0 peak 53 1 peak 22 5 This is the external power adaptor pinout specification Figure 210 Power Adaptor Pinout NSA 2401 User s Guide 261 Chapter 13 Product Specifications 262 NSA 2401 User s Guide PART IV Appendices and Index Log Messages 265 Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 275 Importing Certificates 299 Open Source Licences 323 Legal Information 353 Index 355 Log Messages This appendix shows some NSA log messages Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE MESSAGE ARGUMENT S Action Log INFO ClientIP UserName ShareNa ServiceName ActionName Delete Delete DIR me ServiceName ActionName FTP CIFS Create DIR Write upload Read FilePath FileName Under the WEB download share Action Log INFO ClientIP UserName ShareNa_ ServiceName Rename me ServiceName Rename Fil FTP CIFS ePath FileName Under the WEB share gt FilePath FileName Underthe share CIFS mill Join domain 0 type 1 Domain Domain domain mill Name Type CIFS INFO Leave Domain success domain CIFS INFO Import Domain User and Group number of number of number of domain Success 10 user s 1 domai
9. Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose
10. marketing clients engineering NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Once the Web Configurator workspace appears click Sharing gt Users to open the user account management area Figure 20 Sharing gt Users ZyXEL ss Sharing Users B Status a te bearch Account Users Grour Shares gt ON PE ars CAD lt y A Edit User Delete Retrieve User Info Selected Domain Users anguage SENM 7 E FP AN Display Number po a Prev Next admin anonymous cjackson dbowman ptuscadero rcortez tfonzarelli Prev Next gt Message KE 4 Click Add Account to open the Create a New Account screen Figure 21 Sharing gt Users gt Create a New Account Create User Username New Password Password Confirm Quota per volume Email Description Group Membership NSA 2401 User s Guide Group Membership FA 57 Chapter 3 Tutorials e Enter an account name and password Set how many megabytes of storage the account can use in each of the NSA s volumes You can set a different quota for each volume A value of 0 MB means unlimited storage e Enter the user s e mail address and any details or identifying information specific to the user account e Select the groups to which you want to assign this account e Click Apply 5 Repeat these steps for the other user accounts you need 3 2 2 Setting Up Groups After you create a
11. new network card manually Configuring or Deleting Choose a network card to change or remove Then press Configure or Delete as desired AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 MAC 08 00 27 96 ed 3d Device Name eth etho Started automatically at boot P address assigned using DHCP Ae i k Abort NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 When the Network Card Setup window opens click the Address tab Figure 245 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup l vast2 linux h202 Address Setup 4 Network Card Setup Select Mo Address Setup if you do not Banana want any IP address for this device This is onfiguration Name particularly useful for Ethernet a bonding ethernet devices O No IP Address for Bonding Devices Select Dynamic O Dynamic Address DHCP address if you do not Statically assigned IP Address have a static IP address assigned by IP Address subnet Mask Hostname the system administrator or your cable or DSL provider You can choose one of the dynamic address assignment method Select DHCP if you have a DHCP server running on your local network Network addresses are then obtained automatically from the server To automatically search for free IP and then assign it statically select Zeroconf To use Cancel 6 Select Dynamic Address DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address Select
12. 00 192 Figure 164 Sharing gt Shares gt Configuration css cacs cae ca came siacicisesutdaresimicnecenaveitacaveesnsieriamitcareetmmeneia 194 FN NNN ere vlg 194 ge ea 5 AG EET RET heen eT tree 201 Figure 167 FO gt Backup AGG Job SENT seeeneeenmaaksemeekondandavnddsbkanEv 202 20 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures 2 ee Me EEE 204 Figur 169 Protecti gt FNS Add Job Step s re sanatori eain aiea 206 Figure 170 Protect Backup gt Add Job SANN icicsassnencntaacsasiesanwcenienaarstniuniapssentoumezemnsriarsienkeotepcraeiens 207 PIS T71 FOR gt Backup gt Edi Jon SIED T nnereknckiaie da ae 208 Figure 172 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 2 rrrnrrrrnnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnnerrnnnnnnnnsnee 209 Figure 173 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 rrrnnrnnnnnnrvnnnvnnnnnrnnnnnnrnvannrnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnrnnnnnene 210 Figure 174 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 cccccsessccceceeeeeeeeeeseneeseeeeeeseaseeeeesseasseeeesenas 211 Figure 175 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 3 cccceccccsseecceeseeceeeeeceeeeeceeseesseseeenseeeeseneeens 211 FO T o FPG SRE AG 212 moure T77 Frolcei Restore Siep 2 cence ete reece tec ier pra NN EN 213 FORT FOR SFK NT cacraeicercacerdectartim neo eeanimamin oer 214 Figure 179 Protect gt Restore EE uiearenctnneentels 215 Figure 180 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs 2 0 0 0 ceccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeee
13. 6 4 Arrays RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks or JBOD is the storage method that the NSA uses The storage method you use depends on how many disks you have and how many volumes you want to create It s important that you consider this carefully as all data is deleted when you re create a volume RAID is a method of storing data on multiple disks to provide a combination of greater capacity reliability and or speed The NSA also supports JBOD Just a Bunch Of Disks which is not technically a RAID storage method You combine multiple physical disks into a RAID or JBOD array Hard Drives to Use With RAID You can use RAID or JBOD for the physical hard disk drives installed in the NSA s drive bays If you use RAID instead of JBOD it is recommended that you use hard drives of the same storage capacity as RAID uses the capacity of the array s smallest drive For example if you have four disks of sizes 100 GB 150 GB 150 GB and 200 GB respectively in one RAID array then the maximum capacity is based on the size of the smallest disk size 100 GB and the remaining space 300 GB is unused 6 4 1 RAID Levels The type of array you use depends on how many disks you have and how many arrays you want to create Consider this carefully as all data is deleted when you re create an array BS Back up your data before deleting or re creating an array NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens For example if you o
14. Downloads Ctrl Add ons Java Console Error Console Page Info Clear Private Data Ctrl 5hift Del w Options 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Advanced gt Encryption gt View Certificates Figure 271 Firefox 2 Options Options Main Tabs Content Feeds Privacy Security Advanced M 00770000 General Network Update Encryption Protocols Use SSL 3 0 Use TLS 1 0 Certificates When web site requires a certificate O Select one automatically Ask me every time NSA 2401 User s Guide 309 Appendix C Importing Certificates 3 Inthe Certificate Manager dialog box click Web Sites gt Import Figure 272 Firefox 2 Certificate Manager Certificate Manager 5 x Your Certificates People Web Sites You have certificates on file that identify these web sites Certificate Name Purposes 4 Use the Select File dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Open Figure 273 Firefox 2 Select File Select File containing Web Site certificate to import Look in E Desktop vi F T ES E 4 My Computer my Documents Jmy Network Places My Computer My Network Places File name CA cer vw Files of type Certificate Files v C 5 The next time you visit the web site click the padlock in the address bar to open the Page Info gt Security window to see the web page s security information 310 N
15. E Day C First Monday w The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 Backup Frequency Select how often the job should run Hourly Daily Weekly or Monthly It is recommended you schedule large backups for times when your network is not busy such as at night If two events are configured to run at the same time then one must wait until the other finishes running Enter the time day and or month as appropriate for your selection above Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to save your changes NSA 2401 User s Guide 207 Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 2 3 Editing a Backup Job In the Protect gt Backup screen select a backup job and click the Edit Job icon to change its settings Figure 171 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 1 Step 1 Job Settings Job Name Example second example Job Description Backup incremental Type Source folder sj file s volumedl Jeff volumedl nfs Backup Target Target path volume Compression No Encryption No Internal Volume Bandwidth N A KBs 0 for no limitation Purge Policy iE Keep All Old Backups C Keep Only backups 1 30 C Keep Backups Forf days 1 3650 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 74 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Job Name This field displays the
16. Internal Storage External Storage a built in snapshots snapshots admin advanced TCP IP Windows CIFS NFS Users Growing Shares NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Specify a name for the share and select the volume it should be on Select Kermit as the owner and set the Share Access to Advanced and click Edit Figure 25 Sharing gt Shares gt Add Share EG Edit Share Share Name Kermit Volume volumet 111 76 GE B Make This Share Owned By kem Enable This Share Enable Action Log Lal Enable A Recycle bin nd Share Access Advanced w 3 Include Senior Management under Full and click Apply This way both Kermit and the senior managers have full access to the share Figure 26 Share Access Configuration Share Access Configuration Available User s Groupts lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt Gonzo Kermit anonymous p lt DOMAINUSERS gt admin m lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt Senior Management lt LOCALGROUPS gt SE lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Everyone Management lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Note Tou may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Back in the Edit Shares screen click Apply Figure 27 Sharing gt S
17. gt ea volume1 405 13 GB ll 384 50 GB capacity 810 38 A GB disk1 disk4 disk3 Disks in the array i Hot Spare Currently there are no hot spare disks Available Diskis Currently there are no available disk s1 The following table describes this screen Table 19 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Wizards Click this icon to open the Disk Setup Wizard to create a new disk array or volume Array type and capacity The type of disk array JBOD or RAID level is listed first along with the array s capacity See Section 6 4 on page 132 for more on the types of disk array Volumes and their The name and capacity of each volume in the array capacity This represents the internal physical hard drives Used Space This represents how much of a volume s capacity is currently filled by files Locked Volume This represents a volume to which the NSA is blocking access Used Space snapshot Snapshots records of changes to files within a volume are stored in the space on the disk array that is not allocated to volumes This represents how much of that space is currently filled by snapshots See Chapter 9 on page 197 for more on snapshots RAID Free Space This is space on the disk array that is not allocated to volumes and is not yet used by snapshots Volume Free Space This is space on a storage volume that is not used up by files Disks in the array The disks that belong to the a
18. 0 file size 1 bytes System INFO The file 0 is verified and File Name FW restored system is going to restart System NOTICE The file 0 is corrupted Stop File Name FW the configuration restoration System NOTICE Firmware is upgrading from OLD VERSI NEW VER FW version 0 to 1 ON SION System NOTICE Firmware upgrade fails the file FW is invalid or corrupted System INFO NTP server is set to 0 NTP server Time INFO NTP updates successfully from NTP server 0 Time 272 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S System INFO Daylight saving is disabled Time System INFO Daylight saving is enabled Time W INFO USER 0 1 login WEB User Name SUCCESS INFO USER 10 has logged out from User Name WEB INFO USER 0 1 login WEB failed User Name INFO Certficate is imported successfully File Name W W Certificate Request on system There is not any Certificate Request and private key on system Please create a Certificate Request and enroll it eb SSL NOTICE The public key in 0 doesn t match the public key of SSL NOTICE The file 0 is not a valid File Name Certificate file NOTICE Failed to import Certificate SL S NOTICE Unexpected error while importing Certificate file NSA 2401 User s Guide 273 Appendix A Log Messages 274 NSA 2401 User s Guide NSA 2401 User s Guide
19. 257 affect on write performance 91 218 create 218 creation 90 image access 91 217 images 219 notes 198 restoring files 91 troubleshooting 254 versus backup 199 spreadsheets 236 SSL 82 239 tutorial 69 standby drive 137 status messages 51 screen 117 storage 125 260 disk 128 external disk 145 humidity 260 increasing capacity tutorial 106 internal 127 temperature 260 striping 151 sub links 49 supported clients 260 360 NSA 2401 User s Guide synchronization 203 tutorial 92 syntax conventions 4 SYS LED 33 troubleshooting 249 syslog server 229 236 system management 261 system setting 121 T TCP IP 162 teaming mode 163 temperature CPU 119 operating 260 thumbprint 79 time 121 Daylight Saving Time 122 lag 122 time server 122 timeout 37 TLS 82 223 Transport Layer Security see TLS troubleshooting backups 254 buzzer 251 COPY LED 255 domain user 253 domain user share access 254 file access 254 folder access 254 forgot password 251 LED indicators 249 ALM 250 LAN 251 PWR 250 SYS 249 local user share access 253 login 252 NDU discovery 252 non admin passwords 252 overview 249 snapshots 254 Web Configurator access 252 tutorials 55 U Unicode Index 8 bit UCS Unicode Transformation Format see UTF 8 unlock 140 141 146 148 external volume 148 unlocked volumes 126 upgrading firmware 241 uploading files 40 UPS 243 USB 31 107 devices 39 drives 145 eject 146 exte
20. 66 FOUG ee Rts FN ME NGA EE RE EE EEE 66 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures FONN eee 67 Figure 40 Alternate Method for Displaying the NSA rrrrrrnnnnnvnvnnnnvrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnsrnnnnnnnsennnnnsrnnnnnnnennnnnn 67 FEET EEE EE EE 68 ge EE ETT 69 Figure 43 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate mrrrrrrrnrrrrrrrvrrvrrrrnnnnnrrrrrrrrvrrrrnnnnnnnnne 69 Figure 44 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate rrrrrrrnrnrrrrnnnnnrvrrnnnrrnnnnnnrenrnnnnrrnnnnnnee 70 FIT Varro 71 Figure 46 Downloading Ne NEAS Certificate Leserne eee 71 Figure 47 Downloading the NAAS Certificate 44resessessmesmmmmeninekueaetmnemnibagekun 72 FE REE TE ne eee eee ete moe EN re RE 72 Figure 49 Certificate Import Wizard Welcome rrrnrnnrnnnnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnnannsenn Ta Figure 50 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store rrrrrrrrrrnnnnvrrnnnnrrrvnnnnnvnrnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrennnnnsennnnnnn 73 Figure 51 Certificate Import Wizard Finish rrrerrrnnnnrnrorrrnnnnnnenrrrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnrnnnnsrennnnnnnnssennnnnsnnnssenn 74 FUN NNN 74 Figure 53 Certificate Import Wizard Successful rrrrrrrrnnnnnvrrnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnssennnnnnnnnnneenn 74 PU TL ee eee ee ee eee on eee eee ee ee eee nee eee 75 Figure 55 Maintenance gt SSL gt Force HTTPS Warning ccc ccciccscsssccssecscessessaienssesssceescsesssceneatenseeersesees 76 Figure
21. 80 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 9 The login screen displays Figure 62 HTTPS Login ZyXEL NSA 2401 Mozilla Firefox File Edit wiew History Bookmarks Tools Help Most Visited W wikipedia 192 168 1 1 G2 TW ZyWALL 1050 7 vahoo BabelFish T Google Welcome to NWS4 2401 Enter Username password and click to login uUsername Password a maximum of 14 alphanumeric printable characters no single and double quotes i Note Please turn on the Javascript and ActiveX control setting on Internet Explorer Login Reset Now anyone who connects to the NSA s Web Configurator screens will automatically do so by HTTPs Use a secure method to let your users know the correct fingerprint for the NSA s certificate so they can check it before adding a security exception as in steps 6 to 7 on pages 78 to 79 See the next section for how to use FTPES with the NSA for secure FTP transfers 3 5 2 Using FTPES to Connect to the NSA This section covers how to use FTP over Explicit TLS with the NSA for secure FTP transfers Before you go through this section read Section 3 5 1 on page 68 to configure HTTPS This example uses FileZilla NSA 2401 User s Guide 81 Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Open FileZilla and click File gt Site Manager gt New Site e Configure the Host field with the NSA s address e Set the Servertype to FTPES FTP over explicit TLS SSL e Configure the account name and password e Cli
22. Change Share Pr Iperties Share Name Example Share Volume volume 55 62 GB 7 Make this share ladnin 6c w owned by Enable this share Ed Enable action log E Enable recycle bin E Share Access Make it public D The following table describes the labels in the this screen Table 10 My NSA Change Share Properties LABEL DESCRIPTION Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder The text may consist of 1 to 255 characters See Share Name Details on page 44 for more information Select a volume for the share to be located on NSA 2401 User s Guide 43 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 10 My NSA Change Share Properties continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Make this share Select an owner for the share owned by Enable this share Select this to activate the share Enable action log Select this to keep a log of all actions performed on the share Enable recycle bin Select this to create a recycle bin on the share Whenever a user with sufficient permissions deletes a file or folder it is stored here until it is deleted permanently Choose whether the share is public or private or choose Advanced to open the Share Access Configuration screen see Section 2 5 4 1 on page 44 Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window Share Name Details Use any character except double quotes single quotes slashes I or square brackets
23. Groups Groups 8 Add Search Update Edit Group Delete Group Domain Selected Display Number 20 W Groups Groupis Goto Page fm Type l Wkeywordsji GF GE Page 1 f i1 Example Pagel of 1 The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 53 Sharing gt Groups Icons Add Group Click this icon to open the Add a New Local Group screen where you can add new local groups See Section 8 3 1 on page 184 for details Search Click this icon to display the search filters which you can use to search for user groups by type or keyword Update Domain Groups Select a group from the list then click this icon to retrieve its domain information where applicable Edit Group Select a group from the list then click this icon to edit its permissions See Section 8 2 1 on page 178 for details 182 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 53 Sharing gt Groups Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Delete Selected Groups Se Select a group from the list then click this icon to remove it You can only delete local user groups not domain groups 1 Delete Group FREEP1776 The following user s will no longer be members of Group FREEP1776 FredT AgathaG Do you wish to proceed Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Conflict Local Group Indicates a loc
24. LABEL DESCRIPTION Volume Name Select the volume upon which you want to create the NFS enabled share Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder The text may consist of 1 to 106 characters See Share Name Details on page 170 for details Full Path Comment DNS IP Filter This field displays the complete location of the share in the NSA Add descriptive text to help you identify the share To control access to the NFS share configure filters based on domain names and IP addresses Enter a domain name or IP address and select the appropriate level of access You can also just use a to indicate any read only The users can view the files in the share but not delete them or add files read write The users have full access to the share and can read delete and add files A remove Apply Cancel Click to discard changes and close the window Q Q Click this button to display another field for entering a DNS or IP filter Click this button to remove the DNS or IP filter field Click to save your changes Share Name Details Use any character except double quotes single quotes slashes or square brackets colons semi colons angle brackets lt gt the plus sign semi colons commas question marks asterisks the pound sign tab and the equals sign e Spaces are not allowed e Share names must be unique they cannot be the same as other share names
25. Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Your specific ZyXEL device may not support all of the operating systems described in this appendix See the product specifications for more information about which operating systems are supported This appendix shows you how to configure the IP settings on your computer in order for it to be able to communicate with the other devices on your network Windows Vista XP 2000 Mac OS 9 OS X and all versions of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to use TCP IP on your computer If you manually assign IP information instead of using a dynamic IP make sure that your network s computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet In this appendix you can set up an IP address for e Windows XP NT 2000 on page 276 e Windows Vista on page 279 e Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 on page 283 e Mac OS X 10 5 on page 286 e Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME on page 289 e Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE on page 293 275 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows XP NT 2000 The following example uses the default Windows XP display theme but can also apply to Windows 2000 and Windows NT 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 211 Windows XP Start Menu Internet Explorer My Documents e Outlook Express W Paint W Files and Settings Transfer W 4 My Recent Documents E My Pictures hf B9 Command Prompt LE My Music E Acrobat Reader 4 0 My
26. and Volumes and C are on RAID Array 1 RAID Array 1 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Encrypted Volumes BES When you create a volume you can encrypt it using either a manually entered password or a USB key Others cannot read the data even if they take the physical drive Encrypting a volume does not affect how the volume s users use it The NSA automatically encrypts data the users write to the encrypted volume and de crypts the data they read Keep an encrypted volume s password or USB key in a safe place Without the password or USB key you cannot access the volume if it becomes locked All of the volume s data will be unusable Locked and Unlocked Volumes Keep an encrypted volume unlocked to allows users to use its shares as normal Lock an encrypted volume to block all user access to its shares The NSA automatically locks an encrypted volume if the disk is removed or the NSA restarts is reset since a reset includes a restart or loses power The administrator can also manually lock the volume Once a volume is locked no one can use it until an administrator unlocks it The NSA does not take snapshots of a locked volume See Chapter 9 on page 197 for more on snapshots Degraded Arrays BS A degraded array is one that is damaged by a hard drive failure but can still be repaired by replacing the failed drive The array is still operational but at risk since all of the array s data may
27. criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Status This icon shows whether the volume is Healthy Locked Unlocked or Down see Section 6 6 on page 139 If a volume is degraded click the The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume LABEL DESCRIPTION This field shows the name of the volume Volume Type This field shows the volume is unencrypted Normal or encrypted Crypto File System This field displays the type of file system that an external USB volume is using This field shows to which USB port the device is connected Capacity This field shows the total size of the volume how much is currently in use and how much is still available 148 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 8 1 Creating or Editing an External Volume LS Creating a volume on a USB device formats it All data on the USB device is lost Click Storage gt External Storage gt Volume gt Create to display the external USB connected volume creation screen as shown next You can also select an existing external volume and click the Edit icon Use this screen to add or edit external storage volumes BS Keep an encrypted volume s password or USB key in a safe place You cannot access a locked volume without the password or USB key All of the volume s data will be unusable If you use a USB key keep backup copies Do not use the U
28. fail RAID This icon represents a disk array See the chapter on the storage screens for more details Volume This icon represents a storage volume See the chapter on the storage screens for more details Disk This icon shows the status of a hard disk See the chapter on the storage screens for more details Create If you have disk space available for a new disk array then click this icon to open a screen where you can create a new disk array Delete Select an entry and click this icon to remove the entry Edit Select an entry and click this icon to modify it s settings NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 15 Common Configuration Screen Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION User This is a user icon See the chapter on the sharing screens for details on variants of this icon Share This is a share icon See the chapter on shares for details on variants of this icon 2 7 NSA RESET Button BES Use the RESET button on the front panel of the NSA to reset either just the NSA s admin password and IP address settings or the whole factory default configuration file Use an object such as an unfolded paper clip to press the RESET button Ideally you should back up the current NSA configuration file before resetting or reloading the factory default configuration file 2 1 Reset Do the following to only reset the administrator password and IP address settings
29. provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute t
30. s battery charge gets down to the percentage you specify in this field This allows the NSA to shut down properly and avoid data loss caused by a power failure when the UPS stops supplying power A setting around 50 is recommended A setting close to 100 is not recommended since it would cause the NSA to shut down whenever the UPS is charging A setting close to 0 is also not recommended since the UPS would not have enough power to allow the NSA to shutdown properly Apply Click this to save your changes in this section NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Table 106 Maintenance gt Power Management continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Power On After Power Select an option to set whether or not the NSA restarts when the power is Failure restored after a power failure Keep Former Status Select this option to have the NSA automatically restart only if it was operating when the power failed The NSA remains off if it was already off when the power failed Always Power On Select this option to keep the NSA operating as much of the time as possible The NSA restarts automatically even if it was turned off when the power failed Always Power Off Select this option to keep the NSA from automatically restarting when the power is restored after a power failure This is a computer s traditional behavior Select this if you have other servers such as a domain controller or DNS server that you want to start or check a
31. s Guide 257 Chapter 13 Product Specifications Table 110 Firmware Features continued Disk Quota Use the disk quota feature to stop one user s from using up all disk capacity by setting a limit on how much storage space he she may use User Passwords Configure a password for an individual User to restrict access to the NSA Non admin users can change their own passwords by accessing the Web Configurator The Change Password screen appears when a username other than admin is entered Volume Encryption The NSA can create encrypted volumes so an attacker who removes the physical drive still cannot read the data ACL The Access Control List ACL defines user read write permissions for specific files and or folders Storage Event Logs The NSA can keep detailed records of all user access to files and folders Workgroup and Domain For Windows or Mac OSX users using the Common Internet File Security Modes System CIFS protocol for remote file access you can configure Workgroup mode requiring users to log in with a user name and password These user and group accounts are maintained on the NSA For a large number of CIFS users where accounts are stored on an external server you can use Domain security mode Primary Domain Controller Client Support Data can be shared among all Windows Mac Linux and UNIX users that have FTP client software or CIFS file sharing support such as Samba for Linux and UNIX users IEEE 802
32. s storage allocation With it an administrator can create delete move and resize any number of logical volumes at will Snapshot A snapshot is a point in time copy of data on a logical volume Later as new snapshots of the volume are made only those bits of data that have changed from the original snapshot are duplicated This allows a system to create instant backups on the fly without requiring a user to stop working or temporarily abandon the machine Moreover snapshots take up a fraction of the space of traditional full volume backups Network Attached Storage NAS A NAS is basically a computer that is connected to a network and which provides additional storage capabilities to users and groups NAS solutions most often serve as backup destinations because they come with multiple hard disk drives and numerous redundancy features in case any given drive fails Access Control List ACL This is a list of read write permissions associated with specific files and or folders Account names added to the list are linked to the files and folders that they are allowed to access along with what kinds of actions they are allowed to perform with those files and folders NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Conflicting Share Access and ACL Settings If the share s access permissions and the access permissions defined in the ACL differ the NSA applies whichever is more restrictive For example if the share allows
33. 04 15 17 07 7 This screen lists the Strategy share s ACLs Click Close Figure 74 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy ee SS SS SS S ACL Configuration New ACL Edit ACL Reset ACL Share Name Gonzo eim Type ACL Path Og Strategy 2010 2014 Plans doc You are done configuring the 2010 2014 Plans doc file s ACL settings Only Gonzo can edit or delete the files in the Strategy folder Kermit and any member of the senior management group can log into the NSA and view the contents of the Strategy folder although Kermit cannot see the 2010 2014 Plans doc file NSA 2401 User s Guide 3 6 Power Resume Chapter 3 Tutorials To keep the NSA operating as much of the time as possible do the following to have the NSA automatically restart when the power comes back on after a power failure Click Maintenance gt Power Management Select Always Power On and click Apply Figure 75 Maintenance gt Power Management Status Date Time Internal Storage External Storage TECP AF Windows CIFS NFS Users Groups Shares Backup Restore Snapshot Backup Software FIP Print Server Copy Button Log Configuration SSL Certification Fw Upgrade Power Managemen Shutdown es Maintenance Power Management Hard Drive Sleep Time Settings Note Set the Hard Drive Sleep Time to 0 minute s to Disable A caution When your Hard Drive s are asleep it may take some tim
34. 2011 install gest Issuer Statement NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 In the Certificate Import Wizard click Next Figure 49 Certificate Import Wizard Welcome Certificate Import Wizard Welcome to the Certificate Import Wizard This wizard helps you copy certificates certificate trust lists and certificate revocation lists from your disk to a certificate store A certificate which is issued by a certification authority is a confirmation of your identity and contains information used to protect data or to establish secure network connections certificate store is the system area where certificates are kept To continue cick Next 6 Leave Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate selected and click Next Figure 50 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location for Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate Place all certificates in the following store fe s NSA 2401 User s Guide 13 Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 Inthe Completing the Certificate Import Wizard screen click Finish Figure 51 Certificate Import Wizard Finish Certificate Import Wizard Completing the Certificate Import Wizard You have suc
35. 202 This connection to the server is encrypted Should I trustthis site View certificates 304 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Installing a Stand Alone Certificate File in Internet Explorer Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public key certificate when prompted you can install a stand alone certificate file if one has been issued to you 1 Double click the public key certificate file Figure 261 Internet Explorer 7 Public Key Certificate File 2 Inthe security warning dialog box click Open Figure 262 Internet Explorer 7 Open File Security Warning Open File Security Warning Do you want to open this file Name CA cer as Publisher Unknown Publisher Type Security Certificate From D Documents and Settings 13435 Desktop Always ask before opening this file While files from the Intemet can be useful this file type can potentially hann your computer f you do not trust the source do not open this software What s the risk 3 Refer to steps 4 12 in the Internet Explorer procedure beginning on page 300 to complete the installation process NSA 2401 User s Guide 305 Appendix C Importing Certificates Removing a Certificate in Internet Explorer This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Internet Explorer 7 1 Open Internet Explorer and click Tools gt Internet Options Figure 263 Internet Explorer 7 Tools Menu er E
36. 35 am GMT Serial number 11139321193569894228 MDS digest 3F 9A 76 6E A9 F5 07 41 BE 4C 8B 8B A2 D3 F0 2F Cipher in use DHE RSA AES256 SHA Details DHE RSA AES256 SHA SSLv3 Kx DH Au RSA Enc AES 256 Mac SHA1l SSL version TLSv1 SSLv3 Cipher strength 256 bits used of a 256 bit cipher NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Installing a Stand Alone Certificate File in Konqueror Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public key certificate when prompted you can install a stand alone certificate file if one has been issued to you 1 Double click the public key certificate file Figure 292 Konqueror 3 5 Public Key Certificate File 2 Inthe Certificate Import Result Kleopatra dialog box click OK Figure 293 Konqueror 3 5 Certificate Import Result W Certificate Import Result Kleop Detailed results of importing CA der T Total number processed 1 Imported 1 The public key certificate appears in the KDE certificate manager Kleopatra Figure 294 Konqueror 3 5 Kleopatra Kleopatra File View Certificates CRLs Tools Settings Help Subject Issuer Serial CN 10R CA 1 PN O Bundesnetzagentur c CN 10R CA 1 PN 0 B 2A CN 11R CA 1 PN O0 Bundesnetzagentur C CN 11R CA 1 PN 0 B 2D CN 172 20 37 202 0U X Z2200 0 ZyXEL i CN 172 20 37 202 00 CN 6R Ca 1PM NAMEDISTINGUISHER 1 0 CN 6R Ca 1 PN NAME CN 7R CA L PN NAMEDISTINGUISHER 1 0 CN 7R CA 1 P
37. 3d Ethernet LAN2 can backup LAN1 If LAN1 loses its connection LAN2 takes Failover over LAN1 s IP address and traffic IEEE 802 3d Ethernet Load The NSA can distribute the traffic load across LAN1 and LANZ2 Balance HTTP HTTPS Access the NSA using a regular web connection HTTP or an encrypted web connection HTTPS using secure socket layer SSL SSL Certificate Manager The NSA can generate certificates and certificate requests DHCP Dynamic Host DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the NSA to Configuration Protocol obtain an IP address and subnet mask at start up from a centralized DHCP server Alternatively you can give the NSA a static IP address and subnet mask Full Network Management The embedded Web Configurator is an platform independent web based utility that allows you to easily access the NSA s management settings Firmware Upload and Upload new firmware to the NSA using the Web Configurator You Configuration File can also back up and restore the NSA configuration file containing all Management its settings to from your computer NSA Discovery Utility NDU Use the NDU from a Windows computer to find NSA s in your network access the NSA login page change its IP address configuration or map to a Windows network drive Genie Backup Manager Genie Backup Manager is a tool for Windows users to create and schedule backups of data stored on their Windows computer to an NSA The NSA can use th
38. 56 Firefox Secure Connection Failed ceseedisccicsctecccavsseeenapesaeeiaracccidiasmeepeceecaeioomnsenesiantegeecsebeeacs 76 Figure 57 Firefox Secure Connection Failed ccccecccecescccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeessseeaeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeeetags 77 Figure 58 Firefox Add Security FANN essensen eeldLe 77 Figure 59 Firefox Add Security Exception cccccccccccssseecceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeessaaeaeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeeeeaas 78 Figure 60 FO Acd Secu B NN oiesesenetacictacsinensccnreescucvseneacaicradeesasementetdaccbepeacnieeemiasnicretieiouns 79 Figure 61 Firefox Add Security Exception cccccccccccsssescceeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseesaseeeeessaeeaeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeeeeaas 80 ae ATIP E etches eg Sa ss ew nme pea ale ee sce eerie 81 Pour eo FE es ee vek 82 Figure 64 FileZilla Unknown Certificate Warning cccccccssseseecceeeeceecceeeeecaeeeceeeeaaeeeeeseaecessueseeesaanaaes 83 ETE EEE EEE ER 83 Figure 66 Sharing gt Shares gt Edit Share Lenne elenelekd 84 Figure 67 Share Access Configuration cccccccsseecccceceeeeseceeecaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesseeeeceeesssaeaeeeeeeesaeaeeeseeeeeaas 84 eg ee TE EE EE EE ER ER 85 Figure 69 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration ccccccccccsseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeceeseseeaeeeeeesseaeeeeeessaaegs 85 Figure 70 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL rrrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnrennnnnnrnnnnnsnsennnnnne 86 Figure 71 Sharing gt Shares
39. Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Expos Screen Saver Hardware 0 Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Internet amp Network e fa ci 2 Inthe System Preferences window click the Network icon Figure 224 Mac OS X 10 4 System Preferences aan System Preferences 4 Show All fal Personal GEM AA 6 Q Appearance Dashboard amp Desktop amp Dock International Security Spotlight Expos Screen Saver Hardware no E 0 gt ws A ko i Y EF i Bluetooth CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp N a eya Mac QuickTime Sharing System 2aGQ E Accounts Date amp Time Software speech Startup Disk Universal Update ACCESS NSA 2401 User s Guide 283 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Built in Ethernet from the network connection type list and then click Configure Figure 225 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences een Network lt Show All Q Location _ Automatic hed Show Network Status 14 Bulk in Ethernet 15 currently active and has the IP address Built in Ethernet 10 0 1 2 You are connected to the Internet via Built in Ethernet l Internet Sharing 15 on and is using AirPort to share the AirPort connection Configure Bsconnect D Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 4
40. BTN NOTICE RESET BUTTON Reset configuration to factory default Scheduler INFO Job O is triggered by schedule JOBname 1 Scheduler INFO Job 0 is is finished JOB name successfully Ene I ee ME EE CLE INFO Restore job 0 is triggered by JOB name user Scheduler INFO Power On schedule is Power triggered Scheduler INFO Power Off schedule is Power triggered Scheduler INFO Reboot schedule is triggered Power Snapshot INFO Take Snapshot with Job Name Snapshot Job Rotate 0 Rotate Count 1 name Count SUCCESS Snapshot CRIT Take Snapshot with Job Name Snapshot Job Rotate 0 Rotate Count 1 FAILED name Count Snapshot INFO Purge Snapshot Image 0 Snapshot SUCCESS Image Name Snapshot CRIT Purge Snapshot Image 0 Snapshot FAILED Image Name Snapshot INFO Delete Snapshot Image 0 Snapshot SUCCESS Image Name Snapshot CRIT Delete Snapshot Image 0 Snapshot FAILED Image Name NSA 2401 User s Guide 267 Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S Snapshot INFO Expand Snapshot Image Snapshot Size O Increased Size 1 MB Image Name SUCCESS Snapshot CRIT Expand Snapshot Image Snapshot Size O Increased Size 1 MB Image Name FAILED INFO Enable Snap Share SUCCESS CRIT Enable Snap Share FAILED INFO Disable Snap Share SUCCESS LG CRIT Disable Snap Share FAILED i Snapshot CRIT No Freespace to Expand Snapshot Snapshot Pur
41. Computer ae Tour Windows sP Windows Movie Maker E Control Panel I Printers and Faxes Help and Support Search All Programs gt EJ Run Log Orr D Turn OFF Computer is untitled Paint 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network Connections icon Figure 212 Windows XP Control Panel E Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e acl ei po Search m Folders Hae address gt Control Panel vg Control Panel Network E Switch to Category view Connections See Also 7 Game Windows Update Controllers 2 6 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 213 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties ocal Area Connection nabled jas 3 standard PCI Fast Ethernet Adapte Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Rename 4 On the General tab select Internet Protocol TCP IP and then click Properties Figure 214 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties _ Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced _ Connect using M Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following tems M E Client for Microsoft Networks File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Description Transmission Control Frotocol Internet Prot
42. EE NN EE EE 276 Figure 212 Windows PI OPP saseserree eee ae 276 Figure 213 Windows XP Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Properties cccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeees 277 Figure 214 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties rrrrrrnnrerrnnnrrrnnnrrnnnnnennanrennnenennnanennnaneen 277 Figure 215 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties rrrrrnrrrrvrnnrnvrrrrnnrevrrnnnnrrnrnnenenrnnnnnene 278 Figure 216 Windows vista Start EEE 279 Foure 217 IS Veia COMTO EE rirka ir kirisaii iiite 279 Figure 218 Windows Vista Network And Internet ccccccseeeeceeseeceeseeceeseecceeeeeseaeeecsageessegeesseeeeess 279 Figure 219 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center cccccseccccccssseeeceeeeeecseeeseceeseseeeseeaeeeesaaees 280 Figure 220 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center rrrrrnnnrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrvnnnnnnrnvrnnnnennnnnnrenrnnnerennnnn 280 Figure 221 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties rrrrnrnrrnrannnnevrnnnnnnvrrnnnnrvnnnnnrennnnnnrennnnn 281 Figure 222 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties c cccccceseeeeeeeeees 282 Figure 223 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu rrrannnrrrnrrnnnnnvrnrrnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnsnseennnnnnnnnnee 283 Figure 224 Mac OS X 10 4 System Preferences Luuussdnerssemkenease eee abetbukondande 283 Figure 225 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences rrrrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnernnrrnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnn
43. Information Job Mame German Office Job Description Backup Type Archive o Synchronization Publish Mirror A Caution Please make sure that your backup target directory is empty otherwise all files will be deleted during the first run of the backup job NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select the folder that needs to be mirrored the Gonzo share s Strategic Partners folder in this example and Remote e Enter the other NSA s address and administrator password e Click Show target content to display the remote NSA s contents e Select the destination on the remote NSA Backups in this example e Click Next Figure 82 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 2 Add anew backup Job volumet EH volume EL sj Gonzo EH 5SyearPlan EH snap share FLEA Strategic Partners LH Kermit HHC Strategy Cm Business Plan lial Sales volurelfGonzofStrateqgic Partners Backup Target g Remote Remote NSA 921681340 pr 192 160 1 34 Username admin Admin Only Remote Admin s BER Password SHOW content OG volumet x iad volume volurnelfBackups C Local f External Previous 94 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Click OK in the warning dialog box Figure 83 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 The page at http 192 168 1 35 says iz You are creating a mirror job When you run this job all the file fo
44. MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED FASHION OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR PLATFORM SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY 30 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE SOFTWARE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD 7 Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION INDIRECT SPECIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY EVEN IF ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ZyXEL S AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEME
45. Mode LAN1 LAN2 Link Aggregation This uses IEEE 802 3ad port link aggregation to combine LAN and LAN into a single logical link with greater bandwidth Both interfaces use the same IP address and MAC address It also includes fault tolerance and load balancing Connect LAN I and LAN to the same Ethernet switch The switch must also have IEEE 802 3ad port link aggregation also called trunking enabled for the two interfaces connected to the NSA Figure 142 Link Aggregation Teaming Mode LAN1 LAN2 Jumbo Frames To use jumbo frames your network must support I Gbps transmissions Gigabit Ethernet All of your network devices computer Ethernet cards and switches hubs or routers must also support the same size of jumbo frames that you specify in the NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide 161 Chapter 7 Network Screens BS If you enable jumbo frames on the NSA in a network that does not support them you will lose access to the NSA If this occurs you will have to restore the factory default configuration Use the RESET button or the Web Configurator In the following example the NSA has jumbo frames enabled and set to 9KB frames This means the computer notebook computer and switch must also have jumbo frames enabled and be capable of supporting 9KB frames Figure 143 Jumbo Frames 1 Gbps Ethernet 7 2 1 Configuring the TCP IP Screen BES Use the Network gt TCP IP screen to assign the NSA a dyn
46. Protect Screens Figure 166 Protect gt Backup rh 8 amp 8 pA Add Job Edit Job Delete Execute Restore Selected Job Now Archive The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 68 Protect gt Backup Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Add Job Click this icon to create a new backup job see also Section 9 2 2 on page 202 Edit Job Select a backup job and click this icon to modify it s settings Delete Selected Jobs s per Select a backup job s and click this icon to remove the job s This does i not delete any backup files the backup job has already created gone Job All selected backup job s will be DELETED re you sure you want to DELETE the selected backup jobs Execute Job Now Select a backup job and click this icon to have the NSA perform the backup now without waiting for the scheduled time Restore Archive Select an archive backup job that has already run and click this icon to restore a previous backup from another NSA or external USB hard drive connected to the NSA Another option is to use Protect gt Restore Section 9 2 3 on page 208 to restore by the backup files themselves NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens Table 68 Protect gt Backup Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Abort Job If a backup job is currently running you can select it and click this icon to stop and abort the job Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that c
47. Q QuickTime Sharing Network System na 9 O Accounts Date amp Time Parental Software Speech Startup Disk Time Machine Universal Controls Update Access 286 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the Network preferences pane opens select Ethernet from the list of available connection types Figure 231 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet aon Network Internal Modem as Not Connected 5 Status Not Connected The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE your computer does not have an IP address Not Lonnected Ethernet ae Configure Using DHCP Not Connected FireWire Not Connected AirPort Off DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 Chavanced n p Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me 4 From the Configure list select Using DHCP for dynamically assigned settings 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure list select Manually In the IP Address field enter your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field enter your subnet mask e In the Router field enter the IP address of your NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide 287 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Figure 232 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet An Network Location Automatic Hj Internal Modem Q Not Connected amp Status Not Connect
48. RAID 0 are non critical data or data that changes infrequently and is backed up regularly requiring high write speed such as audio video graphics games and so on 6 9 4 RAID 1 RAID 1 creates an exact copy or mirror of a set of data on another disk This is useful when data backup is more important than data capacity The following figure shows two disks in a single RAID I array with mirrored data Data is duplicated across two disks so if one disk fails there is still a copy of the data Table 39 RAID 1 As RAID 1 uses mirroring and duplexing a RAID 1 array needs an even number of disks two or four for the NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens RAID I capacity is limited to the size of the smallest disk in the RAID array For example if you have two disks of sizes 150 GB and 200 GB respectively in one RAID array then the maximum capacity is 150 GB and the remaining space 50 GB is unused Typical applications for RAID I are those requiring high fault tolerance without need of large amounts of storage capacity or top performance for example accounting and financial data small database systems and enterprise servers 6 9 5 RAID 10 RAID 10 RAID 1 0 is a nested RAID where two RAID I arrays are stored on the physical disks with a RAID 0 array on top It is a stripe of mirrors RAID 1 provides redundancy while RAID 0 boosts performance The following figure shows two disks in two RAID 1 arrays Dat
49. Refresh icon to update this display It also automatically updates itself every 60 seconds Fan Speed This is the RPM Rotations Per Minute of the NSA s fans Click the Refresh icon to update this display It also automatically updates itself every 60 seconds Memory Usage This shows how much of the NSA s total memory is being used Click the Refresh icon to update this display It also automatically updates itself every 10 seconds UPS Status When you use an APC Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS with a USB connection to the NSA this field displays the remaining charge for the UPS s battery A UPS is advisable to protect sensitive data stored on the NSA in the event of a power outage The NSA uses power from the UPS when the normal power source is down and while the UPS still has battery power The NSA shuts itself down if the UPS s battery charge gets down to the percentage you specify in the Power Management screen see Section 11 6 on page 242 This allows the NSA to shut down properly and avoid data loss caused by a power failure when the UPS stops supplying power The NSA uses power from the normal power source again when its power returns The APC UPS battery is recharged then too a T Server Name This displays the name which helps you find the NSA on the network Click the Edit icon to go to the Network gt Windows CIFS screen where you can change the Server Name Model Name This displays the device s model name This
50. ST32508205CE 3 40 232 09 GB 3 Click the RAID tab to display the RAID array summary screen Select the array to which you want to add the disk and click Add Disk Figure 109 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Internal Storage A FP T Sa S B Wizards Create Rename Delete Repair Resyne Add Disk Remove Speed Hot Spare 3 i DE SED 1 atid _ so 108 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Select RAID5 Reshape and click Apply Figure 110 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Add Disk PRS EGGENE Add Disk Disk Name disk w Please choose an option amp RAIDS Reshape C Add Hot Spare 5 After the NSA finishes adding the disk to the array click the Disk tab The new disk displays the same Type and RAID Array as the other disks in the array Figure 111 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk EEE Internal Storage F Z S M A RT Model Name seagate STISO008305CE raldsSD2D1iD4D3 465 76 GB raidSD2D1D4D3 Beagate ST312082745 3 42 111 79 GB Healthy aidED2D1D4D3 DE WOS000AAVS 002ZTB 465 76 GB Healthy 01 0 idsnonipaps seagate ST32508205CE 232 89 GB Healthy You have completed adding the hard drive to the RAID array Continue to Section 3 9 3 on page 109 for how to use the increased storage capacity 3 9 3 Using a Disk Array s Increased Capacity After you increase an array s storage capacity us
51. Settings window select the connection that you want to configure then click Properties Figure 237 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections Wetwone Setting Location Point to point connec This network interface is not c 290 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Properties dialog box opens Figure 238 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Properties Ao Properties rrr IP address Subnet mask Gateway address fd cancel e In the Configuration list select Automatic Configuration DHCP if you have a dynamic IP address e In the Configuration list select Static IP address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Gateway address fields 6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Properties dialog box and return to the Network Settings screen 7 Ifyou know your DNS server IP address es click the DNS tab in the Network Settings window and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 239 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt DNS Search Domains 8 Click the Close button to apply the changes NSA 2401 User s Guide 291 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking System gt Administration gt Network Tools and then selecting the appropriate Network device from the Devices tab The Interface Statistics c
52. Speed Hot Spare TRAD A i mE ecovering 0 112 81 GB i i 11 raldsSpiD3D4 RAIDS Used Estimated Time Leftdt 223 56 GB Total 50 Free sk mings After the recovery finishes and the status shows up as Healthy reboot the NSA Then you can use the same process to migrate any or all of the RAID s drive as long as you replace them one by one and recover the RAID after each replacement When you are done replacing hard drives and the final RAID recovery finishes you can assign the increased storage capacity to your existing volumes see Section 3 9 3 on page 109 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 114 NSA 2401 User s Guide PART II Web Configurator Status Screen 117 System Setting Screen 121 Storage Screens 125 Network Screens 159 Sharing Screens 173 Protect Screens 197 Application Screens 223 Maintenance Screens 229 Status Screen 4 1 Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen you see after you log into the Web Configurator and complete the wizard for the first time It provides an overview of your NSA s status settings and activity Once you leave the screen you can return to it by clicking the Status icon or the text itself on the top left of the navigation panel Figure 121 Status Screen System Resource System Information Server Name nsa2401 Model Name NSA 2401 Firmware Version 1 00 AFF 0 b4 00 19 CB 82 96 63 MAC Address 00 19 CB 8
53. Statically assigned IP Address if you have a static IP address Fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Hostname fields 7 Click Next to save the changes and close the Network Card Setup window NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 8 If you know your DNS server IP address es click the Hostname DNS tab in Network Settings and then enter the DNS server information in the fields provided Figure 246 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings Yast2 linux h20z lt Enterthenamefor Network Settings this computer and the DNS domain that it belongs to Global Options Global Options Overview Overview Hostname DNS J Routing Routing Optionally enter the Hostname and Domain Name name server list and Hostname Bomain Name domain search list linux h20z site Note that the _ Change Hostname via DHCP hostname is global it applies to all interfaces not just this one _ Write Hostname to etc hosts M Change ete resoly conf manually Name Servers and Domain Search List The domain is Name Server l Domain Search especially important if hov gt this computer is mail server Name Server 2 If you are using DHCP to get an IP address check whether to get a hostname via DHCP The hostname of your s host which can be _ Update DNS data via DHCP seen by issuing the hostname command will be set automatically by the DHCP client You may want t
54. YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed 1 e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence NSA 2401 User s Guide 339 Appendix D Open Source Licences This Product include mod ssl software under BSD license BSD Copyright c dates as appropriate to package The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must
55. a record of your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password anna 46 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Account Name Type the user name of the account for which you want to change the password Old Password Type the user s current password Retype to confirm You must type the exact same password that you just typed in the above field Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA Cancel Click this button to begin configuring this screen afresh New Password Create a new password for the user You can type from one to 14 single byte no Chinese characters allowed for example ASCII characters 2 6 Administration Screens The Administration tab displays when you log in as the administrator Click Administration in the My NSA screens to open the advanced administration screens The first time you access the administration screens the setup wizard opens See the online help for details on the setup wizard screens After you configure the setup wizard the Status screen displays when you enter the advanced administration screens NSA 2401 User s Guide Figure 15 Status ZyXEL fice Date Time Internal Storage External Storage TCP IP Windows CIFS NFS Users Groups Shares Backup Restore Snapshot Backup So
56. and configure the NSA s installed disks RAIDs and Storage volumes o View and configure the NSA s USB connected disks and volumes Network Configure the NSA s teaming mode IP address and DNS settings You can also perform a ping test Windows CIFS Specify the NSA s server name and workgroup name and choose a workgroup or domain authentication method Dm oA v 2 as oD O 5 U NFS Configure NFS settings so computers with Unix or Linux operating systems can access the NSA Sharing Users Create users who may use the NSA You may set user passwords define storage limits per user and associate users to a group s Create user groups and add group members Create shared folders to which you can allow users and or groups read write access rights Protect Create and manage data backups to an external USB disk drive or another NSA over the network Restore a previous backup from another NSA or external USB hard drive connected to the NSA Snapshot Create and manage snapshots records of changes to an internal volume at a particular moment in time Backup Use this screen to display the backup software license keys Software Applications FTP Enable FTP file transfer to from the NSA set the number of FTP connections allowed an FTP idle timeout and the character set View and manage the NSA s list of printers and print jobs ep 3 D vp Copy Button Configure the copy button share location Maintenance Log V
57. and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer a
58. be lost if a second hard drive fails Data access may also be slower from a degraded array It s recommended that you replace the faulty disk and repair the array as soon as you can The NSA automatically repairs a degraded RAID if you insert an empty disk without an existing file system Otherwise when you replace a disk you must go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screen and click Repair Down Arrays When an array is down it cannot be fixed The array cannot be used and the data is lost Replace the faulty disk s and recreate the array volumes and sharing configuration Finding Out More See Section 6 9 on page 151 for theoretical background information on JBOD and the RAID levels used on the NSA Read Section 3 9 on page 106 for how to increase the NSA s storage capacity NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 2 Internal Storage Status Screen Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status to display the following screen This screen displays general information about the disks installed in the NSA and the disk arrays and volumes created on them Figure 124 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status Wizards Status Disk RAID volume i Note You can hover your cursor over a volume or disk and a tooltip with more information will appear Used Locked Used Space RAID Free Volume Free Volumes and SE de their capacity volume fsnapshot Space Space Array type and
59. can access the NSA 7 1 2 What You Need to Know About the Network Screens Teaming Mode The teaming mode sets how the NSA s two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces behave They can act independently one can back up the other they can share the traffic load or they can be trunked into a logical link IP Address The NSA needs an IP address es to communicate with the computers on your network The NSA can get an IP address automatically if you have a device on your network that gives them out Or you can assign the NSA a static fixed IP address DNS Server Address A DNS Domain Name System server maps domain names like www zyxel com to their corresponding IP addresses This lets you use domain names to access web sites without having to know their IP addresses The NSA can receive the IP address of a DNS server automatically along with the NSA s own IP address You can also manually enter a DNS server IP address in the NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide 159 Chapter 7 Network Screens DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the NSA as a DHCP client which means it is set to receive an IP address from a DHCP server The NDU can help you discover the IP address of the NSA Alternatively configure a static IP address for the NSA Jumbo Frames Jumbo frames are Ethernet frames larger than 1500 bytes T
60. cannot be used and the data is lost Replace the faulty disk s and recreate the array volumes and sharing configuration NSA 2401 User s Guide 139 Chapter 6 Storage Screens Figure 130 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Internal Storage e bi amp 8 9 Hh amp Wizards Create Duplicate Edit Delete Scan Unlock Key Disk RAID Volume Encrypted rald5D1D2D4 The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 28 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Icons Wizards Click this icon to open the Disk Setup Wizard to create a new disk array or volume Create Click this icon to open a screen where you can create a new storage volume Duplicate Key If you have volumes that were encrypted using a USB key you can click this to go to the external volume screen where you can copy the USB key to a second USB device Edit Select a volume and click this icon to modify it s settings Delete Select a volume s and click this icon to remove the volume s Note If you remove a volume all data in the volume disk s is lost Scan Select a volume and click this icon to check the volume s file consistency Scan Yolume re you sure to scan the volume Auto File Repair Stop Volume Scan with Auto File Repair may cause data loss Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Note If you have the NSA automatically attempt to repair any damaged
61. column displays the last time the file or folder was changed in year month day hour minute second format Click this button to return to the My NSA screen NSA 2401 User s Guide at Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 5 2 My NSA Share Browsing Move to or Copy to Screen The administrator can select a folder or file in the My NSA share browsing screens and click the Move to button or the Copy to button to display a share browsing screen like the following Use the share browsing screen to select the target path for moving or copying the folder or file Figure 10 My NSA Share Browsing gt Move to or Copy to _ Select a folder Shares Fred p Mote Files with same filename will be overwritten The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 My NSA Share Browsing gt Move to or Copy to LABEL DESCRIPTION Select the target share Path Select a folder on the NSA You can also browse to find or create a folder on the NSA or type the location of the folder using forward slashes as branch separators Click this button to move or copy the file Click this button to return to the My NSA share browsing screen 2 5 3 My NSA Share Configuration Use the My NSA share configuration screens to see and configure share management details Click My NSA and then the Configure button of one of your shares to open the following screen This screen displays a share s management details Fig
62. connect to this Web site Cancel 3 The certificate is stored and you can now connect securely to the Web Configurator A sealed padlock appears in the address bar which you can click to open the Page Info gt Security window to view the web page s security information Figure 269 Firefox 2 Page Info 3 Page Info B EIK General Forms Links Media Web Site Identity Verified The web site 172 20 37 202 supports authentication for the page you are viewing The identity of this web site has been verified by ZyXEL a certificate authority you trust for this purpose Vi View the security certificate that verifies this web site s identity Connection Encrypted High grade Encryption AES 256 256 bit The page you are viewing was encrypted before being transmitted over the Internet Encryption makes it very difficult for unauthorized people to view information traveling between computers Itis therefore very unlikely that anyone read this page as it traveled across the network NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Installing a Stand Alone Certificate File in Firefox Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public key certificate when prompted you can install a stand alone certificate file if one has been issued to you 1 Open Firefox and click Tools gt Options Figure 270 Firefox 2 Tools Menu Tools Web Search Ctrl X
63. dbredevapeieatasue 237 Table 102 Maintenance gt Configuration ccccccccccccssscceeceesececeeeeceeceueceeseesecesseeseeeseeseceeseeeeeeeaeaeeeeeees 238 FIT agrees ceraees ycicaceennasee sient E REEN s 240 Table 104 Maintenance gt Configuration ccdisicescpatciresntisasercisinetsaratasitnaesvresnaaressinnseseeniviemarmarinarns 241 Table 105 Maintenance gt FW Upgrade er 242 Table 106 Maintenance gt Power Management rrnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnsennnnnennnnnsennnnsennnnne 243 Table 107 Maintenance gt Power Management gt Edit mmrranennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrnnnnrnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnsennnennnn 245 Table 108 Famtenantce gt SMLUIGOWT EE 246 Table 109 Physical he 257 Table 110 Firmware Features rrrrannernnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnrnnnnnennnansennnnsennansennannsennunsennunsennnansennnnnsennnene 257 Table 111 NAN Je 259 Table 112 NSA Firmware Specifications vrede edited 260 Table 113 Power Consumption in Watts Oc ve 261 TL NNN EEEE E 265 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Tables 28 NSA 2401 User s Guide PART I Introduction and Tutorials r NSA 31 ntroducing the Web Configurator 35 Getting to Know Your NSA 1 1 NSA 2401 Overview The NSA Network Storage Appliance allows secure storage and management of data on your network Windows Apple or Linux users can access data on it as if it was on their own computers The NSA s two Gigabit Ethernet ports can connect to two diff
64. disk array containing the snapshots fails then the snapshots are lost 6 The NSA does not take snapshots of a locked volume Snapshot Purging The NSA automatically purges snapshots just before taking a new snapshot The NSA deletes the oldest snapshot if there is no free space remaining on the disk array space not used by volumes If there is not enough disk space for the new snapshot the NSA continues to delete older snapshots to make more space It is possible that all previous snapshots will be lost NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens LES The snapshot capture fails if deleting all previous snapshots does not leave enough space for the new snapshot To take the snapshot make more free space on the disk array by recreating a volume with a smaller capacity or upgrading the disk array to a larger storage capacity LS It s strongly recommended to set the maximum amount of snapshots setting as low as possible as a high amount of snapshots can significantly reduce the volume s file write performance Purging of snapshots can also occur when more data is added to the volume When more data is being written it may cause the snapshot image size to increase beyond it s original size in this case all the snapshots on the volume will need to expand to accommodate the extra data If there is not enough space for them all to expand some snapshots may be deleted See Table 112 on page 260 for the maximum number o
65. field displays when you click the Search icon Enter a specific word for which to search The default is all words Search This button displays when you click the Search icon Click to begin searching according to the search parameters you set If you choose not to set any search parameters then the defaults for each filter is used Clear filter This button displays when you click the Search icon Click to reset all the search filters back to their default settings Previous amp Next Click Previous to cycle back through the pages of users and Next to cycle forward through them Status This icon displays the account as either a Conflict User a Local User a Domain User or an Admin User NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 50 Sharing gt Users continued DESCRIPTION User Type This field displays whether the account is a user or an administrator User Name This field displays the user name created when you add a new user The admin account is the default NSA super user and cannot be deleted Description This field displays any configured details about the user account 8 2 0 1 Conflict Users A conflict user is a local user that has the same user name as that of a user on a domain controller For example if you first create local users and groups on the NSA in Workgroup mode and later you change to domain mode where you create or there are already identical users and groups then they appear as i
66. files it finds during the scan be careful not to cancel the scan as you may lose data 140 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 28 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Lock If an encrypted volume is unlocked you can select it and click this icon to lock it No one will be able to use the volume until an administrator unlocks it Note At start up if a USB key is inserted the NSA automatically unlocks any volumes encrypted by the USB key Lock Yolume re you sure to lock the volume Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Unlock The NSA automatically locks an encrypted volume if the NSA loses power or the disk is removed Select a locked volume and click this icon to open a screen where you can enter the volume s password or use the USB key to allow users to use the volume again If you forgot the password click Password Prompt to display the hint you configured to help you remember it Unlock Internal Yolume Please enter your volume s password to unlock it Password Password Prompt If the USB device containing the volume s key is already inserted remove it and re insert it Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Status This icon shows whether the volume is Healthy Locked Unlocke
67. guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR 336 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND C
68. key certificate when prompted you can install a stand alone certificate file if one has been issued to you 1 Open Opera and click Tools gt Preferences Figure 280 Opera 9 Tools Menu Mail and chat accounts Delete private data Notes Ctrl Alt E Transfers Ctirl Alt T History Cirl Alt H Links Ctrl AltH Advanced Quick preferences 2 In Preferences click Advanced gt Security gt Manage certificates Figure 281 Opera 9 Preferences Preferences Tabs Choose a master password to protect personal certificates Browsing Notifications Set master password Content Fonts Downloads Programs Every time needed Ask for password History Enable Fraud Protection Toolbars Shortcuts Voice 1314 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 3 Inthe Certificates Manager click Authorities gt Import Figure 282 Opera 9 Certificate manager Certificate manager Certificate authorities AAA Certificate Services Actalis Root CA AddTrust Class 1 CA Root AddTrust External CA Root AddTrust Public CA Root AddTrust Qualified CA Root Baltimore CyberTrust Code Signing Root Baltimore CyberTrust Mobile Root Baltimore CyberTrust Root Certum CA Certum CA Level I Certum CA Level II Certum CA Level IIT Certum CA Level IV Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority G2 c 1998 VeriSig Class 2 Public Primary
69. level of log that triggers the audible buzzer When you enable this feature the NSA sounds an audible alarm buzzer if it generates a log of a severity level equal to or higher than the one selected in the drop down list box to the right Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 2 4 Report Configuration Click Maintenance gt Logs gt Report Config to open the report configuration screens 11 2 4 1 Mail Setting This screen lets you configure whether or not logs are e mailed NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 196 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Mail Setting Log Report Configuration 7 Dann ee wi o s AF ina a Mail Setting Report Se ung syslog 3 erver Setting Email Configuration Enable Log Email Email To Email From Email Server Email Format HTML Plain Text Use SMTP Authentication Wser Password Password fContirm Lal After applying settings Send a test email The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Mail Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Log Select this option to have the NSA periodically send log files by e mail to the Email account specified in the options below Email To Enter the e mail address to which you want the logs e mailed Email From Enter the e mail address from w
70. meaning it automatically adjusts to either a crossover or straight through Ethernet cable SATA Interface Serial ATA is an interface technology that allows high speed data transfer Serial ATA also allows more efficient internal airflow and also smaller chassis design Hot Swappable Hard Drives You can remove and install hard drives while the NSA is operating Audible alarm buzzer triggered by logs of a user specified severity level Reset Button Use the reset button to reset the NSA user name to admin default password to 1234 default IP address to 192 168 1 3 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 or restore the factory default configuration file all configurations including shares users passwords and so on are returned to the original configurations These are some of the main firmware features of the NSA Table 110 Firmware Features Hard Drive Arrays RAID 0 with 2 3 or 4 hard drives RAID 1 with 2 hard drives RAID 5 with 3 or 4 hard drives RAID 10 1 0 with 4 hard drives JBOD with 1 2 3 or 4 hard drives Create separate archive backups or synchronize a copy Snapshot A snapshot is a backup of your NSA data on the NSA If files within a volume become infected or corrupted you can revert the volume back to a previous snapshot It s a good idea to create a snapshot before backing up data to be sure you re backing up consistent data even if the backup is still running several hours later NSA 2401 User
71. network services and returns you to the login screen Figure 44 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate Restarting Network Services AT Current Status Waiting for new network settings to apply The NSA Server will restart network services After services have been restarted you can begin accessing the system using the new network host settings This page will TRY to automatically redirect you to the web configurator using the new network settings when it is available If you are not redirected please do so manually by clicking the link below or typing the new host address in your browser s address bar If you continue to have problems connecting please use the NDU Network Discovery Utility tool to discover It 70 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 5 1 2 Downloading and Installing the NSA s Customized Certificate 1 Log in and return to Maintenance gt SSL Under Modify the Existing Certificate click Download Figure 45 Maintenance gt SSL Force HTTPS TLS SSL Connections A Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Force HTTPs Install System Default CA This action will install the system default C4 in the trusted CA list of your browser Stepi Download the default CA file Baja esis gt Step Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser Modify the Existing Certificate fi Caution Modificatio
72. of 1050 GB Since data isn t striped across disks if one disk fails you should just lose the data on that disk but you may lose data in the whole array depending on the nature of the disk failure You can add disks to the JBOD array later using the Add disk to JBOD feature and even remove them so JBOD offers a lot of flexibility However JBOD read performance is not as good as RAID as only one disk can be read at a time and they must be read sequentially The following figure shows three disks in a single JBOD array Data is not written across disks but written sequentially to each disk until it s full Table 37 JBOD NSA 2401 User s Guide Hi Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 9 3 RAID 0 RAID 0 spreads data evenly across two or more disks data striping with no mirroring nor parity for data redundancy so if one disk fails the entire array will be lost The major benefit of RAID 0 is performance The following figure shows two disks in a single RAID 0 array Data can be written and read across disks simultaneously for faster performance Table 38 RAID 0 RAID 0 capacity is the size of the smallest disk multiplied by the number of disks you have configured at RAID 0 on the NSA For example if you have four disks of sizes 100 GB 150 GB 150 GB and 200 GB respectively in one RAID 0 array then the maximum capacity is 400 GB 4 100 GB the smallest disk size and the remaining space 300 GB is unused Typical applications for
73. originally written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois Urbana Champaign This Product includes phpmvc software under LGPL license GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble 326 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our Ge
74. ports are numbered in the order that you connect USB devices Status This shows whether the external USB volume is Healthy Locked Unlocked or Down This shows the NSA generated name for an external USB volume File System This field displays the type of file system that an external USB volume is USING Disk s This shows what type of data storage system the external USB volume has It may show REGULAR or OK meaning that the NSA can read the volume but that it wasn t created by the NSA Disk Usage This shows total disk size the percentage of the external USB volume being used and the percentage that is available Active Sessions This shows whether it s a Windows CIFS or FTP connection to the NSA Share Name This displays the shared folder name on the NSA that the user is connected to for CIFS sessions and is blank for FTP sessions Username This displays the name of the user connected to the NSA if one is defined and ANONYMOUS FTP otherwise Connected At This displays the date and time the user last connected to the NSA in year day month hour minute second format IP Address This displays the IP address of the computer connected to the NSA 120 NSA 2401 User s Guide System Setting Screen 5 1 Date Time Use the NSA System Setting gt Date Time screen to set up the time on your NSA To open this screen click System Setting gt Date Time in the navigation bar of the Web Configurator Choose a time
75. s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 7 The SHA fingerprint must match the NSA s certificate you downloaded from the NSA to your computer Double click the NSA s certificate file and then click Details and look at the Thumbprint Click Close Figure 60 Firefox Add Security Exception Certificate Viewer nsaz401 Could not verify this certificate because the issuer is not trusted General Details Certification Path Issued To Common Name CN nsaz401 Show lt All gt Organization 01 lt Not Part OF Certificate gt Organizational Unit OU Test value Serial Number 00 09 91 D0 56 5E 4F 56 96 E subject nsa2401 Test Issued By Public key RSA 1024 Bits Common Name CM nsa2401 ime Subject Key Identifier d5 bb a8 fa c dd if 4e d1 ds Organization 0 nsa2401 fq Authority Key Identifier KeyID d5 bb a8 fa c dd 1F 4 Organizational Unit OU Test in Basic Constraints Subject Type C4 Path Lengt validity rg Thumbprint algorithm shal Issued On 9 6 2008 Thumbprint S7D1 4304 8249 959F CD81 2 Expires On a 8 2011 SHA1 Fingerprint DADL A 824995 SF CD 811281 70969 A aA DAAB 11186 pvt a3ca 8245 s r ener 2817 eses sasa paan 1186 Edit Properties Copy to File NSA 2401 User s Guide 79 Chapter 3 Tutorials 8 If the certificate fingerprints match click Confirm Security Exception otherwise click Cancel Figure 61 Firefox Add Security Exception Add Security Exception
76. s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Status This icon shows the NFS share s current status It can be valid usable or invalid deleted The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Network gt NFS LABEL DESCRIPTION NFS Share Path This field identifies the location of the NFS share in the NSA Users need to use this share path to mount the NFS share as a drive on their computers This field identifies the volume that the share is in DNS IP filters This field displays the domain name or IP address filters configured for controlling access to the share This field displays any descriptive text added for the share 7 4 1 Add or Edit NFS Share Screen Click Network gt NFS gt Add NFS Share or Edit NFS Share to display the screen where you can configure a share for systems to use NFS to access Figure 149 Network gt NFS gt Add NFS Share Add NFS Share Volume Name volumet 111 76 GB NFS Share Name example Full Path M datarb2272bbednfs esample Comment DNSAP Filter example com Read Only a i Note you can input a domain name or IP in the filter character represent public ex 172 23 26 0 74 or zyHel com tw PE T nm NSA 2401 User s Guide 169 Chapter 7 Network Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Network gt NFS gt Add NFS Share
77. satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribu
78. slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device NSA 2401 User s Guide Safety Warnings Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately NSA 2401 User s Guide Safety Warnings 8 NSA 2401 User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Tydal Mee EG EEE Spr nM sptle 29 Er ET EEE EN 31 introducing th Web Gage EEE REE EE 35 Tr 55 EE Fo ee ENE EE EE EE 115 en lO EE EE EE 117 SES EEE ER ENE 121 S Og EE ENE EE NE ET 125 KN Je 159 se AL 2 REE RESEPT 173 F re 197 Frelsers eg SODES EE on E 223 Maintenance Steens iccccciscescaisecsiatioseresnsssvenresiassauadassarderenessasscsetionssddsetnaesesssebnahiaussevestbadaadennes 229 Troubleshooting and Specifications rrannnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnn 247 TN NN 249 PE ee EEE EE iacrmeens 257 spe and NGG PE EE 263 NSA 2401 User s Guide Contents Overview 10 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users EG el RE EEE NE ER 3 Kle GE g ge EEE EE 4 TVG 6 ECE ERE EE EE nana 9 TNT 11 TT 17 TT 25 Part I Introduction and Tutorials avunravavnnvnrnnnnnnvnvannnvannnnnnnnnnnnnansnnnvnne 29 Chapter 1 Genma to KNOW TT EE 31 1 1 NSA
79. status Select Full Summary to display advanced details about the drive and its Status This field displays the identifier number of the S M A R T attribute Attribute Name This field displays the text name of the S M A R T attribute See Section 6 9 9 on page 156 for a list of common S M A R T attributes This field displays the S M A R T attribute s flag Value This is the attribute s current or most recent normalized value These normalized values range from 1 to 254 and are almost always mapped so higher values are better Compare this with the threshold value Worst This is the hard drive s worst recorded normalized value for this attribute Compare this with the threshold value Thresh This is the attribute s threshold value If the attribute s current normalized value is less than or equal to the threshold the attribute has failed An attribute value close to or below the threshold indicates the hard drive is no longer reliable Type Attributes can be one of two types Pre failure Pre fail or Old age Old_age Pre failure attributes are ones that indicate imminent hard drive failure if the attribute value is less than or equal to the threshold Old age attributes indicate end of product life from old age normal wearing out if the attribute value is less than or equal to the threshold Note that just because an attribute is of the Pre fail tyoe does not mean your hard drive is ready to fail If only means thi
80. terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License 6 3 Derivative Works If You create or use a modified version of this License which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License You must a rename Your license so that the phrases Mozilla MOZILLAPL MOZPL Netscape MPL NPL or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license except to note that your license differs from this License and b otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License Filling in the name of the Initial Developer Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License 7 Disclaimer of warranty Covered code is provided under this license on an as is basis without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied including without limitation warranties that the covered code is free of defects merchantable fit for a particular purpose or non infringing The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the covered code is with you Should any covered code prove defective in any respect you not the initial developer or any other contributor assume the cost of any necessary servicing repair or correction This disclaimer of warranty constitutes an essential part of
81. the certificate s origin either in the form of an IP address or a domain name Host IP Address Select this option and enter the NSA s IP address if you want to use this for the common name Host Domain Name Select this option and enter the NSA s domain name if you want to use this for the common name Organizational Unit Enter this name of the organizational unit which owns or maintains the Optional NSA This is an optional field Organization Optional Enter this name of the organization or company which owns or maintains the NSA This is an optional field Country Optional Enter this name of the country in which the NSA is located This is an optional field Key Type Select the certificate s key type either RSA or DSA RSA is a public key encryption and digital signature algorithm while DSA is only a digital signature algorithm Key Length Select the encryption key length The longer the key the better the encryption security The only drawback to having a long key is that the file encrypted with it swells in size as well Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 5 Firmware Upgrade Click Maintenance gt FW Upgrade to open this screen where you can upgrade the NSA firmware Be sure to download the latest firmware files from the ZyXEL website NSA 2401 User s Guide 241 Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens lt gt The SYS LED blinks orange when fi
82. the configuration file The NSA delays a scheduled restart or power off until it finishes any of the following e Backing up files e Restoring files from a backup e Taking a snapshot If the NSA is turned off at the time when a restart or power off is scheduled the NSA does not perform the restart or power off If the NSA is turned on at the time when a power on is scheduled the NSA does not perform the power on Click this to add the power control schedule to the list Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 7 Shutdown Click Maintenance gt Shutdown to open the shutdown screen Use this screen to turn off the NSA or restart it Before shutting down or restarting check the System Status screen to make sure that no one is logged into the NSA or transferring files to or from it NSA 2401 User s Guide 245 Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 207 Maintenance gt Shutdown System Shutdown Click Restart to have the device perform a software restart The SYS LED blinks as the device restarts and then stays steady on if the restart is successful Wait a minute before logging into the device again The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 108 Maintenance gt Shutdown DESCRIPTION Restart Click this to restart the device Shutdown Click this to shut down the system and restart it again later When you click the Restart button a pop up screen appe
83. the hard drive has reported If this is not zero back up your data This indicates the temperature of the airflow measured by a Western Digital hard drive This indicates the value of 100 the temperature in degrees Celsius Manufacturers can set a minimum threshold that D 12 Device Power Cycle Count 13 Soft Read Error Lo Rate O W 190 Airflow Low Temperature 190 Temperature Difference from 100 191 G sense error rate 192 Power off Retract Count 193 Load Unload Cycle 134 Temperature corresponds to a maximum temperature This is the number of mistakes caused by impact loads This is how many times the heads are loaded off the media This is the number of load and unload cycles into head landing zone position This is the hard drive s internal temperature Q 5 L L L L E 195 Hardware ECC High This is the time between ECC Error Correction Code corrected Recovered errors 196 Reallocation Event Count OW OW OW OW OW L This is the total number of reallocation remap operations The raw value is the total attempts to move data from reallocated sectors to a spare area Successful and unsuccessful attempts are both included 197 Current Pending Sector Count Low This is the number of unstable sectors awaiting reallocation If the secior is later successfully written or read this value decreases and reallocation is not performed Only failed write attem
84. this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it 1s not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 334 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections I and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written offer valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections I and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it
85. those files and folders delete move rename and so on 12 5 Backups and Snapshots pa cannot make a backup Check the logs to find the reason why the backup failed You can also look at the Backup screen s Last Run Result display If you re backing up to another NSA another NSA or a computer check that it allows the NSA to write files to it For a synchronization backup the target must be another NSA or another compatible model Check that enough space is available on the external disk If there isn t you may need to purge older backups or delete other files on the backup USB disk or NSA see Section 9 2 3 on page 208 e Check that the NSA is not performing another backup job Scheduler queues backups when a different backup is already going on at the time a backup is scheduled pa cannot take a snapshot e Check the logs The NSA generates an alert log when an error occurs during the snapshot capture process This log lists why the snapshot failed for example low disk space NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting You may need to manually delete some previous snapshots to make more space If you still cannot take the snapshot you may need to recreate the volume with a larger amount of space reserved for snapshots e You can also check the logs on the NSA to find out the reason why the snapshot failed e A snapshot must be done on a complete volume Check that the volume is not d
86. to protect data on your NSA 6 9 9 S M A R T Attributes The following table describes some common S M A R T attributes If a higher or lower raw attribute value is better it is indicated in the BETTER column Since S M A R T attributes and their definitions vary by manufacturer refer to the hard drive manufacturer for details about the attributes your hard drive supports Table 42 S M A R T Attributes ATTRIBUTE Di NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION 01 Read Error Rate Low Shows the rate of hardware read errors If this is not zero there is a problem with the disk surface or the read write heads 02 Throughput High This is the hard drive s general overall throughput performance Performance A decreasing value indicates a problem 03 Spin Up Time Lo This is the average number of milliseconds the hard drive took for spindle spin up from zero RPM to fully operational Start Stop Count The total number of spindle start and stop cycles w Reallocated Low Total number of reallocated sectors on the hard drive When the Sectors Count hard drive detects a read write verification error it marks the sector as reallocated and transfers the data to a specially reserved spare area The process is also known as remapping with reallocated sectors known as remaps The more sectors the hard drive has to reallocate the slower read and write speeds become ka Read Channel oOo This is the margin of a channel when it reads data Mar
87. turn off the printer s power Then reconnect the printer and turn it back on 10 3 1 Print Server Rename Click Applications gt Print Server select a printer from the list and then click that printer s Rename icon to open this screen Use this screen to change the name that the NSA uses for the printer Figure 187 Applications gt Print Server gt Rename _ SES EE SS SS SS 7 Rename Printer limit 15 characters Mote Only alphanumeric characters and underscore are acceptable Re 226 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 10 Application Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 Applications gt Print Server gt Rename LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Type a new name to identify the printer The name must be unique from all the other names of printers connected to the NSA Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard any changes and start again 10 4 Copy Button Click Applications gt Copy Button to open this screen Use the COPY button on the front panel of the NSA to copy files between a USB flash drive or externally connected hard disk and a share in the NSA If more than one USB device is connected to the NSA the NSA uses the USB device that was most recently connected Figure 188 Applications gt Copy Button Currently Selected Share Bill Copy Direction USB gt Share a The following table describes the labels in this screen T
88. variance e A power surge occurs The NSA gives no warning if time lag occurs You should re synchronize the time after a power surge or after you have shut down the NSA several times NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 5 System Setting Screen 124 NSA 2401 User s Guide Storage Screens 6 1 Storage Screens Overview Use the storage screens to work with disks RAIDs and volumes to manage the NSA s storage 6 1 1 What You Can Do in the Storage Screens e Use the Internal Storage screens Section 6 2 on page 127 through Section 6 6 1 on page 142 to view and configure the NSA s installed disks RAIDs and volumes e Use the External Storage screens Section 6 7 on page 145 through Section 6 8 1 on page 149 to view and configure USB connected disks and volumes 6 1 2 What You Need to Know About Storage Disks Disks are the physical storage drives you use with the NSA Internal storage is the hard drives you install inside the NSA External storage is USB connected drives RAIDs A hard drive array RAID is a storage method that lets you store data across multiple internal disks You combine the internal disks into arrays Each disk must belong to an array in order to use it You can create multiple arrays Volumes A volume is a storage area that you create on an array of internal disks or an external disk The following diagram shows disks one to four combined into RAID Array 1 Volumes A B Figure 123 Disks RAIDs
89. with code not governed by the terms of this License 1 8 License means this document 1 8 1 Licensable means having the right to grant to the maximum extent possible whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired any and all of the rights conveyed herein 1 9 Modifications means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications When Covered Code is released as a series of files a Modification 1s Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications 1 10 Original Code means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code and which at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License 1 10 1 Patent Claims means any patent claim s now owned or hereafter acquired including without limitation method process and apparatus claims in any patent Licensable by grantor 1 11 Source Code means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it including all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable or source code differential comparisons agains
90. your SSL Certificate Windows CIFS MSA is a member of Workgrou Workgroup Name nsazdi limit 15 characters 1166 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens Figure 147 Network gt Windows CIFS Domain Server Identification Server Name NSAexample Description i Note 1 This new system name will not apply until the system restarts 2 Modifying your Server Name will affect your SSL Certificate Windows CIFS Cl Note Please make sure that your DNS server is able to resolve the Windows Domain Name Usually your domain controller is also your DNS server NSA is a member of Domain 7 Windows Domain Protocol Active Directory domain A Domain Name Windows Domain Administrator Windows Domain Administrator Password The following table describes the labels in these screens Table 44 Network gt Windows CIFS LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Identification Server Name Enter a name to identify your NSA on the network in this field By default the NSA uses NSA and the last four digits of the NSA s LAN 1 MAC address Description Enter additional identification information for the NSA optional mr se NSA is a member of A workgroup is a group of computers on a network that can share files These user accounts are maintained on the NSA A domain is a group of computers that are part of a network and share a common directory database Domain users and groups are created on a centralized Win
91. zone and or allow the NSA to synchronize with a time server Current Time Current Date Manual New Date yyyy mm dd New Time hh mm ss Get from Time Server Time Server Address Time Zone La Enable Daylight Saving Start Date End Date Figure 122 System Setting gt Date Time 14 26 12 0800 2008 5 12 2008 5 12 DEE Ge fe E ime stdtime gov tw GMT 08 00 Beijing Hong Kong Perth Singapore Taipei x ll mf Bp S x mM Bh g 7 hours fm ey The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 System Setting gt Date Time LABEL Current Time Current Date Manual New Date yyyy mm dd DESCRIPTION This field displays the time according to the NSA This field displays the date according to the NSA Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually When you enter the time settings manually the NSA uses the new setting once you click Apply This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured manually When you set Date Time Setup to Manual enter the new date in this field and then click Apply NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 5 System Setting Screen Table 18 System Setting gt Date Time continued LABEL DESCRIPTION New Time hh mm ss This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured manually When you set Date Time Setup to Manual enter the new time in this f
92. 0 2014 Plans doc file and click Set ACL Figure 71 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy EE EEE ACL Configuration Gonzo Strategy 2008 09 04 15 17 07 35 50 KB 86 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Move Gonzo to Deny Figure 72 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy gt Set ACL lOl ACL Permission Target Gonzo Strategy 2010 2014 Plans doc ACL Options Apply to all directories and files under this folder Available Userfsi Groupts lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt Gonzo lt DOMAINUSERS gt admin lt LOCALGROUPS gt anonymoaus ftp lt DOMAINGROUPS gt anonymous EEE lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt Senior Management EVENONE lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt Kermit lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt i Note You may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click NSA 2401 User s Guide 87 Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 A Restricted File icon appears beside the 2010 2014 Plans doc file Click Close Figure 73 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy FRERE EEE EE EEE EE EE ACL Configuration set ACL Current Location Gonzo Strategy Size Modified Date Fy 2010 2014 Plans doc ES 2008 09 16 10 46 44 A 2009 Plan doc ae 2008 09
93. 11 4 on page 239 for details e Upload new firmware See Section 11 5 on page 241 for details e Set the power management settings See Section 11 6 on page 242 for details Restart or turn off your NSA See Section 11 7 on page 245 for details 11 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Maintenance Screens HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed Public Key Certificate Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate When a certificate authority such as VeriSign Comodo or Network Solutions to name a few receives a certificate request from a website operator they confirm that the web domain and contact information in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar If they match then the certificate is issued to the website operator who then places it on his site to be issued to all visiting web browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate Syslog Server The syslog protocol is built around data logging for the purposes of keeping records and analysis On a typical network th
94. 118 crypto 141 148 CSV 236 D date 121 daylight saving 122 default IP address 36 password 36 settings 52 username 36 degraded array 126 deleting folders or files 41 RAID 136 shares 187 user accounts 176 user groups 183 volumes 140 DFS 194 DHCP 160 258 diagnostic tool 164 disclaimer 353 disk 125 eject 129 external 145 internal 128 LEDs 32 quota 258 recommendations 132 replacement restrictions 128 S M A R T attributes 156 see also hard drive disk quota conflict users 177 Distributed File System see DFS DNS 164 server address assignment 159 domain 177 group 173 user 173 domain controller time 165 domain mode 258 domain name 167 Domain Name System See DNS domain security mode 165 domain user troubleshooting 253 troubleshooting share access 254 down array 126 duplexing 151 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP E eject 146 ejecting a disk 129 EMC 260 encrypted volume password 142 149 encryption 126 206 EVERYONE 193 exiting the Web Configurator 38 49 expand JBOD 137 explicit TLS SSL 82 export log 236 EXT2 150 EXT3 150 external devices 39 107 shares 39 external disk eject 146 locate 146 external storage 145 lock 148 scan 147 unlock 148 volume 147 external volume 147 create 149 EXT2 150 EXT3 150 FAT16 150 FAT32 150 file system 150 lock 148 356 NSA 2401 User s Guide NTFS 150 ReiserFS 150 scan 147 unlock 148 XFS 150 F factory defaults 52 fan s
95. 168 PAA POT Edit NFS Share Sergo ee 169 ET NNN 170 Chapter 8 NN 173 BET OE EEE E A EE NE NE R R 173 8 1 1 What YOU Can Do In The Sharing Screens Luenmesnnekeedeaarevedbkendte 173 8 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Sharing Screens cccccesseeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 173 EE EE TE ae ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee ree 175 8 2 1 Create a New Account amp Change Account Properties ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 B2 Von ON 9 EEE 181 JE EE EEE E A E eee 182 8 3 1 Add a New Local Group amp Change Group Properties rrrrurvvnnnnrvrvnnnnvrrnnnnnrvnvnnnneen 184 ENE Ge Li eeetadennd 186 8 4 1 Create a New Share amp Edit a Share rrnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnernnnnnsnrnnnnnnnsnnnnnsnnsnnnnneeee 188 MENN NN see 190 TN 194 EEA EE EE ET PERERA ET 194 Chapter 9 FUNN 197 9 1 Protection Methods Overview inissixesrcnsscseneidarsrawrcssasecuedsendeiceneialseswensinideuevenvaldausredinasousrdonad 197 9 1 1 What You Can Do in the Protect Screens sansene 198 9 1 2 What You Need to Know About Protection Methods cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Ja et A ote ve see ee eee en eee lee NE NE 200 re TE ETE EN EE NE 200 REE Sa EE NE NN NE EE 202 EET NNN 208 NNN gets sales peace oi ewan eee inar e eed ri 209 9 3 Restoring by Backup Files ccc ccceecccsssecceeeeecceececceuceseaseeeceececeueeecsasessaeeessueeeseneeesaaees 212 RE EEE 213 PN NNN ee 214 23 Frotect gt Restore NN 215 NN 215 TT ENN
96. 168 1 3 if the NSA cannot get an IP address from a DHCP server LAN2 IP Address 192 168 100 3 if the NSA cannot get an IP address from a DHCP server Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits if the NSA cannot get a subnet mask from a DHCP server we Compatible Hard Disks SATA II Serial Advanced Technology Attachment hard disk serial links The NSA also recognizes SATA compatible drives from the NSA Use an external power adaptor if more current is necessary CPU Operating 0 to 85 C Temperature Ethernet Two auto negotiating auto MDI MDI X 10 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T USB v2 0 Storage Two ports on the front panel Windows NTFS read only FAT32 and FAT16 Linux EXT2 EXT3 and XFS LEDs PWR SYS LAN1 LAN2 and COPY NSA 2401 User s Guide 259 Chapter 13 Product Specifications Table 111 NSA Hardware Specifications continued Reset Button Reset the NSA or restore the factory default configuration file AC Input Voltage 100 240 V at 50 60 Hz Current 2 A DC Output Voltage 19 V Current 2 A 20 90 RH non condensing 20 95 RH non condensing Certifications EMC FCC Class B EN 55022 Class B Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN60950 1 IEC 60950 1 A Hard drives may not be included with your NSA B Use an 8 wire Ethernet cable for Gigabit connections The NSA firmware specifications are shown in the following table Table 112 NS
97. 2 98 62 FTP Server Status Enabled gt CPU Usage dd 1 CPU Temperature QQ 47 00 c 116 6 F FAN Speed 1289RPM 1955RPM Mamoru es ei emory Usage 23MB 256MB ti AU td 2d volume Status Internal Yolume a volume3 Encrypted N A Locked HE gt 1045 48 Healthy B volumet Normal Used ibodD1D4D3 jbod Healthy 405 13 GB Total 100 Free 810 38 GBTotal 384 50 ey B 26 Me GBFree B ead volume Normal Healthy 9 80 GB Total 100 Free External Yolume CEN ie es gt Active Sessions r K Z v vvs ee ee ie eee nd nel a y KFR AP TT 7 1 TAPERS oy JE FOG 2008 07 16 10 37 06 192 168 1 33 NSA 2401 User s Guide 11 r Chapter 4 Status Screen The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 16 Status Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this icon to refresh the data for the field or value with which it is associated Edit Click this icon to open the configuration screen for the item with which it is associated FP Healthy Green indicates a healthy disk array All disks in the array are OK and the file system is functioning properly Resynching Yellow indicates the raid array is being repaired or created Waiting to Resync Indicates that another array is already being resynchronized Only one array can resynchronize at a time Degraded Indicates that a disk array is currently down but can be fixed Data access may be slower from a deg
98. 2401 OvervieW EE EE EE ENN 31 Ti Fom AE NM TERE 32 1 1 2 Foper BURON ERE EE EN 33 1 1 3 COPY PNG 33 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator rrannnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnunen 35 2l a eis Te EET EE ene eee 35 2 2 Accessing the NSA Web Configurator 0 ciccccszcscsccestansssneccessessaanevenessatacenscessatseanccnasatenesseenes 35 2 2 1 Access the NSA Using the NDU ed 35 2 2 2 Web Browser ACCESS ccecececcecececececececucaccuaccecucecstecseacseacauauauausecenscsescavseauauauaunenens 36 EE RER ETR SEEREN EET EE PN VERN PE 36 2 4 User level Screens Overview cccccececcececcccececaccececcccusecaccesecscaececseaececseeecunacsecuaacsvausecenass 37 EE ET EE EE E EE E eae 38 2 5 1 My NSA Share Browsing Screen cccccccsseeeecceeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeseaaeaeeeeesaaaeses 40 2 5 2 My NSA Share Browsing Move to or Copy to Screen rrrvrrnnnnnvrvnnnnnvvnnnnnrernnnnnnvnnnnnn 42 2233 MY NSA Share NNN edelt Nana 42 2 5 4 My NSA Change Share Properties Screen cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeececaeeceseeauseeessaaeeessaaess 43 2 5 5 Share and Folder Names cccsceceecececcecececcccacecaccececaucusecsecusecsecesanseaecasscsececacseass 45 2 5 6 Share Paths oirisider ner aeia aiani daana Aaii rarai dadais idire 46 25 7 SOE SE EEE es ds ie 46 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents AE EE ERE EEE ERE EE EN EE A 47 TNT NNN saeir n aa 48 AE ee ER ERE ER
99. 3387 C64 18384 e Te 6 The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed a certification error appears NSA 2401 User s Guide 307 Appendix C Importing Certificates Firefox The following example uses Mozilla Firefox 2 on Windows XP Professional however the screens can also apply to Firefox 2 on all platforms 1 If your device s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification then the first time you browse to it you are presented with a certification error 2 Select Accept this certificate permanently and click OK Figure 268 Firefox 2 Website Certified by an Unknown Authority Website Certified by an Unknown Authority Unable to verify the identity of 172 20 37 202 as a trusted site A Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be 172 20 37 202 possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of identifying the Web site 172 20 37 202 Examine Certificate Accept this certificate permanently P this session Do not accept this certificate and do not
100. 4 for more information e Share a printer See Section 10 3 on page 226 for details e Configure how the copy button works See Section 10 4 on page 227 for details 10 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Application Screens FTP File Transfer Protocol File Transfer Protocol FTP is a file transfer service that functions across the Internet A system running the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client FTP is not a secure protocol Your file transfers could be subject to snooping FTPES File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS FTPES is a file transfer service that uses TLS Transport Layer Security for secure transfers across the Internet NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 10 Application Screens Print Server A print server is a device or software that provides users on a network with shared access to one or more printers The print server acts as a buffer holding the information to be printed out until the printer becomes free The NSA can act as a print server Figure 184 Printer Sharing 10 2 FIP Click Applications gt FTP to open this screen and configure settings for transferring files to and from the NSA using FTP File Transfer Protocol or FTP over Explicit TLS LES Your FTP client must be set to use FTP over Explicit TLS in order to use FTPES with the NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 10 Application Screens Figure 185 Applicati
101. 6 Table 51 Sharing gt Users gt Create a New Account cccceeccccssecceceseceeeeseecaeseeseeeeeesaeeeeseeeessaeeessaeees 178 Table 52 Sharing gt Users gt User Information gt Quota List rrerrrrnnnrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnrnnrnnsnrnnnnnnee 181 Te ohan NNN een 182 le er EE EE EE EE RE eee eee eet mere 183 Table 55 Sharing gt Groups gt Add a New Local Group hassel 184 TR ate ohang s anaes CONS er 186 TN ernan i 187 Table 58 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share rrrrrrnnnrnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnsnennnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnnsnen 188 Table 59 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration cccceeseeees 189 Tabie 60 ar GS AL ON ICONS se ce ctecercateecnceeneninacdelannescesienedenneianeaaecnacsenensesacianeescnnseenennioe 190 Table 61 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration c ccceeseeees 191 Table 62 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration ICONS ccceeseeeeeeees 191 Table 63 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration c cscecesseeees 192 Table 64 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission ccc00008 193 Table 65 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission ccc00008 194 Table 66 Sharing gt Shares gt DFS EEE aaa e in Aa i E 195 Table
102. 67 Protection Methods Overview oo ccccceeeccccceeseceeceesceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeecsuaeeeessueeeeseaeeeesseeeeeesegeeeeeees 197 TN NNN eaei es 201 TN rOn NNN hj 202 Fe PORN gt Backup gt Add Job Step T vvs 203 MENN SBN NNN aE SEE 205 Table PN gt Backup Add Job Sep F eee 206 Table 73 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 pics mnt enema enemmn 207 Table 74 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step EE 208 Table 75 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 2 rrrrrrrnnneennrannnrennnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnsrennnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnsennnnnnssenn 209 Table 76 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 rrrernnnernnnnrrnnnnnennannennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnnennnee 210 Table 77 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 wisesccicesiaressseisinsicasaianevienrsiesnsenriesesigneieseiiaiseries 211 Table 78 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 3 mrrernnnernnnnernnansennannennnnnennnnnennnenennnnnennnnnsennnee 212 We ee We TANN 212 peler PER TR 213 Tone VPN JG 214 26 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Tables TETEN Nea 215 Table 83 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs ICONS rrrnnrrennnnnennnnnernnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrernnnnrnnnnnnrnnnrernnusernnn 217 Table 84 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs urrrennnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannsnnnn 218 Te PFOS SN SND Lese 219 Table 86 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images ICONS r rrrrrnnnerrnanerrnnnernnnrenvnnrennanne
103. A Firmware Specifications File Storage System SINGLE RAID 0 1 5 Network Protocols File Management Network File Sharing Protocol Network Security Supported Clients TCP IP UDP IP DHCP Client FTP HTTP HTTPS Distributed File System DFS Create Delete System Volume CIFS SMB for Windows and Mac OSX HTTP for web browser FTP NFS Authentication Share level Active Directory Services ADS Encrypted Network Login Windows 2000 Professional Server Windows XP Home Professional Windows Me Linux Maximum number of concurrent FTP sessions Maximum number of concurrent CIFS sessions Maximum number of snapshots in the NSA Maximum number of 5 snapshots per volume 260 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 13 Product Specifications Table 112 NSA Firmware Specifications continued System Management Remote Management via Web Configurator HTTP Secure Remote Management via Web Configurator HTTPS NSA Discovery Utility NDU E mail alerts Logging Monitoring Centralized Logs Firmware Upgrade Web Configurator Web Browsers Supported Internet Explorer 6 0 and later versions Firefox 1 07 and later versions A Limits may vary depending on user share resource usage 13 3 Power Consumption The NSA 2400 was tested using the specified power sources with the external power adapter and with four hard drives installed LES This table is a laboratory test of NSA 2400 power consumption for your reference only
104. A in each file of the Source Code If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure then You must include such notice in a location such as a relevant directory where a user would be likely to look for such a notice If You created one or more Modification s You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code You may choose to offer and to charge a fee for warranty support indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code However You may do so only on Your own behalf and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any 344 NSA 2401 Users Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences Contributor You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty support indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty support indemnity or liability terms You offer 3 6 Distribution of Executable Versions You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Sections 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 and 3 5 have been met for that Covered Code and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code versio
105. A using a CIFS program like Windows Explorer and double click the printer s icon to open the printer s queue of print jobs Figure 105 Printer Screen in Windows Explorer a Canon PRT 1 on 192 168 1 2 Printer Document View Help Document Name Jstatus Jf Owner Pages size LES Repeat steps 4 to 7 on your other computers so they can also use the printer 3 9 How to Increase the NSA s Storage Capacity As time goes by your company is likely to need more storage capacity You can do one or more of the following to increase the NSA s storage capacity e Connect external USB hard drives e Add internal hard drives if there are not four already installed e Migrate a RAID 5 array to higher capacity hard drives 106 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 9 1 Connecting External USB Hard Drives The easiest way to increase the NSA s storage capacity is to connect an external USB hard drive External USB hard drives are great for providing storage capacity for scheduled backups and snapshots of internal volumes External volumes can be the destination for a scheduled backup or snapshot but only an internal volume can be the source Use the following procedure 1 Connect the external USB hard drive to USB1 or USB2 on the NSA s front panel Figure 106 Connecting a USB Hard Drive USB1 2 Click Storage gt External Volumes and make sure the USB drive displays with a healthy status Figure 107 Stor
106. Auto File Repair Stop Volume Scan with Auto File Repair may cause data loss Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Note If you have the NSA automatically attempt to repair any damaged files it finds during the scan be careful not to cancel the scan NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 34 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Lock If an encrypted volume is unlocked you can select it and click this icon to lock it No one will be able to use the volume until an administrator unlocks it Note that if the volume was encrypted using a USB key and the USB key is connected when the NSA restarts the NSA automatically unlocks the volume Lock olume re you sure to lock the volume Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Unlock The NSA automatically locks an encrypted volume if the NSA loses power or the disk is removed Select a locked volume and click this icon to open a screen where you can enter the volume s password or use the USB key to allow users to use the volume again Unlock External Yolume Please input password or insert USB Key to Unlock Password Password Prompt If the USB device containing the volume s key is already inserted remove it and re insert it Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s
107. Certification Authority Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority G2 c 1998 Verisig 4 Use the Import certificate dialog box to locate the certificate and then click Open Figure 283 Opera 9 Import certificate Import certificate BIK uk LET My Computer my Documents my Network Places My Network Places NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 5 In the Install authority certificate dialog box click Install Figure 284 Opera 9 Install authority certificate Install authority certificate Install this certificate authority s certificate chain in the database 6 Next click OK Figure 285 Opera 9 Install authority certificate Install authority certificate 7 The next time you visit the web site click the padlock in the address bar to open the Security information window to view the web page s security details 316 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Removing a Certificate in Opera This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Opera 9 1 Open Opera and click Tools gt Preferences Figure 286 Opera 9 Tools Menu Mail and chat accounts Delete private data Notes Ctrl Alt Transfers Ctrl Alt T History Ctrl Alt H Links Ctrl Alt H Advanced Quick preferences Appearance 2 In Preferences Advanced gt Security gt Manage certificates Figure 287 Opera 9 Preferences Preferences
108. Due to Statute or Regulation If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute judicial order or regulation then You must a comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible and b describe the limitations and the code they affect Such description must be included in the legal file described in Section 3 4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it 5 Application of this License This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code 6 Versions of the License 6 1 New Versions Netscape Communications Corporation Netscape may publish revised and or new versions of the License from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number 6 2 Effect of New Versions NSA 2401 User s Guide 345 Appendix D Open Source Licences Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the
109. EMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE This Product includes Sablotron software under MPL License Mozilla Public License Version 1 1 1 Definitions 1 0 1 Commercial Use means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party 1 1 Contributor means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications NSA 2401 User s Guide 341 Appendix D Open Source Licences 1 2 Contributor Version means the combination of the Original Code prior Modifications used by a Contributor and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor 1 3 Covered Code means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications in each case including portions thereof 1 4 Electronic Distribution Mechanism means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data 1 5 Executable means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code 1 6 Initial Developer means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A 1 7 Larger Work means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof
110. EMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealing in this Software without specific written prior permission Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation Copyright 1999 2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation Redwood City California USA All Rights Reserved Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted This Product includes open SSL under the Open SSL License NSA 2401 User s Guide 337 Appendix D Open Source Licences Open SSL License LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license 1 e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core Qopenssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2004 The O
111. ESSAGE ARGUMENT S Storage INFO Unlock Internal Volume Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Change Internal Crypto Volume New Volume Password Prompt to 0 Password Success Prompt Storage INFO Change Internal Crypto Volume Volume Password SUCCESS Storage INFO Rename External Volume to Volume Name Volume O SUCCESS Storage INFO Lock External Volume Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Unlock External Volume Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Volume Change External Crypto Volume New Password Prompt to 0 Password Success Prompt Storage INFO Change External Crypto Volume Volume Password SUCCESS Storage INFO Start Scanning Internal Volume Volume read only read write operation Storage INFO Scan Internal Volume read only read write operation SUCCESS Volume Storage INFO Cancel Internal Volume Scan Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Scan External Volume Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Cancel External Volume Scan Volume SUCCESS Storage INFO Eject External Disk 0 disk id Volume SUCCESS Storage CRIT Create Internal Normal Volume Volume Name Size Volume 101 Size 1 MB FAILED Storage Volume CRIT Create Internal Crypto Volume Volume Name Size 101 Size 1 MB using PASSWD FAILED Create Internal Crypto Volume Volume Name Size 0 using USB Key Size 1 MB FAILED Storage CRIT Create External Normal Volume Volume Name Filesystem Volume K
112. For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure IPv4 list in the TCP IP tab igure 226 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab e eo Network a ShowaAll Q Location l Automatic HH Show Built in Ethernet KY AppleTalk Ethernet PPPoE Proxies Using DHCP Configure IPv4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask DHCP Client ID If required Router DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 7 Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Ji Apply Now NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 For statically assigned settings do the following e From the Configure IPv4 list select Manually e In the IP Address field type your IP address e In the Subnet Mask field type your subnet mask e In the Router field type the IP address of your device Figure 227 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet A0 Network a Show all Q o Location Automatic HA i Show Built in Ethernet TCP IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Router 0 0 0 0 DNS Servers Search Domains Optional IPv6 Address Configure IPv6 p Click the lock to prevent further changes Assist me Apply Now 6 Click Apply Now and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP
113. For the appropriate IP settings gt Use the Following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically 0 0 Use the Following DNS server addresses Advanced Lk eanet 8 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided Click Advanced 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt 2 In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information 282 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Mac OS X 10 3 and 10 4 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 4 but can also apply to 10 3 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 223 Mac OS X 10 4 Apple Menu eer 4 gt Show All Personal dl og EK
114. HT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE NOTE Some components of the NSA 2401 incorporate source code covered under the Apache License GPL License LGPL License BSD License Open SSL License OpenLDAP License PHP License and MIT License To obtain the source code covered under those Licenses please contact ZyXEL Communications Corporation at ZyXEL Technical Support End User License Agreement for NSA 2401 WARNING ZyXEL Communications Corp IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE ENCLOSED SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE TERMS CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS THEN ZyXEL INC IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED 1 Grant of License for Personal Use ZyXEL Communications Corp ZyXEL grants you a non exclusive non sublicense non transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed the Software including any documentation files accompanying the Software Documentation
115. ICONS r rrrrnannenrnnnennnnnrennnnrnnnanrenannrennnnnnnnnnnennansennunnennanennnnsennnnene 38 Table 4 My NSA apie ne 39 Table 5 My NSA Share Browsing ICONS cccccceecceceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeceeceesececseeeeeceuceeseueeeseuececsueeessuseesseaaess 40 TNA Sno BONSI JJ 41 Table 7 My NSA Share Browsing gt Move to or Copy 10 ccceecccceecceceeeeeeseeeeeceeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeessaeeeees 42 Table 8 My NSA Share Configuration ICONS rrerrnnnerrnnnevrnanrernnnnvrnnnrennanrennnernnnnnnennansennusnennnnsennnsennnnene 43 MT NNN eee ene 43 Table 10 My NSA Change Share Properties rrrrurnerrannernnnnrnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrennnnennnnnnennunsennusnennnnnennnssennnnsne 43 Table 11 My NSA Change Share Properties gt Share Access Configuration cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 SU Ge a EE EE annie preee unin aateieteaates 47 Table 13 Global Labels and ICONS o cccccceeecccccesseceeceeeeeeceeesececeeeeceeseeeseceeeueceeseuseeeeeeaeeceessuaeesetseneeeeeeas 48 BP a say NNN eee ene S Se ae Ca eee een ree 50 Tabie 15 C mmon Coniguralion Sereen ICONS cictecrsstsieesn iceman 51 pe Bhs goles Nig clo ET EEE EE A ner ere 118 TVETEN eer ene eee veneenere tereerpe rene matte rere carer eter errr tr esecm re ter nr nr errerrry h Srenest ter rtree eer etre rn trey 118 Table 18 System Seting gt Date TIME DN renee ee eee 121 Table 19 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status 4avrmssaeemsnanmegaasekenknk kb Naa 127 Table 20 Storage g
116. IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network Interface from the Info tab Figure 228 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Utility 808 Network Utility Netstat AppleTalk Whois Traceroute Port Scan Ping Lookup Finger interface for information Network Interface en0 nter Transfer Statistics Hardware Address 00 16 cb 8b 50 2e Sent Packets 20607 IP Address es 118 169 44 203 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 100 Mb Recv Packets 22626 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Marvell Collisions 0 Model Yukon Gigabit Adapter 88E8053 NSA 2401 User s Guide 285 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Mac OS X 10 5 The screens in this section are from Mac OS X 10 5 1 Click Apple gt System Preferences Figure 229 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple Menu Finder File Edit Vie About This Mac Software Update Mac OS X Software E System PRETRIENCES n TE Bley Recent Items Force Quit Sleep Restart Shut Down 2 In System Preferences click the Network icon Figure 230 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferences aan System Preferences Personal i Appearance Desktop amp Expos amp International Security Spotlight Screen Saver Spaces Hardware E ea P j 9 Laal y hu m Q CDs amp DVDs Displays Energy Keyboard amp Print amp Fax Sound Saver Mouse Internet amp Ne
117. IPTION Available Users Groups This displays a list of users and groups that have not yet been assigned an authority level for the share You can assign users and groups by selecting them and clicking the right arrow Full Assign users and groups one of the following authority levels Read Only Full Grants read write privileges Deny Read Only Grants read only privileges files and folders cannot be modified moved or removed Deny Removes all privileges files and folders cannot be read modified moved or removed You can remove users from any given authority level by selecting them and clicking the left arrow Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window 2 5 5 Share and Folder Names The name can only contain the following characters e Alphanumeric A z 0 9 and Unicode The NSA allows FTP access to shares folders or files with names encoded in the UTF 8 8 bit UCS Unicode Transformation Format format So your FTP client must support UTF 8 in order to access shares folders or files on the NSA with Unicode names e Spaces e underscores NSA 2401 User s Guide 45 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator periods dashes Other limitations include All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space Share names must be unique they cannot be the same as other share names T
118. MOUS FTP access rights to these type shares See Section 8 4 2 2 on page 192 for details on permissions NSA 2401 User s Guide 193 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 8 4 3 Recycle Bin Click Sharing gt Shares gt Recycle Bin to open the following screen Use this screen to set up how the share recycle bin is managed Figure 164 Sharing gt Shares gt Configuration Recycle Bin Configuration Clean Recycle Bin every fo days 0 31 0 means not clean it automatically The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission LABEL DESCRIPTION Clean Recycle Bin every Set the number of days a deleted file can remain in the recycle bin before the NSA permanently deletes it If you enter a value of O then it never automatically cleans out the recycle bin and you must clean it manually Empty All Recycle Bins Click this button to manually delete all files and folders from all of the Now shares recycle bins Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window 8 4 4 DFS Distributed File System DFS is a network server component that makes it easier for you to find and manage data on your network Through DFS you can build a single hierarchical file system whose contents are distributed throughout your organization s network It permits shares to be hierarchically connected to ot
119. Make sure your Internet browser has JavaScripts and Java enabled Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the NSA Reset the NSA to its factory defaults and try to access the NSA with the default IP address See Section 2 7 on page 52 for detailed information on the reset button e If the problem continues contact the network administrator or vendor pa can see the Login screen but I cannot log in to the NSA Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on e Turn the NSA off and on e If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 2 7 on page 52 for detailed information on the reset button NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 12 4 Users Cannot Access the NSA pa A local user cannot access a share Check that the NSA is turned on and connected to the network The local user should try to ping the NSA or use the NDU to discover it The local user should check that he entered his login name and password correctly Check if the share exists and has the correct access settings for this user e Check the Access Control List ACL of read write permissions associated with specific files and or folders Account names added to the list are linked to the files and folders that they are allowed to access al
120. N NAME CN 8R CA 1 FN 0 Regqgulierungsbeh rde f CN 8R CA 1 PN O Re 01 CN 9R CA 1 PN 0 Regqulierungsbeh rde f CN 9R CA 1 PN O0 Fe 02 CN CA Cert Signing Authority EMAIL supp CN CA Cert Signing A 00 CN D TRUST Qualified Root CA 1 2006 PN CN D TRUST Qualifie 00B95F CN D TRUST Qualified Root CA 2 2006 PN CN D TRUST Qualifie OOBS CN S TRUST Qualified Root CA 2006 001 P CN S TRUST Qualifie OODF fli Keys 3 The next time you visit the web site click the padlock in the address bar to open the KDE SSL Information window to view the web page s security details NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Removing a Certificate in Konqueror This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Konqueror 3 5 1 Open Konqueror and click Settings gt Configure Konqueror Figure 295 Konqueror 3 5 Settings Menu Settings fi Hide Menubar Ctrl M Toalbars 4 Full Screen Mode Ctrl Shift F Load View Profile Save View Profile Web Browsing Configure View Profiles Configure Extensions 18 Configure Spell Checking Configure Toolbars 2 Configure Konqueror 2 Inthe Configure dialog box select Crypto 3 Onthe Peer SSL Certificates tab select the certificate you want to delete and then click Remove Figure 296 Konqueror 3 5 Configure Configure Konqueror Configure SSL manage certificates and other cryptograp SSL O
121. NELW OT KISTOTAGE rutine New Password Password Confirm fica ution Please keep a record of your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password 180 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens LS Non admin user accounts cannot access the administrator Web Configurator screens and cannot browse shares assigned to other users 8 2 2 View User Information To view a user account s information select it from the Sharing gt Users list and then click User Info The two tabs in the User Information screen are Quota List and Group List Figure 155 Sharing gt Users gt User Information User Information User Information User Name Wazun User Name Wazun f Quota List Group List Quota List Group List j K K S Quota MB Used MB backup_office Unlimited 0 00 KL240 X10 everyone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 52 Sharing gt Users gt User Information gt Quota List Indicates how much of the volume quota the selected user has used Used quote is measured in megabytes MB OK Click this to close the screen NSA 2401 User s Guide 181 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 8 3 Groups Click Sharing gt Groups to open this screen where you can create and manage groups A group is a collection of user accounts Figure 156 Sharing gt
122. NG BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson t h cryptsoft com 338 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape s SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except tha
123. NSA 2401 Network Storage Appliance User s Guide Version 1 10 3 2009 Edition 1 DEFAULT LOGIN LAN1 IP Address 192 168 1 3 LAN2 IP Address 192 168 100 3 Username admin Password 1234 ZyXEL www zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the NSA using the Web Configurator Related Documentation e Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access e Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents e ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team Zy XEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan E mail techwriters Q zyxel com tw Customer Support In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the reg
124. NT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND 350 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED 1 000 BECAUSE SOME STATES COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 8 Export Restrictions THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS REGULATIONS ORDERS OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST ALL CLAIMS LOSSES DAMAGES LIABILITIES COSTS AND EXPENSES INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8 9 Audit Rights ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT AT ITS OWN EXPENSE UPON REASONABLE PRIOR NOTICE TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT 10 Termination This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated You may terminate this License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your posse
125. O 1 FAILED type Storage CRIT Create External Crypto Volume Volume Name Filesystem 0 using USB Key 1 Volume 101 1 using PASSWD FAILED Storage CRIT Delete Volume FAILED Volume Create External Crypto Volume Volume Name Filesystem 2 0 NSA 2401 User s Guide Storage CRIT Volume CRIT Storage Volume Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY ARGUMENT S Storage CRIT Create USB Key FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Duplicate USB Key FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Rename Internal Volume to Volume Name Volume 0 FAILED Storage CRIT Expand Volume Increased Size Volume Size 0 MB FAILED Storage CRIT Lock Internal Volume FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Unlock Internal Volume FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Change Internal Crypto Volume New Volume Password Prompt to 0 Password FAILED Prompt Storage CRIT Change Internal Crypto Volume Volume Password FAILED Storage CRIT Rename External Volume to Volume Name Volume O FAILED Storage CRIT Lock External Volume FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Unlock External Volume Volume FAILED Storage Volume CRIT Change External Crypto Volume New Password Prompt to 0 Password FAILED Prompt Storage CRIT Change External Crypto Volume Volume Password FAILED Storage CRIT Start Scanning Internal Volume Volume read only read write operation Storage CRIT Scan Internal Volume read V
126. ONDITIONS All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein if any are the property of their respective owners This Product includes OpenLDAP software under the OpenLDAP Public License The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2 8 17 August 2003 Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation Software with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution and 3 Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time Each revision is distinguished by a version number You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION ITS CONTRIBUTORS OR THE AUTHOR S OR OWNER S OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EX
127. Prompt 2 Inthe Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also go to Start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab to view your IP address and connection information 2 8 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Professional 1 Click Start gt Control Panel Figure 216 Windows Vista Start Menu Ir eye 7 0 Professional Connect To Media Player Classic Control Panel Default Programs gt All Programs Help and Support Ji aG O a 2 Inthe Control Panel click the Network and Internet icon Figure 217 Windows Vista Control Panel Goe Control Panel p 4 ED File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home System and Maintenance User Accounts Get started with Windows Change account type Back up your computer Classic View Appearance and Personalization Change desktop background Change the color scheme Adjust screen resolution Security Check for updates Allow a program through Windows Firewall Network and Internet onnect to the Internet Clock Language and Region Change keyboards or other input methods Change display language View network status and tasks Set up file sharing 3 Click the Network and Sharing Center icon Figure 218 Windows Vista N
128. R E nolish aea Password Administration i My NSA My Shares Networkitorage ASJIEINES test 2 USB Card I t ngare cringe Other Shares Currently there are no other shares that are accessible to you on the system The icons and language label at the top right of the screen are visible from most screens Use the tabs at the top of the screen to navigate between the user level screens and menus The following table describes the global icons and tabs in the user level screens Table 3 User level Global Labels and Icons LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Language Select the Web Configurator language from the drop down list box Help Click the Help icon to open a web help page specific to the screen you are currently configuring Logout Click the Logout icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator My NSA Click this tab to go to screens where you can manage your shares and access the files on public shares The administrator must go into the administration screens to manage other user s shares Password Click this tab to go to a screen where you can change your password Administration This tab displays when you log in as the administrator Click the tab to go to screens where you can manage advanced configurations 2 5 My NSA Screen Use the My NSA screens to manage your shares and access the files in folders to which you have access A share is a set of user access permissions for a specific folder on a vo
129. RRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHDAMAGES NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS This Product includes apcid apcupsd autofs device mapper evms exim Lm_sensors mdadm pam_mount raidtools samba sg_utils smartmontools vsftpd xfsprogs and Linux kernel software under GPL license GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright C 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple Place Suite 330 Boston MA 02111 1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The license
130. Reference This section contains background on JBOD and the RAID levels used on the NSAand lists some common S M A R T attributes 6 9 1 Storage Terminology These are some terms that you need to know in order to understand storage systems e Mirroring In a RAID system using mirroring all data in the system is written simultaneously to two hard disks instead of one This provides 100 data redundancy as if one disk fails the other has the duplicated data Mirroring setups always require an even number of drives e Duplexing Like in mirroring all data is duplicated onto two distinct physical hard drives but in addition it also duplicates the hardware that controls the two hard drives one of the drives would be connected to one adapter and the other to a second adapter e Striping Striping is the breaking up of data and storing different data pieces on each of the drives in an array This allows faster reading and writing as it can be done simultaneously across disks Striping can be done at the byte level or in blocks Byte level striping means that the first byte of the file is sent to the first drive then the second to the second drive and so on Block level striping means that each file is split into blocks of a certain size and those are distributed to the various drives The size of the blocks used is also called the stripe size or block size e Parity In mirroring 50 of the drives in the array are reserved for duplicate data Par
131. S minutes ow B 0 Shours o Sminutes ETEN BEG Page 1 Of 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 95 Maintenance gt Log gt Search Filters LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This filters search results according to the log type selected The default setting is View All Logs Severity This filters search results according to the severity rating selected When you select a severity the NSA searches through all logs of that severity or higher The default is to search through all files regardless of severity Keyword s Enter a specific word for which to search The default is all words Time This filters search results according to the time frame selected in the beginning date and end date fields The default is any time frame since the first existing log file was generated Purged logs of course cannot be searched To set a start date click the left menu and pick a day from the calendar To set an end date click the right menu and pick a day from the calendar Search Click to begin searching according to the search parameters you set If you choose not to set any search parameters then the defaults for each filter is used Clear filter Click to reset all the search filters back to their default settings 11 2 2 Log Records Configuration Click Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config to open the Log Records Configuration screen where you can customize the duration that logs are kept on the NSA Figur
132. SA 9 2 4 Restoring by Backup Job In the Protect gt Backup screen select a backup job and click the Restore Archive icon to replace existing files with files saved previously NSA 2401 User s Guide 209 Chapter 9 Protect Screens Figure 173 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 En Restore Step 1 Select Restore Point Job Information Job Mame Weekly backup Job Description Backup Type Incremental Scheduler Information every week Restored Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 76 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 Scheduler Information This field displays the backup s frequency the time it was last run in and whether or not it succeeded and when it is scheduled to run again The times use yyyy mm dd hh mm ss format Check Last Backup Time Select to which backup you want to return All later backups are deleted Click this button to proceed 210 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 2 4 1 Restoring a Backup Step 2 Figure 174 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 nr Restore Step Z Please select which file s folder s to restore Folder Chooser Selected Folder Eg F E Ra Gonzo i The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 9 2 4 2 Restoring a Backup Step 3 Figure 175 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archiv
133. SA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Removing a Certificate in Firefox This section shows you how to remove a public key certificate in Firefox 2 1 Open Firefox and click Tools gt Options Figure 274 Firefox 2 Tools Menu Web Search Ctrl K Downloads Ctrl J Add ons Java Console Error Console Page Info Clear Private Data Ctrl 5hift Del w 2 Inthe Options dialog box click Advanced gt Encryption gt View Certificates Options Figure 275 Firefox 2 Options Privacy Security Advanced General Network Updale Protocols Use SSL 3 0 Use TLS 1 0 Certificates When a web site requires a certificate O Select one automatically Ask me every time NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 3 In the Certificate Manager dialog box select the Web Sites tab select the certificate that you want to remove and then click Delete Figure 276 Firefox 2 Certificate Manager 9 Certificate Manager T E x Web Sites 4 thorities You have certificates on file that identify these web sites Certificate Name Purposes El ZyXEL 72 20 57 202 Client Server Status Responder 4 Inthe Delete Web Site Certificates dialog box click OK Figure 277 Firefox 2 Delete Web Site Certificates Delete Web Site Certificates Are you sure you want to delete these web site certificates 172 20 37 202 5 The next time you go to the web site tha
134. SB key for anything else do not store data on it or format it Figure 1 38 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume gt Create Available Diskfs USB1 245 00MB Volume Name test File System fa HE T Encrypted D Note You can t change password of this encrypted volume if you encrypt it by USE APE The following table describes this screen Table 36 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Create LABEL DESCRIPTION Available Disk s Select the external USB device upon which you want to create the volume Volume Name Type a volume name from 1 to 31 characters To ease management it is highly recommended that each volume use a unique name Acceptable characters are all alphanumeric characters and spaces _ underscores and periods The first character must be alphanumeric A Z 0 9 The last character cannot be a space NSA 2401 User s Guide 149 Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 36 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Create continued LABEL File System Encrypted Password DESCRIPTION Select the file system you want the new volume to use If you plan to also use the USB device with another computer it is recommended that you select the file system that the other computer uses Windows file systems fat32 Newer and more efficient than FAT16 Supports a volume size of up to 2 TB Tera Bytes and individual file sizes of up to 4 GB fat16 Compatible with
135. SP Page E Delete Browsing History Pop up Blocker Phishing Filter Manage Add ons Work Offline Windows Update Full Screen Menu Bar Toolbars Windows Messenger Diagnose Connection Problems Sun Java Console Internet Options 2 Inthe Internet Options dialog box click Content gt Certificates Figure 264 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Options Internet Options General Security Prive Content Advisor Ratings help you control the Internet content that can be viewed on this computer Certificates Use certificates for encrypted connections and identification Clear SSL state Certificates Publishers AutoComplete AutoComplete stores previous entries on webpages and suggests matches for you Feeds provide updated content from websites that can be read in Internet Explorer and other programs NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 3 In the Certificates dialog box click the Trusted Root Certificates Authorities tab select the certificate that you want to delete and then click Remove Figure 265 Internet Explorer 7 Certificates Certificates Intended purpose lt All gt Intermediate Certification Authoriti Issued To Expiratio Friendly Name 172 20 37 202 172 20 37 202 5 21 2011 lt None gt EE ABA ECOM Root CA ABA ECOM Root CA 7 10 2009 DST ABA ECOM Autoridad Certifica Autoridad Certifica
136. Screens Table 72 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Purge Policy Select a policy for deleting archive backups This purge runs first before a new backup is done For example if you have a backup scheduled to begin at midnight then at that time the NSA checks these settings and deletes files accordingly before backup takes place If space on the backup NSA or disk is a concern then configure the NSA to delete old backups e Keep All Old Backup files Purge is in effect disabled Select this if backup space is not a concern Keep Only ___ backups All backup files older than the last one are deleted You will not be able to recover files that existed only in those previous backups Select this if backup space is limited and recovery of old files is not important Keep Backups for _ day s Backups older than the number of days you enter here are deleted 0 days means that all old backups are deleted when a new one is done Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to proceed 9 2 2 3 Creating a Backup Job Step 4 Figure 170 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 Add anew backup Job Step 4 Scheduler Backup Monthly E Frequency Soh eae ap Step 1 Please select the month s of year January February March April May June duly August LJ October F F September November December Step 2 Please select the day of the month
137. USERS gt anonymo lt LOCALGROUPS gt anonymous ftp lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt Everyone Example Test lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Note Tou may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click 192 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission Target This displays the path of the currently selected item on the share Apply to all directories and If you are configuring a folder s permission settings select this option to files under this folder have these permission settings overwrite any ACL settings of all folders and files within the folder If you clear this option the NSA still applies the permission settings to any directories and files under this folder that do not have other ACL settings You can still change the ACL settings of the folder s contents later If someone is already connected to a file or folder changing the ACL settings does not end their current setting but will apply to any future attempts to access the file or folder Available Users Groups This displays a list of users and groups that have not yet been assigned an authority lev
138. a is duplicated across two disks so if one disk fails there is still a a copy of the data These two arrays are configured as a single RAID 0 array for faster performance Table 40 RAID 10 Typical applications for RAID 10 are those requiring both high performance and reliability such as enterprise servers and high end moderate sized database systems RAID 10 is often used in place of RAID 1 or RAID 5 by those requiring higher performance It may be used instead of RAID 1 for applications requiring more capacity 154 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 9 6 RAID 5 RAID 5 provides the best balance of capacity and performance while providing data redundancy It provides redundancy by striping data across three disks and keeps the parity information AP on the fourth disk in each stripe In case of disk failure data can be recovered from the surviving disks using the parity information When you replace the failed disk the reconstructed data is written onto the new disk Re synchronize the array to have it return to its original state The following example shows data stripped across three disks A1 to A3 in the first strip for example with parity information AP on the fourth disk Table 41 RAID 5 The capacity of a RAID 5 array is the smallest disk in the RAID set multiplied by one less than the number of disks in the RAID set For example if you have four disks of sizes 150 GB 150 GB 200 GB and 250 GB respecti
139. a user access but the ACL setting does not the NSA does not give the user access Also if the ACL setting allows a user access but the share s settings do not the NSA does not give the user access Finding Out More See Section 3 2 on page 55 for a tutorial on configuring the sharing screens See Section 3 3 on page 61 for a tutorial on using shares 8 2 Users Click Sharing gt Users to open this screen where you can create and manage user accounts for the NSA s file services Figure 151 Sharing gt Users F j E oP py fa Ei 4dd User Search Update Edit User Delete User Info Domain Selected Display Number 20 Users Useris Go to Page i m Type all E Keyword s P Search BEL The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 49 Sharing gt Users Icons Add User Click this icon to open the Create a New Account screen where you can add new user accounts See Section 8 2 1 on page 178 for details Search Click this icon to display the search filters which you can use to search for user accounts by type or keyword Update Domain Users Click this icon to update the list of domain users by connecting to domain controller and retrieving the latest list of users and groups Note If a user is deleted on the domain controller but the NSA 2401 domain user list is not up to date then the user cannot log in since authentication is handled by the domain controller NSA 2401 User s Guide Ch
140. able 91 Applications gt Copy Button LABEL DESCRIPTION Currently Selected Share This field displays the share that the NSA is set to use with the copy button feature Click this button to use a different share with the copy button feature Copy Direction Select whether you want to use the copy button to copy files from the USB device to the share on the NSA or from the share on the NSA to the USB device Apply Select a share then click this to make it the default location where data is stored when you press the copy button Clear Settings Click this to reset this screen to the default settings Click this to discard any changes and start again 10 4 1 Changing the Copy Button Share Click Applications gt Copy Button and then Edit to open the following screen Use this screen to select the share the NSA uses with the copy button NSA 2401 User s Guide 227 Chapter 10 Application Screens Figure 189 Applications gt Copy Button gt Edit Please select a share to be the target share for the copy button user create Bob private user create Bill private user create i im i private user create Fred public user create Sales public The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 92 Applications gt Copy Button gt Edit ICON DESCRIPTION Available Share pcg I Indicates the share can be used for file and folder management Unavailable Share eG Indicates the share cannot be used because the NSA c
141. ably effect the intention of the parties NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences NSA 2401 User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2009 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer Zy XEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital de
142. access display Now you can use FTP to securely transfer files to or from the NSA Use a secure method to let your users know the correct fingerprint for the NSA s certificate so they can check it before adding a security exception 3 5 3 Controlling Access to Shares Folders and Files Gonzo wants to give Kermit and the senior management group read only access to the Strategy folder However Kermit is not to see the 2010 2014 Plans file The following sections show how to configure the Gonzo share s access settings and Access Control List ACL settings 3 5 3 1 Configuring the Share s Access First you need to give Kermit and the senior management read only access to the share 1 Click Sharing gt Shares Select the Gonzo share and click Edit Share Figure 65 Sharing gt Shares Internal Storage External Storage a 2 E 3 m TCPAP Add Shara Recycle i Z ACL Delets DFS Shara Windows CIFS Prozertias Shere Browser HTE samme IERSE Girmuans j J ert cre ated Shares User created Kermit vslumelykerm Kermt Advances NSA 2401 User s Guide 83 Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Set the Share Access to Advanced and click Edit Figure 66 Sharing gt Shares gt Edit Share Edit Share Share Name Gonzo Volume volumet 111 07 GE B Make This Share Gm E Owned By a Enable This Share Enable Action Log Enable Recycle Bin Share Access 3 Move Senior Management and Kermit to R
143. ackup job or the NSA or the RAID array containing the backup job failed you cannot restore archived files by the backup job In this example the NSA s RAID array failed You ve replaced the hard drives and re configured the RAID To restore by backup files 1 Click Protect gt Restore Specify where the archive files are located In this example enter 192 168 3 2 as the IP address admin as the account name 1234 as the password and Backups as the share name Click Test Connection Click Next Figure 96 Protect gt Restore Step 1 Restore Step 1 Select Restored Source f Remote NSA IF 19216832 adds 192 168 3 2 User admin Password E Successfully Share Backus Set Former connected to Mame be HSA Internal or External Volume m 102 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Select the backup job and backup time and click Next Figure 97 Protect gt Restore Step 2 Restore Step Z Select Restore Point 5 aoe name OO O O o amp Weekly_backup C recycle EJ Restored Time E 2008 09 08 14 35 45 C 2008 09 08 14 37 28 Previous 3 Select everything in the Gonzo share except the recycle folder Click Next Figure 98 Protect gt Restore Step 3 _ EEE Restore Step 3 Please select which file s folder s to restore roloder wan I PERSE J EES Pe SSK rei i BE E Gonzo Planning Gonzo Strategy 2010 201 4 Plans doc E 2009 Plan
144. acter must be a letter Volume Name Select the internal volume to take a snapshot of When creating a new snapshot only volumes that are already created on the NSA are available Note You can only create one snapshot job per volume A snapshot must be done on a complete volume and not a single file or folder However you can restore files from a snapshot on an individual file by file basis Max i of Snapshot Select the number of snapshot images to take from 1 to 5 It s strongly Image s recommended to set this as low as possible as each new snapshot image created will reduce the NSA s file write performance Period Select how often the job should run Hourly Daily or Weekly It is recommended you schedule snapshots for times when your network is not busy such as at night If two events are configured to run at the same time then one must wait until the other finishes running Enter the time and or day as appropriate for your selection Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA Cancel Click this button to discard your changes and exit the screen 9 4 2 Snapshot Images Click Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images tab to open the following screen Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Figure 182 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images Snapshot oe Delete Selected Amagets
145. age gt External Storage gt Disk External Storage 1 i fe Eject Lacate Duplicate USB Key USB FLASH DRIVE 54CB 245 00 MB The NSA automatically creates volumes for the USB drive You just need to configure sharing settings Chapter 8 on page 173 to let your users use it 3 9 2 Adding an Internal Hard Drive to an Existing Disk Array If you do not already have four disks installed you can install more You can add a new disk to an existing JBOD array or three disk RAID 5 array When you add a new disk to an existing array you do not have to create new volumes and sharing settings For optimal performance and RAID storage capacity use hard drives of the same speed and capacity NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials LES If the new hard drives have any data you want to keep back it up to another location before you install them Adding these hard drives to a disk array formats them so all data stored on them will be lost 1 See the Quick Start Guide for details on installing hard drives in the NSA s bays You can install hard drives while the NSA is operating 2 Click Storage gt Internal Volumes gt Disk and make sure the new drive displays with a healthy status Figure 108 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk Internal Storage we iW 14 y Wizards Eject SMALT raid5 raldSDiD3D4 seagate STIL2082745 3 42 111 79 GB raida raidsDip3sp4a PS Ve 465 76 GB raids raldsSDiD3D4 Seagate
146. agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above 346 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences any software hardware or device other than such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2 1 b and 2 2 b are revoked effective as of the date You first made used sold distributed or had made Modifications made by that Participant 8 3 If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved such as by license or settlement prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license 8 4 In the event of termination under Sections 8 1 or 8 2 above all end user license agreements excluding distributors and resellers which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination 9 Limitation of liability Under no circumstances and under no legal theory whether tort includin
147. al group created on the NSA that is in conflict with a domain group Domain Group Indicates a domain group created on a domain controller Conflict Domain Group Indicates a domain group created on a domain controller that is in conflict with a local group created on the NSA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Sharing gt Groups Display Number Set the number of groups displayed per page Go to Page Select a page number of user account groups to display Type This field displays when you click the Search icon Use it to filter search results according to the user group type selected Keyword s This field displays when you click the Search icon Enter a specific word for which to search The default is all words Search This button displays when you click the Search icon Click to begin searching according to the search parameters you set If you choose not to set any search parameters then the defaults for each filter is used Clear filter This button displays when you click the Search icon Click to reset all the search filters back to their default settings NSA 2401 User s Guide 183 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 54 Sharing gt Groups continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Previous amp Next Click Previous to cycle back through the pages of groups and Next to cycle forward through them This icon displays the type of group and can also show if the group Is in conflict Group Type Th
148. amic or static IP address es subnet mask default gateway and DNS servers The NSA automatically restarts its network services after you apply changes in the TCP IP or Windows CIFS screens Click Network gt TCP IP to access the Network gt TCP IP screen NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens Figure 144 Network gt TCP IP IP Address Teaming Mode Standalone Default Gateway ILAN Note The network cable for LANZ is currently unplugged iE Dynamic iE Dynamic Static Static IP Address 192 158 1 34 IP Address 0 0 0 0 IF Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IF Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Gateway iE Dynamic Static Primary DNS Server 192 168 1 1 Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Jumbo Frames Disabled co Enabled Caution Jumbo Frame is supported in 1 Gbps and higher mode only Please make sure your host switch hub and router support Jumbo Frames Network Diagnostic Tool The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Network gt TCP IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Teaming Mode Select how to use the NSA s two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Stand Alone Select this option to use a separate IP address on each of the two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Fault Tolerance Select this option to use the LAN2 Gigabit Ethernet interface as a fail over backup for the LAN1 Gigabit Ethernet interface Both Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are connected t
149. and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen e Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on e e g 1s a Shorthand for for instance and 1 e means that is or in other words NSA 2401 User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The NSA icon is not an exact representation of your device Notebook computer Server Firewall Switch NSA 2401 User s Guide 5 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings lt gt For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information ONLY qualified service personnel shou
150. annot find the physical location of the share Disabled Share Indicates the share is no longer functional If this happens talk to your network administrator The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 Applications gt Copy Button gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This column displays whether the share is Available Unavailable or Disabled Share Type This displays whether the share is created by the system or by the administrator This displays the name of the share on the NSA Share Path This displays the location of the shared folder on the NSA Forward slashes are used as path folder tree branch separators Share paths that no longer exist are shown in red This displays the name of the user account that owns the share Permission Type This displays the type of permissions assigned to the share Options are public private and advanced Apply Select a share then click this to make it the default location where data is stored when you press the copy button Click this to discard any changes and start again 228 NSA 2401 User s Guide Maintenance Screens 11 1 Overview This chapter introduces the NSA Maintenance screens 11 1 1 What You Can Do In The Maintenance Screens e View the NSA system logs See Section 11 2 on page 230 for details e Manage the NSA configuration file See Section 11 3 on page 237 for details e Configure HTTPS and the NSA s SSL certificate See Section
151. apter 8 Sharing Screens Table 49 Sharing gt Users Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Edit User Select a user account from the list then click this icon to edit their account name group membership password and volume quota See Section 8 2 1 on page 178 for details Delete Selected Users Select a user account from the list then click this icon to remove it User Info Select a user account from the list then click this icon to view their quota and group information See Section 8 2 2 on page 181 for details Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Local User Indicates a local user account Domain User Indicates a domain user account Administrator Indicates an administrator account Conflict Local User Indicates a local user account in conflict See Section 8 2 0 1 on page 177 for more information Conflict Domain User Indicates a domain user account in conflict See Section 8 2 0 1 on page 177 for more information The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Sharing gt Users LABEL DESCRIPTION Display Number Set the number of user accounts displayed per page Go to Page Select a page number of user accounts to display Type This field displays when you click the Search icon Use it to filter search results according to the user account type selected Keyword s This
152. ard Certificate Store Certificate stores are system areas where certificates are kept Windows can automatically select a certificate store or you can specify a location for 2 Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate Place all certificates in the following store 7 Otherwise select Place all certificates in the following store and then click Browse Figure 255 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard Place all certificates in the following store Certificate store 8 In the Select Certificate Store dialog box choose a location in which to save the certificate and then click OK Figure 256 Internet Explorer 7 Select Certificate Store Select Certificate Store Select the certificate store you want to use FEET Y 2 6 a Trusted Root Certification Authorities Enterprise Trust 1 29 Intermediate Certification Authorities 5 Active Directory User Object A Trusted Bi thlichere E Show physical stores NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 9 In the Completing the Certificate Import Wizard screen click Finish Figure 257 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wizard Completing the Certificate Import Wizard You have successfully completed the Certificate Import wizard You have specified the following settings Certificate Store Select
153. are Permission Access each volume s snapshots in a share in the volume Users with read access to the share can also read or copy the files in the snapshots Each share will have a folder named snap share for users to access the share s snapshots Edit Job Select a snapshot job and click this icon to modify it s settings Take Snapshot Now Select a snapshot job and click this icon to have the NSA perform the snapshot right away instead of waiting for the scheduled time The job is running now Delete Selected Job s Select a snapshot job s and click this icon to remove the job s The job is running now Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order NSA 2401 User s Guide 21 F Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field shows whether the snapshot job is currently running or waiting to run The percent complete also displays for a currently running job Job Name This is the name of the snapshot job Volume Name This field identifies the volume upon which this job takes snapshots A snapshot must be done on a complete volume and not a single file or folder Snapshot Number This field displays how many snapshots this job has taken so far Period This field displays the snapshot
154. ars asking you to confirm the action Click Apply to continue or Cancel to abort the process Figure 208 Maintenance gt Shutdown gt Confirm Restart Restart system now The following users are currently connected If you decide to continue they may be disconnected Bob Web 192 166 1 355 Web admin 192 168 1 33 Performing this operation vill cause some network services to temporarily disconnect When you click the Shutdown button a pop up screen appears asking you to confirm Click Apply to continue or Cancel to abort the process Figure 209 Maintenance gt Shutdown gt Confirm Shutdown Shutdown system now NSA 2401 User s Guide PART III Troubleshooting and Specifications eshooting 249 ications 257 247 Troubleshooting 12 1 Troubleshooting Overview This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories e Power Hardware Connections and LEDs e NSA Login and Access e Users Cannot Access the NSA e Backups and Snapshots e External USB Disks 12 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs pa The NSA PWR LED does not turn on no LEDs are on e Make sure the NSA is turned on Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NSA e Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NSA and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power sour
155. asetalicdeaneneneeddsmeraiaedsisiaieeicianadieas 96 Figure 87 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 1 assessed tcctkscemtetneedi cco uatednducuantcetacotimeeeedescomseniensens 97 FP gt Backup gt AdO JOD SED Jarre nekte 98 Figure 89 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 Leer 99 Fig re 90 Froleci gt Backup AGG JOD SE ER 99 Bo eee Sey Mig OIE EE ER TE EE EN EEE 100 Figure 92 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 mmmrrnnnnnnnvvnrnnnnnnrvvnnnnnnnnvnnvrnnnnnsnnnvnnnnnnrennnnnnnnee 100 Figure 93 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 Lusneneismsenleiaejemejeaseelabisemekeidesndnebeee 101 Figure 94 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 3 ccccccssssseeeeeceeeseeeeeceeeeseeeeessaeeseeeeessesseeees 101 Figure 95 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Progress cccsssecesssecescseeecceseeseeeeeesoueeeseueeessaneess 102 Foue PORN FN 1 arsina arad rennit ara irar a T aniria r eian aran iiaiai 102 Figure 97 Fiotect SN arr 103 gre Rye ee EEE 103 Figure 99 Froteci gt Restore TL Veret Seen 104 Foue TOU Fer NN aa E E A 104 Figure 101 Printer Connected to NSA Windows Explorer cccccseccccceeseeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeeaeeeeessaaeeeeeaaees 105 Figure 102 Printer Connected to NSA Windows Explorer Warning ccccsseeeceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaees 105 Fioure 103 Frinter Lriver Needed erre tkere 105 Figure 104 Applications gt Print Server eccaicscesseccnctietvcsvncssxseneeicstasna
156. at the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the 330 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with
157. ate errors View certificates NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 4 In the Certificate dialog box click Install Certificate Figure 252 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to nsaz401 Issued by nsa2401 Valid from 5 20 2008 to 5 20 2011 R nstall pkt 5 In the Certificate Import Wizard click Next Figure 253 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wizard Welcome to the Certificate Import Wizard This wizard helps you copy certificates certificate trust lists and certificate revocation lists from your disk to a certificate store A certificate which is issued by a certification authority is a confirmation of your identity and contains information used to protect data or to establish secure network connections certificate store is the system area where certificates are kept To continue cick Next NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 6 If you want Internet Explorer to Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate click Next again and then go to step 9 Figure 254 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wiz
158. ath Internal COPY BTN NOTICE Path COPY BTN NOTICE Copying content of 0 to 1 USB Internal USB Done Path Internal Path FTP INFO USER 0 1 login FTP User Name SUCCESS ETP nS FTP MD FTP NONGE FTP ue LOG INFO Clean system log complete LOG INFO Change DB path to O log OK LOG INFO Reset DB to System Default OK NOTICE Network Config setting is changed NOTICE Network Network Network interface 0 link up Network interface name NOTICE Delete group 0 Group Name a FTP NOTICE FTP service starts with TLS mode Number of Number files of bytes removed in removed recycle bin in recycle bin NOTICE Add new user br A tom 2 UserName UserName P NOTICE Delete new user 0 by 1 from User Name User Name 2 NOTICE User 0 password has been User Name User Name changed by 1 from 2 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S Netware NOTE Netware Vind I NFS mo EnbioNFS success es fom feens 1 s pe paes O O CRT Disable Disable NFS FAILED FAILED Ge Sp 1 2 to be gr EE Filter a rw ro CRIT ee 10 1 2 to NFS Path IP Filter Permission rw ro INFO Remove All data in NFS Share NFS Share 0 SUCCESS Name CRIT Remove All data in NFS Share NFS Share 0 FAILED Name RESET BTN NOTICE RESET BUTTON Reset admin password amp ip setting RESET
159. aw that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive It in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these
160. b Folder or FTP site cane NSA 2401 User s Guide 61 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Enter Gonzo s username and password and click OK Figure 29 Entering the Share Username and Password Enter Network Password 3 x Incorect password or unknown Username for 14192 168 1 354Gonzo Cancel Connect As Gonzo Eel Password ie 4 Now Gonzo can use the share like a drive on his computer Click File gt New gt Folder and create a folder named Strategy Figure 30 Creating a Folder Gonzo on 197 168 1 35 H File Edit view Favorites Tools Help 9 gt Alan glu xala Address Hil Go 5 Er 16 2008 9 37 AM 9 16 2008 9 37 AM Gonzo on 192 168 1 35 HJ 5 Copy and paste the 2009 Plan doc file into the Strategy folder Figure 31 Using the Folder Favorites Tools Help 3 3 2 Using a Share with a Web Browser Now Gonzo wants to use his web browser to add the 2010 2014 Plans doc file to his Strategy folder 62 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Open Firefox and enter http 192 168 1 35 to open the login screen Enter Gonzo s username and password and clicks Login Figure 32 User Login 2 ZyXEL NSA 2401 Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help http ff192 168 1 35 loginwrap html 7 VW Wikipedia tEnalist JE j Welcome to NS4 2401 Enter Username password and click to login Siysername Gonzo Password meets a masimum of 14 alphanumeric
161. ble describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Sharing gt Shares LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This icon displays whether the share is available unavailable or disabled The default and snapshot shares cannot be deleted Share Type This displays whether the share is created by the system or by an administrator account This displays the name of the shared folder on the NSA This displays the name of the user account that owns the share Permission Type This displays the type of permissions assigned to the share Options are public private and advanced The key icon indicates that a share has an Access Control List NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 57 Sharing gt Shares continued DESCRIPTION Display Number Set the number of shares displayed per page Previous amp Next Click Previous to cycle back through the pages of shares and Next to cycle forward through them 8 4 1 Create a New Share amp Edit a Share To create a local group click Sharing gt Shares gt Add Share To edit an existing local group click Sharing gt Shares gt Edit Share The share creation and share editing screens are identical in appearance Figure 159 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share Share Name j Volume volume 111 76 GE a Make This Share Gam H Owned By admin Enable This Share Enable Action Log Enable Recycle Bin kd Share Access Keep It private to owner w The fol
162. bniiarceoeesversiintiorsi rasi AL rinira anidan 106 Figure 105 Printer Screen in Windows Explorer vase 106 Figure 106 Connecino a USB RS ER nite 107 Figure 107 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk uoeseesekvenesepeeenekeGeddineamedamane 107 Figure 108 Storage gt Internal Storage gt DISK lt c cccccseeseccecceccsasescccecsnsenceseesneesaeeeeascesaseneaseneasenneners 108 Figure 109 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID cscs ade cecetedssenesieiecenseshigeacsdccpbeiasecscielaseaseticessesieniaioreecie 108 Figure 110 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Add Disk uunnnnnnnnnrrvvnnnnnnnrvevvrnnnnrrrrennnnnnnrrrennnnnsrneren 109 Figure 111 Silorag gt Internal Storage S DISK EE EE EE 109 Figure 112 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume rnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnssenee 110 Figure 113 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume gt Edit rrrrrnnnnnvrrnnnnrvvrnnnnrrvnnnnnrnnrnnnnrrnrransrenrnnsnrrnnnnn 110 Fi re 114 St rage Internal Storage gt DISK RR ER iaai 111 Figure 115 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt Eject sccccicicencrecassuncececwiencndeseiadiorcacaceacedaceienciwareeseeenads 111 Figure 116 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt Eject rrrnrrnnrvvnrnnnnnnrvvvrnnnnnnrennvnnnnnervennnnnnnnnrrnvnnnnnsnenn 111 PIS TT omus RAD DN ee 112 Figure 118 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID rrrannnnnrnnrrnnnnnnvvnnrrnnnnnsrnnrrnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnnss
163. button to proceed 9 2 2 2 Creating a Backup Job Step 3 Figure 169 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 Add a new backup Job Step 3 Compression ves No Encryption Yes ng Purge Policy o Keep All Old Backup files C keep Only the last backup files 1 30 C keep Backups For daylsif1 3650 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 LABEL DESCRIPTION Compression Compression reduces the size of the file that you want to back up although it also consumes more of the NSA s CPU s computing power With compression enabled the transfer of the backup file is faster However restoring may be slower If backup space is not a concern and recovery speed is then turn off compression If the backup target is at a remote site to which the NSA connects through a low bandwidth connection turn on compression Encryption For synchronization backups enable encryption to use encryption while transferring the file However the final file stored on the remote NSA is unencrypted For archive backups use encryption to create password encrypted backup files Bandwidth Restrict the bandwidth of synchronization backups to help stop them from using all of your network connection s available bandwidth This is more important when backing up to a remote NSA or computer through the Internet 206 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect
164. c ness nse pce ne cae se ao E ae tee cee 39 Fe EEE ee EE EEE NE 40 Figure 10 My NSA Share Browsing gt Move to or Copy tO rrrrrrrrrnnnrerrnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnsnsennnnn 42 Figure 11 My NSA Share NN cndartaceswncnicicnrranrsceraraciseess neeriicemneemnedsanereneesmne 42 Figure 12 My NSA Change Share Properties cccccccccsseccceceeeeeceeeceeseaeeeeseusecessuaeeeeseueeeesaaaeeessaases 43 Figure 13 My NSA Change Share Properties gt Share Access Configuration cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 JE EE REE EE EE 46 FN re 48 Figure TS en JE REE EE ER 49 Figure 17 NNN MENNEG eee 53 FEE eee a 56 EEE PE EE EE 56 ge EE EE im a S 57 Figure 21 Sharing gt Users gt Create a New Account rrnnrrnnnnennnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnnnrennnnnnrrnnnnenennnnnsennnnn 57 FU 58 ge gt Groups PO SAIS EE SE isian 59 SEE 0 EEE pce E NE 59 Figure 29 Sharing ee RE EE rs 60 ete see EEE 60 Figure 27 Sharing gt Shares gt ACG SAIS x icsnsasciiricecanineveshtasunaunrcineinbnescnnevcrsaniateneiadidetinbreisneersuaoeeeins 61 gs EEE EE ET ue eee meee cee en i oe 61 Figure 29 Entering the Share Username and Password ccccceeececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaaeeees 62 Ut NFU en 62 PT NTN re DGEN APT 62 ON NN 63 Figure 33 Gonzo s LIF NSA ee REE RE 63 Foure TINN 64 UG do orate Folder Sei ainena E EEA EENE AAEN EAN TENE Aa ENEE EE 65 Figure do Upioad Fics SOTO eee a aiir S 65 Figure 37 Opening the Finder Laste ke ker
165. cally locks an encrypted volume if the NSA restarts or loses power or the disk is removed An administrator can also manually lock the volume Once a volume is locked no one can use it again until an administrator unlocks it Encryption affects the NSA s write speeds password Select this option to manually enter a password for the volume You can also enter a password prompt hint to help you remember the password if you forget it You will need to manually re enter the key every time the NSA restarts USB key Select this option to have the NSA create a password for the volume and store the password on a connected USB device Later if the volume is locked the NSA automatically unlocks it when you insert the USB key At start up if a USB key is inserted the NSA automatically unlocks any volumes encrypted by it Password The password fields display if you choose to encrypt the volume by manually entering a password Enter a password for encrypting the volume Password Confirm Re type the password to make sure you entered it correctly Password Prompt Enter a hint to help you recall the password if you forget it USB Key The USB field and button display if you choose to encrypt the volume by USB key Select a USB key device that you created previously or select a USB device that you want to make into a USB key If the USB device is not already connected connect it and click the Refresh icon The NSA s upper USB port is USB1 and its
166. cceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstan
167. ccess speed to shares until resynchronization finishes Add Disk To add another disk to an existing JBOD RAID1 or RAID5 array select the array and click this icon You can add a disk to increase an array s capacity or to use as a hot spare standby When you add a disk to an existing array you do not have to re create shares access rights and so on as you would if you created a new array Add Disk Disk Name disk E please choose the function RAIDS Reshape C add Hot Spare Reshape Make a three disk RAID5 array into a four disk RAID5 array Expand JBOD Add another disk to a JBOD array Add Hot Spare Add a standby disk For a RAID1 or RAID5 array the capacity of the disk you are adding must be equal to or greater than the smallest disk in the array Remove Hot Spare To remove the standby drive from a RAID1 or RAID5 array select the array and click this icon After you do this you can create a single disk JBOD array for the disk Remove Hot Spare Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 25 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Sort Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Status This icon shows Healthy Resynching Degraded or Down see Section 6 4 2 on page 134 If an array is degraded click the Repair icon after you have replaced the faulty disk The following tab
168. ccounts the next thing you ll want to do is organize the user accounts into groups This example creates a senior management group with vice president Gonzo as a member You can add other members later 1 Click Sharing gt Groups gt Add Group Figure 22 Groups ss Sharing Groups Status Fn HE Search Update Edit Group Delete Date Time Domain Selected Display Number 20 W Groups Group s Go to Page 1 B Internal Storage External Storage Page 1 Of 1 aig kel i MP TCP IP i E nr ae Windows CIFS ocal Management HFS Page 1 Of 1 Users Groups ohares 58 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Specify a name for the group Select Gonzo and click Add Selected User s to include Gonzo in the group Click Apply Figure 23 Sharing gt Groups gt Add Share Add a New Local Group Group Name Senior H anagement Description Available User s Group Membership Gonzo Group Membership 3 2 3 Setting Up Shares You ve created accounts for Gonzo and Kermit and now you want to create a share for each of them You also have a senior management group You want to allow the users in the senior management group to access both shares while Kermit can access his own share 1 Click Sharing gt Shares gt Add Share Figure 24 Shares se Sharing Shares Shares Status a our g Es af Add Share JRecycle Edit Share ACL Delete Share Date Time Bi Properties Share Browser
169. ccsccsitcsdescinmnianiereectiasrcblecdnvcreneiesiosnernese 91 3 7 4 Creating a Synchronization Backup 1 lt ccccccseseccccecssssseeceessseseseecesnenssasecrecteueseerecteness 92 3 7 5 Creating an Archive BackUp acs innnan a aii aa 96 3 7 6 Restoring Archived Files by Backup JOb cccicccsicevesceraidsrasessesrdinvervacnsiasesseieiasierseiavecrenes 99 sda Pesona DW COG FoS seende Sabani 102 FIN ewer TUOTE eaa EEEE wet eee es eee 104 3 9 How to Increase the NSA s Storage Capacity rrnrvnnnnnvnnnnnnrrnvnnnnevevnnnnenvnnnnnevennnnnernnnnnnenennn 106 3 9 1 Connecting External USB Hard Drives rrrrannrnerrnrrnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnsrennnnnnn 107 3 9 2 Adding an Internal Hard Drive to an Existing Disk Array rrrrrnrrrrnrnnnrrrnnnnnnenvnnnnnenn 107 3 9 3 Using a Disk Array s Increased Capacity rrrrrnrnnrrnnnnnnovnrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnrrnnnnnnennnnnnn 109 3 9 4 Migrating a RAID to Higher Capacity Hard Drives rrrrrnnnrrnrnnnnnrnrnnnnvnnnnnnrennnnnnrennnnn 110 PET Web GONTQUIALON Lauvavaramesmmsmmsemsmsmmesmmmarmmm 115 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 4 ET EE ENE EE 117 TV NN 117 Chapter 5 SET EE 121 TRE E 121 ETE EEE NE diaeresis 122 Chapter 6 e ole ET REE EE A eine E E A 125 Me bee GE EE EE ER ER 125 6 1 1 What You Can Do in the Storage Screens rwurrrnnnnnavvrvnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnnvennnnnnenrennnnennennee 125 6 1 2 What You Need to Know About Storage rrrrrrnnrrrrrnnnnrrnnnnnn
170. ce the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser Gen
171. ce is turned on e Turn the NSA off and on e Disconnect the power cord for at least 10 seconds Reconnect it and turn the NSA back on e If the problem continues contact the vendor pa The NSA SYS LED is quickly flashing red If the SYS LED is quickly flashing red then a RAID array is degraded Degraded means one of the disks in a RAID array is down but the array can still be used if you re using RAID I or RAID 5 Go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk screen to identify the faulty disk Replace the faulty disk with another of equal or greater capacity See your Quick Start Guide for information on replacing a disk and also Disk Replacement Restrictions on page 128 NSA 2401 User s Guide 249 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting After replacing the disk go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screen If the array s status is not Resynching select the array and click the Repair icon The NSA SYS LED is orange or is flashing orange e If the SYS LED is steady on orange then the NSA is unlocking an encrypted volume or there are no volumes in the NSA If there are no volumes on the NSA you cannot create shares on the NSA You must first create a RAID and volume you must already have an internal disk installed See also Chapter 6 on page 125 e If the SYS LED is flashing orange then firmware is being upgraded to the NSA Wait until the firmware upgrade is complete and the SYS LED turns steady green
172. cessfully completed the Certificate Import wizard You have specified the following settings Certificate Store Selected Automatically determined by i Content Certificate fn 8 If you are presented with another Security Warning click Yes Figure 52 Security Warning security Warning You are about to install a certificate from a certification authority CA daiming to represent nsa 401 Windows cannot validate that the certificate is actually from nsa2401 You should confirm its origin by contacting nsa2401 The following number will assist you in this process Thumbprint sha 1 350 109AC DBCOES54 FE327C71 46401546 24255893 Warning If you install this root certificate Windows will automatically trust any certificate issued by this CA Installing a certificate with an unconfirmed thumbprint is a security risk If you dick Yes you acknowledge this risk Do you want to install this certificate 9 Finally click OK when presented with the successful certificate installation message Figure 53 Certificate Import Wizard Successful Certificate Import Wizard x 1 The import was successful 74 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 5 1 3 Turn on the NSA s Web Security Now that you have customized the NSA s certificate and installed it in your computer you can turn on security for your Web Configurator sessions This example uses Firefox 3 0 See Appendix C on
173. ch filters which you can use to search for specific text and or criteria in the log collection See Section 11 2 1 on page 232 for more information Purge All Logs Click this icon to erase all logs from the NSA Eg A Purge All Logs re you sure you want to purge all log messages Click Yes to remove all logs or No to cancel NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Table 94 Maintenance gt Log Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Log Config 0 Click this icon to open Log Configuration screen See Section 11 2 2 on page 232 for more information Report Config D Click this icon to open the Log Report Configuration screen where you can set up how logs are handled See Section 11 2 4 on page 233 for details Export Log The following table describes the labels in this screen Figure 191 Maintenance gt Log LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the log entry s number in the list according to the currently selected sort order Time This shows the date and time the log was created Click the top of the column to sort by oldest or newest This displays the log category Severity This displays how serious the log is rated by the NSA The severity ratings are Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice and Info Message This displays a description of the log Click the top of the column to sort by alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order Display Number Set the number of logs displa
174. character display in Windows Explorer Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard any changes and start again NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 10 Application Screens 10 3 Print Server Click Applications gt Print Server to open this screen Use this screen to view and manage the NSA s list of printers and print jobs Figure 186 Applications gt Print Server E Rename Ek Cancel Job fil Delete on line The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Applications gt Print Server LABEL DESCRIPTION Click this to update the list of printers and print jobs Status This fields shows whether the printer is connected and turned on on line or not off line Name This identifies the printer Each printer connected to the NSA must use a unique name Actions Rename Click this to change the name the NSA uses for the printer Cancel Job Click this to remove all print jobs from the NSA queue for a particular printer However since the NSA sends print jobs to the printer as soon as it can this button may only have an effect if there are very large or many print jobs in the queue To stop a print job that has already started you may have to turn off the printer Delete Click this to remove a printer from the NSA s printer list To add the printer back into the list disconnect the printer from the NSA s USB port and reconnect it If that does not work disconnect the USB port and
175. ck Connect Figure 63 FileZilla Site Manager Site Manager Select Entry My Sites S E New site Host 192 168 1 35 Port 21 General Advanced Transfer settings Charset l Servertype FTPES FTP over explicit TLS SSL we Logontype Normal we User Gonzo Password Account EET Comments 82 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 A security warning screen displays The SHA1 fingerprint must match the NSA s certificate you downloaded from the NSA to your computer Double click the NSA s certificate file and then click Details and look at the Thumbprint If they match click OK Figure 64 FileZilla Unknown Certificate Warning Unknown certificate The server s certificate is unknown Please carefully examine the certificate to 1 make sure the server can be trusted Details Host 192 168 1 35 21 valid From 9112 2008 valid to al12 2011 Serial number O0 8F 2d 37 2c 36 19 67 37 Public key algorithm RSA with 1024 bits Fingerprint MDS 14 bo 16 d9 61 0d 00 12 a9 66 4a SF abi8c c4 50 Fingerprint SHA 1 1 62 77 6f 09 cf 140112 94 84 38 167 193 d5 d Sbice 82 46 60 83 Subject of certificate Certificate issuer Common name NS49863 Common name NS49863 Organization ZyXEL Organization ZyXEL Session details Cipher AE5 128 CB6C MAC SHAI Trust this certificate and carry on connecting The shares and folders to which Gonzo has
176. colons semi colons angle brackets lt gt the plus sign semi colons commas question marks asterisks and the equals sign All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space Share names must be unique they cannot be the same as other share names Share names cannot use names reserved for automatic shares of external USB disk volumes be unique for example USB 0 9 1 2 that is a share named USB followed by a one or two digit number 2 5 4 1 Share Access Configuration This screen allows you to assign permissions to a share NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 13 My NSA Change Share Properties gt Share Access Configuration Share Access Configuration Available User sj Group s lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt anonymous ttp lt DOMAINUSERS gt admin lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt aes everone lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt miin Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Note Tou may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 My NSA Change Share Properties gt Share Access Configuration DESCR
177. conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License c If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
178. convey or otherwise transfer pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the Software You may not copy reverse engineer decompile reverse compile translate adapt or disassemble the Software or any part thereof nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software You may not market co brand private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software or any part thereof You may not use the Software or any part thereof in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity You may not cause assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing 5 Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions including without limitation not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software 6 No Warranty THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS TO THE
179. corporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works hereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file 324 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or withi
180. ction covers how to create user accounts groups and shares You can customize account permissions to give different users different levels of access to individual files and folders hosted on the NSA For example if you intend to use the NSA within a single department you may decide to give all the members of that department read and write access to all the files located on it You could also decide to give management read and write access to some files and give other employees read only access Using the tools built into the ZyXEL Web Configurator you can do just this 3 2 1 Setting Up User Accounts As the administrator of the NSA one of the first tasks you will want to do is set up accounts for everyone who needs to use it Suppose you need accounts for a vice president named Gonzo and a manager named Kermit Do the following to create a user account NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Log into the Web Configurator using your administrator Username and Password Figure 18 Administrator Login ZYXEL NSA 2401 Welcome to NSA 2401 Enter Username password and click to login Ousermamel Password a maximum of 14 alpha CL Note Please turn on the Javascript and ActiveX control setting on Internet Explorer 2 Inthe My NSA screen click Administration Figure 19 My NSA Language 2a Password dministratio My Own Shares NEtWOTKIStOTaAgE AJJIEinsa Shy snapshots EST Other Shares W B
181. d or Down The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume LABEL DESCRIPTION This field shows the name of the volume Volume Type This field shows the volume is unencrypted Normal or encrypted Crypto RAID Array This field shows the RAID or JBOD array on which the volume is located Capacity This field shows the total size of the volume how much is currently in use and how much is still available NSA 2401 User s Guide 141 Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 6 1 Creating or Editing an Internal Volume BES Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume gt Create to display the internal volume creation screen as shown next You can also select an existing internal volume and click the Edit icon Use this screen to add or edit internal storage volumes Keep an encrypted volume s password or USB key in a safe place You cannot access a locked volume without the password or USB key All of the volume s data will be unusable If you use a USB key keep backup copies Do not use the USB key for anything else do not store data on it or format it RAID Label RAIDS example 7 Volume Name Size 75776 MB 1GB 1024MB Available 151552MB 148 00 GBTotal 50 Used Capacity Encrypted password x Password i Password Confirm Password Prompt Note size will be rounded up to the nearest 64MB boundary The following table de
182. d only privileges files and folders cannot be modified moved or removed Deny Removes all privileges files and folders cannot be read modified moved or removed You can remove users from any given authority level by selecting them and clicking the left arrow Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window NSA 2401 User s Guide 189 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 8 4 2 ACL Configuration Click Sharing gt Shares select a share and click ACL Properties screen to open the Access Control List ACL screen Use this screen to display and configure ACL settings The ACL defines read and write permissions for specific files and folders e If you add a new file to a folder the new file takes on the folder s ACL settings e If you move a file from one folder to another the file keeps its ACL settings The NSA automatically creates a new ACL for the individual file with its ACL settings e Copying and pasting a file from one folder to another is treated the same as creating a new file the new file takes on the folder s ACL settings Figure 161 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration ACL Configuration a op Tod ip i New ACL Modify AZL Reset ACL Share Name Tom GY x11 Cy fFileZilla_ 3 0 9 2 win32 setup exe The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 60 Sharing gt ACL Configuration Icons ICON DESCRIPTION New ACL Click this ic
183. d the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name PHP must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact group php net 4 Products derived from this software may not be called PHP nor may PHP appear in their name without prior written permission from group php net You may indicate that your software works in conjunction with PHP by saying Foo for PHP instead of calling it PHP Foo or phpfoo 340 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences 5 The PHP Group may publish revised and or new versions of the license from time to time Each version will be given a distinguishing version number Once covered code has been published under a particular version of the license you may always continue to use it under the terms of that version You may also choose to use such covered code under the terms of any subsequent version of the license published by the PHP Group No one other than the PHP Group has the right to modify the terms applicable to covered code created under this License 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes PHP freely available
184. doc Strategy NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Specify where you want to put the files Browse to Gonzo Click Done Figure 99 Protect gt Restore Step 4 ee Restore Step 4 Set a restore target and start restoring Path for restoring a ao OWAE a Please input encryption password if you have set to this backup job esevevrvves The NSA restores the files and you can use them again 3 8 Printer Server Tutorial Do the following to configure the NSA to allow computers on your network to share a printer See www zyxel com for a list of compatible printers 1 Make sure the NSA is on and the SYS light shines steadily 2 Use a USB cable to connect the printer s USB port to one of the NSA s USB ports Make sure the printer is also connected to an appropriate power source Figure 100 Printer Sharing 1104 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Turn on the printer The NSA detects it after a few moments 4 On your computer open your CIFS file sharing program Windows Explorer for example and browse to the NSA Double click the printer s icon Figure 101 Printer Connected to NSA Windows Explorer I 197 168 1 2 File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help Back ft search L Folders iA fr DE X EH Address a 192 168 1 2 comment oo S El LI P Canon PRT 1 192 168 1 2 ad MUSIC 5 If you get a warning screen click the option that
185. dor 6 29 2009 Autoridad Certif 2 Autoridad Certifica Autoridad Certificador 6 30 2009 Autoridad Certif Baltimore EZ by DST Baltimore EZ by DST 7 4 2009 DST Baltimore E 2 Belgacom E Trust P Belgacom E Trust Prim 1 21 2010 Belgacom E Trus Elcaw HET Secure C amp W HET SecareNet 10 16 2009 CW HKT Secure EJcaw HET Secure C amp W HET SecureNet 10 16 2009 CW HKT Secure Eca HKT SecureN C amp W HKT SecureNet 10 16 2010 CW HKT Secure s Certificate intended purposes lt All gt E Boot Remove 4 Inthe Certificates confirmation click Yes Figure 266 Internet Explorer 7 Certificates Certificates Certificates is installed any deleted third party root certificates will be restored automatically but the system root EN Deleting system root certificates might prevent some Windows components from working properly If Update Root certificates will not Do you want to delete the selected certificate s 5 In the Root Certificate Store dialog box click Yes Figure 267 Internet Explorer 7 Root Certificate Store Root Certificate Store T Do you want to DELETE the following certificate from the Root Store Subject 172 20 37 202 ZyXEL Issuer Self Issued Time Validity Wednesday May 21 2008 through Saturday May 21 2011 Serial Number 00846BC7 46BFYC2E CB Thumbprint shal DC44635D 10FE2D0D E764A72ED 002B9AF7 677EB0E9 Thumbprint md5 65F5E948 FOBC9598 5080
186. dows based domain controller Select either Workgroup or Domain from the drop down list box This field becomes read only after the NSA joins a domain Workgroup Name Type your workgroup name in this field if you selected Workgroup from the field above The following fields apply if you selected Domain Windows Domain Select a windows domain protocol if you selected Domain above Choose Protocol NT4 Domain if your server uses a Windows NT operating system and Active Directory Domain if it uses a Windows 2000 or later operating system Domain Name Type the domain name of the Windows server domain controller The name can be up to 255 characters long The NSA s DNS server must be able to resolve this domain name Windows Domain Administrator is the default Windows Domain Administrator Administrator NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens Table 44 Network gt Windows CIFS continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type a password associated with the Windows Domain Administrator Windows Domain Administrator Password Test Connection This button appears after the NSA joins a domain Click it to check if the NSA can communicate with the Windows server domain controller Leave Domain The Leave Domain button appears after the NSA joins a domain Click Leave Domain to display options for having the NSA exit the domain Select Gracefully Leave Domain to have the NSA notify the Windows server domain controller that the NSA i
187. e previous Click this button to return to the preceding screen next Click this button to proceed 214 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 3 3 Protect gt Restore Step 4 Figure 179 Protect gt Restore Step 4 ee Restore Step 4 Set a restore target and start restoring Path for restoring Please input encryption password if you have set to this backup job Previous Done The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 Protect gt Restore Step 4 LABEL DESCRIPTION Path for restoring Type or browse for the folder to which you want to restore the backup files Enter the backup job s password if it has one previous Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA 9 4 Snapshots Important Notes on Snapshots 1 Snapshots can only be taken on internal volumes 2 The NSA stores snapshots in the space on the disk array that is not used by volumes 3 Since a snapshot is a record of changes if very large files typically over 1GB are transferred onto the volume then that change may be larger than the space available for the snapshot causing it to become invalid 4 Space available for snapshots can be decreased later by increasing the size of volumes but not increased Volumes can only be made bigger not smaller So it s better to leave enough unused space on a disk array when creating volumes 5 Ifthe
188. e In Germany for instance you would enter 2 AM because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The o clock field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select November First Sunday at 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select October Last Sunday The time you specify depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would type 2 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Offset Specify by how many hours to change the time for Daylight Saving Time Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes 5 1 1 Time Lag Time lag occurs when the time on the NSA falls behind the time on the time server This may happen 1f NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 5 System Setting Screen e The time server is no longer reachable e The NSA is shut down often The NSA internal battery keeps time when the NSA is shut down and this may cause possible
189. e Step 3 Restore Step 3 Set a restore target and start restoring f Original Location f Other Location NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 3 LABEL o DESCRIPTION Location this option to restore the files to the place from which they were copied Other Location Select this option to restore the files to somewhere other than the place from which they were copied Type or browse for the folder to which you want to restore the backup files Enter the backup job s password if it has one Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA 9 3 Restoring by Backup Files Click Protect gt Restore to open the Restore screens Use these screens to restore by the backup files if you deleted an archive backup job or the NSA or the RAID array containing the backup job failed You can also restore a previous archive backup from another NSA or an external USB hard drive connected to the NSA Figure 176 Protect gt Restore Step 1 Step 1 Select Restored Source f Remote NSA IP Address Account Password Share Name f Internal or External Volume M The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 Protect gt Restore Step 1 DESCRIPTION Remote NSA Select this option to restore from another NSA Type t
190. e to wake up the hard drivefs which may cause services to be non responsive for a brief period of time fo minutes Eaa Minimum UPS Capacity E EA M Note This feature will not work now because there is no UPS control cable connected H Note The NSA automatically shuts down if the UPS s remaining charge gets down to this level Hard Drive Sleep Time Minimum UPS Capacity Power On After Power Failure f Keep Former Status If the system was on when the power failed it restarts automatically when the power is restored If it was off it stays off f Always Power On The system restarts automatically when the power is restored Always Power Off The system will not restart after power failure You must press the power button manually to restart It Power On Off Schedule Enable Power Control Schedule 3 7 How to Use Backups and Snapshots Use the NSA s backup and snapshot features to backup your files and folders Do snapshots frequently hourly or daily for example since they are faster than backups Snapshots help protect against accidental file loss or damage caused by hackers e Schedule backups for times when the network is not busy like at night or on weekends For example you might do daily backups of important individual files or folders and a weekly general archive You can save backups to another location so your files can survive even if the original RAID or NSA fails NSA 2401 User
191. e 194 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Log Records Configuration Log Configuration Log Records Configuration Buzzer Priority Log Reserve Time Months Save Log to NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Log Records Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Reserve Set the number of months up to 10 to keep the logs stored on the NSA Time Save Log to Select a user account on whose share you want to store the logs The system default stores logs in a neutral location Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 2 3 Log Buzzer Priority Configuration Click Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Buzzer Priority to open a screen where you can configure the audible buzzer s settings enable or disable the audible buzzer alarm feature and set what severity level of logs trigger it nat pee ee eat a Figure 195 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Buzzer Priority L g Records Configuration Buzzer Priority F Enable Buzzer Emergency The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Buzzer Priority LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Buzzer Select this option to enable the audible buzzer alarm feature Use the drop down list box to select the severity
192. e S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology monitoring system to detect and report on hard drive reliability indicators to help anticipate hard drive failures 258 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 13 Product Specifications Table 110 Firmware Features continued UPS Integration Connect an APC Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS with a USB connection to the NSA The NSA shuts itself down if the UPS s battery charge gets down to a user configurable percentage This allows the NSA to shut down properly and avoid data loss caused by a power failure when the UPS stops supplying power Hard Disk Drive Power Saving Power Control Schedule The NSA can turn itself off and on or restart according to the schedule you configure Auto Shutdown The NSA automatically turns itself off when there is almost no power or the temperature is too high Time and Date Configure a time server and set a time zone for your NSA to show the correct times in e mail alerts and logs If a hard disk inside the NSA for a user configurable period of time the NSA puts it to sleep until you use it again E mail Alerts Configure an e mail to be sent to an NSA administrator whenever an error occurs or as a scheduled log summary 13 2 Specification Tables The NSA hardware specifications are shown in the following table D D Er Er Z op gt L Q Q Q OD op O D Q O O ep LAN1 IP Address 192
193. e is not open to external access Select Create a certificate authorized by other CA then follow the on screen instructions to install a certificate that has been authorized by a third party certificate authority Note Use this method if the device is open to external access such as allowing users to connect through the Internet using FTP over Explicit TLS or HTTPs 11 4 0 1 Editing a Self Signed Certificate or Creating a Certificate Signing Request When you select the Edit a self signed CA certificate option then click the Edit button a screen opens to allow you to make adjustments to the NSA s public key certificate The screen is also the same for the Create a certificate authorized by other CA option 240 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 203 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate milt i ee ENE Mini fer Sr Edit the Self signed Certificate Common Mame Host IP Address f Host Domain Name NS498563 Organizational Uniti Optional Max length 64 characters Organization Optional EEL Max length 64 characters Country iOptional Country code only such as TW US JP etc Key Type ASA Key Length Note If you choose a large key length it may take a while to make the certificate file The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Maintenance gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Common Name This name describes
194. e notice and other provisions required by the ___ License If you do not delete the provisions above a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the ___ License NOTE The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications This Product includes expiate and krb5 software under the MIT License The MIT License Copyright c lt year gt lt copyright holders gt Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions 348 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIG
195. e syslog daemon can be configured to send system logs to a central online repository known as a syslog server This allows the network administrators to quickly access and examine them without having to go to every machine on the network NSA 2401 User s Guide 229 Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Finding Out More See Section 3 5 on page 68 for tutorials on configuring security See Section 3 6 on page 89 for a tutorial on power resume 11 2 Log Click Maintenance gt Log to open a screen that displays all NSA activity logs Figure 190 Maintenance gt Log O Oaa Purge All Log Report Export Display Number 50 l Refresh Search Logs Config Config Log Go to Page 1 Pagel Of 1 2008 07 21 14 38 22 User info User adminfg19 166 1 33 login 2008 07 21 14 37 04 built in service notice FTP server starts with TLS mode 2008 07 21 14 37 02 built in service notice FTP server starts with TLS mode 2008 07 21 14 37 02 storage notice Diski is unplugged 2008 07 21 14 36 54 storage crit Detected Disk1 I O error 2008 07 21 14 36 54 built in service notice FTP server stops 2008 07 21 14 36 53 storage notice Disk3 is unplugged 2008 07 21 14 36 45 built in service notice FTP server stops on mm MR Pagel Of 1 The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 94 Maintenance gt Log Icons DESCRIPTION Refresh Click this icon to update the log display Search Click this icon to display the sear
196. e the disk surface NSA 2401 User s Guide 206 Flying Height Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 42 S M A R T Attributes continued ATTRIBUTE ID NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION 207 Spin High This is the quantity of high current used to spin up the drive Current 208 This is the number of buzz routines to spin up the drive When the arm holding the read write heads is stuck the motor driving it tries to oscillate the arm to free it This causes an audible vibration 209 Offline Seek Performance 220 Disk Shift 221 G Sense Error Rate 222 Loaded Hours 223 Load Unload Retry Count 224 Load Friction 225 Load Unload Cycle Count 226 Load In time This is the hard drive s seek performance during offline operations Offline operations are tests the drive does itself as opposed to those that an external diagnostic tool has it do Seek performance is how quickly the drive moves from track to track This is the number of attempts to compensate for variations in platter speed This is how far the disk has moved relative to the spindle this kind of shift is usually due to shock Lo L This is the number of errors that have resulted from external vibration and shock This is how long the hard drive has operated under data load this requires movement of the magnetic head armature This is how many time the magnetic head has changed position L This is resistance caused by friction in mechanica
197. e the following procedure to make the NSA s existing volumes larger in order to use the increased capacity You do not have to change your existing share backup and snapshot settings Of course you can also create new volumes but you must configure new share settings in order to use them and new backup and snapshot settings to protect the files NSA 2401 User s Guide 109 Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click the Volume tab Select a volume and click Edit Figure 112 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Internal Storage Ne Wizards i Delete Scan Lock UnLock woe 6 16 MB Used 172 29 GB Total 100 Free volumet Normal jbodD1D4 Healthy 2 Increase the size and click Apply Figure 113 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume gt Edit Edit Internal Yolume RAID Name bodD1D4 l Volume Mame example Size 87637 B 1GB 1024MB Available Capacity E Ege GE Encrypted i Note size will be rounded up to the nearest 64MB boundary 3 Repeat these steps for other volumes that need more storage capacity 3 9 4 Migrating a RAID to Higher Capacity Hard Drives You can migrate a RAID 5 array to hard drives of higher capacity Replace one hard drive at a time and recover the RAID before you go on to replace another hard drive For optimal performance and RAID storage capacity use hard drives of the same speed and capacity It is also recommended that you perform the upgrade when the network s traffic
198. e you can create a new disk array Rename Select a hard drive array and click this icon to change the array s name reName RAID Label RAID5 example Delete Select a hard drive array and click this icon to remove the array You must remove all of an array s volumes before you can delete the array Note Deleting an array also deletes all data in the array s disk s A warning screen appears Click Yes if you want to remove the array and all of its data Otherwise click No am ge RAID RAIDS example ALL Data On this RAID will be DELETED re you sure you want to DELETE this RAID Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Repair After you replace a faulty disk select the hard drive array its status will be Degraded and click this icon to resynchronize the array 136 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 25 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Icons continued ICON NSA 2401 User s Guide DESCRIPTION Resync Speed When a disk array is resynchronizing you can select it and click this icon to set how fast the NSA resynchronizes the disk array A screen displays Resync Speed Setting Speed Setting medium l Select the how fast the NSA should re synchronize the array The faster the resynchronization the slower the performance for users accessing shares With resynchronizing at a high priority users may have limited a
199. ead Only Click Apply in this screen and again in the edit screen Figure 67 Share Access Configuration Share Access Configuration Available Userfsi Groupts lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt anorymous p Bonzo admin lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt rar lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt evenlone m lt DOMAINGHOUPS gt Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt Kermit lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt Senior Management lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt i Note You may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 5 3 2 Setting the ACL to Deny Access to a File Now you need to stop Kermit from accessing the 2010 2014 Plans file 1 Select the Gonzo share and click ACL Properties Figure 68 Sharing gt Shares Shares oO Add Shara Recycle i DHS Shara i Browser Owner Type vslunmestlskern Kermt Adsanzec 2 Click New ACL Figure 69 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration Edit ACL Reset ACL ne Strategy ACL Path NSA 2401 User s Guide 85 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Open the Strategy folder Figure 70 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL ACL Configuration Set ACL Current Location Gonzo size Madea bate recycle 0 2008 09 16 09 37 36 Strategy 0 2008 09 16 10 46 44 4 Select the 201
200. eading cell again to reverse the sort order The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field displays the name of the NSA s USB port USB1 or USB2 to which the disk is connected The NSA s upper USB port is USB1 and its lower USB port is USB2 This shows whether or not the device has an encrypted volume Model Name This is the device s model name that uniquely identifies it in the NSA Capacity This field shows the device s storage size 146 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 8 External Volume Screen Click Storage gt External Storage gt Volume to display the external USB connected volume summary screen as shown next Use this screen to manage the NSA s external storage volumes The NSA automatically creates volumes when you connect an external disk You can also create other volumes Figure 137 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume External Storage hel r E ari 1 i i ai Lock UnLock The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 34 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Icons Create Click this icon to open a screen where you can create a new storage volume Edit Select a volume and click this icon to modify it s settings Scan Select a volume and click this icon to check the volume s file consistency Scan Yolume re you sure to scan the volume
201. ecceeeeceeeseeueceessuaeeeessaaeeeesauseeeessageeessaaaeeess 249 12 2 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnannennnvnnnnrvnnnnnnnene 249 12o ROA LOGIN Ne 251 12 4 Users Cannot Access the ne 253 pe OT se EEE EE ETE AE 254 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents Er DE ERE EE 255 Chapter 13 ge eee aaraa E 257 13 1 Feature Tables nicninsasinsniccseerersionicsasnohennsdaciaiiadspawrebaiasinjadiaisimnsaiiaddamesaiebcsionmbinseinsssicedseiaueds 257 TNT lt aE E cere ee 259 TN 261 Part IV Appendices and Index rranrvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnennnennnennnennnnnnnnen 263 Appendix A Log Messages rrrnrarrrnnnnrnnnnrnrnnnennnnrnnnnrnnnnnennnnennnsnnnnnnennnnrnnnnnennnnennnneennnnennnneen 265 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address cccccccccsseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesaeeessaeeeess 275 Appendix C Importing Certificates ccccccccccsseecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeceseeeeeceesseaeeeeessaaeeeessueeeessaaaes 299 Appendix D Open Source LICENCES rrrrrrrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnrnnnnrrnnrnnnnsennnnensennnnsnnernnnnsnseennnn 323 Pa Eeg EE NS 353 0 REE EEE eee eae 355 16 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures AE KE JONER EEE TT EE ET ETE 31 PEPE GE ENER EE EE ERR EN 32 Fowe J NOUT EI NN re 36 FAD NL eor E E RA E T E EES 36 Figure 5 NSA Login Sreet Lassen ERRA EREN A na a EAS aa aE E Ea 37 FEN FEN NN eden 37 FOT 42v442r4v4v4r44v4v4vre 38 PENT EN gsc s
202. ect a folder s or file s and click this icon to remove the folder s or Delete all content associated with these folders and files Do you wish to proceed The administrator can select a folder or file and click this button to move it to another location within this share or another share that you can access The administrator can select a folder or file and click this button to move create a copy of it in another location within this share or another share that you can access Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Up One Level Click this icon to go to the next higher layer in the share s folder tree Folder Click this icon to browse the folder File Click this icon to select a file The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 My NSA Share Browsing LABEL DESCRIPTION Current location This is the name of the share and folder path that you are in Type The icon in this column identifies the entry as a folder or a file The folder with an arrow pointing up is the link that takes you to the next higher layer in the share s folder tree Name This column identifies the names of folders and files in the share Click a file s name to open the file or save it to your computer Click a folder s name to display the folder s contents This column displays a file s size Modified Date This
203. ections A Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Force HTTPs Install System Default CA This action will install the system default C4 in the trusted CA list of your browser Stepi Download the default CA file isis ieee Step Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser Modify the Existing Certificate A Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Edit self signed CA certificate Stepl Edit the Self signed Certificate ont HA igned CA file Step3 Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser C Create a Certificate To Be Authorized By My Own Certificate Authority 2 Next let s modify the certificate by changing the Common Name to this NSA s IP address of 192 168 1 35 the Organization to Test and the Key Length to 2048 Figure 43 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate Edit the Self signed Certificate Common Mame amp Host IP Address 192 168 1 35 f Host Domain Name 15235863 Organizational UnitfOptional Max length 64 characters Organization Optional Test Max length 64 characters Country Optional Country code only such as Tw US JP etc Key Type R O Key Length 2048s Note If you choose a large key length it may take a while to make the certificate NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 The NSA restarts its
204. ed The cable for Ethernet is connected but PPPoE 222 your computer does not have an IP address Not Connected Hug aay Configure Manually i epi 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 K e Finavia s is er Jot Connected Subnet Mask AirPort oF T Router DNS Server Search Domains 802 1X WPA ZyXELO4 Connect dags Advanced 7 i Click the lock to prevent further changes Assistme Revert Apply 6 Click Apply and close the window Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties by clicking Applications gt Utilities gt Network Utilities and then selecting the appropriate Network interface from the Info tab Figure 233 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Utility Netstat AppleTalk Ping Lookup Whois Finger interface for information Hardware Address 00 30 65 25 6a b3 Sent Packets 1230 IP Address es 10 0 2 2 Send Errors 0 Link Speed 11 Mbit s Recv Packets 1197 Link Status Active Recv Errors 0 Vendor Apple Collisions 0 Model Wireless Network Adapter 802 11 fi 288 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Linux Ubuntu 8 GNOME This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the GNU Object Model Environment GNOME using the Ubuntu 8 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The followi
205. ed Automatically determined by i Content Certificate fn 10 If you are presented with another Security Warning click Yes Figure 258 Internet Explorer 7 Security Warning Security Warning You are about to install a certificate from a certification authority CA daiming to represent nsa2401 Windows cannot validate that the certificate is actually from nsa2401 You should confirm its origin by contacting nsa2401 The following number will assist you in this process Thumbprint sha 1 350 109AC DBCOES54 FE327C71 4640 1546 242E5893 Warning If you install this root certificate Windows will automatically trust any certificate issued by this CA Installing a certificate with an unconfirmed thumbprint is a security risk If you cick Yes you acknowledge this risk Do you want to install this certificate NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates 11 Finally click OK when presented with the successful certificate installation message Figure 259 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard Certificate Import Wizard a i I The import was successful 12 The next time you start Internet Explorer and go to a ZyXEL Web Configurator page a sealed padlock icon appears in the address bar Click it to view the page s Website Identification information E 3 Website Identification ay 172 20 37 202 has identified this site as 172 20 37
206. ed after the folders and files in the volume at the time of the backup To restore a folder or file to its state at the time of the snapshot open the snapshot image of the same name You can also copy or move the snapshot image to another folder outside the snapshot folder When you use a snapshot to restore files the NSA keeps intermediate snapshots between the snapshot you use and the present For example say you had the NSA take daily snapshots and on Friday you choose to use Monday s snapshot the NSA keeps the Tuesday Wednesday and Thursday snapshots Although you can continue to work while the NSA takes a snapshot it s a good idea to schedule snapshots for non peak times so not very many files are open Snapshots may get progressively slower as more are done but they are still very fast compared to backups as only block changes are recorded LES The NSA automatically purges snapshots See Snapshot Purging on page 215 for details Snapshots Versus Backups See Section 9 2 on page 200 for more information on backups 1 A snapshot only records changes to files within a volume so it s faster and takes up less space than a backup 2 You must create a snapshot of a complete volume not on a single file or folder as you can do with a backup It s a good idea to take both snapshots and backups for the following reasons 1 Snapshots may become invalid so it s good to also have backups available in case that happen
207. eds to do the following to restore them NSA 2401 User s Guide 99 Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click Protect gt Backup screen select a backup job and click Restore Archive Figure 91 Protect gt Backup Add Job Edit Job Delete Selected Iobis Status Job Name WAITING Weekly Dackup 2 Select which backup to use and click Next Figure 92 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 1 Restore Step 1 Select Restore Point Job Mame Weekly backup Job Description Backup Type Incremental Scheduler Information a Restored Time E 2008 09 08 14 35 45 every week NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select the Gonzo share and click Next Figure 93 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 2 En Restore Step Z Please select which file s folder s to restore ER H Gonzo 4 Select the original location and click Done Figure 94 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Step 3 Restore Step 3 Set a restore target and start restoring f Original Location f Other Location Sr NSA 2401 User s Guide 101 Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 The NSA restores the files into the Gonzo share When it finishes you can access the files Figure 95 Protect gt Backup gt Restore Archive Progress ee Progress Job Name Gonzo Target Path original location Volume volume Progress 100 3 7 7 Restoring by Backup Files If you deleted an archive b
208. eeeeesesaauaaseseeeeeeeessaaaasssesees 319 PG Spona MOn Cater randen 315 Figure 284 Opera 9 Install authority certificate 2 0 0 ceeeeseseeeeeeceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeauaasseeeeeessesenagssssseess 316 Figure 285 Opera 9 Install authority certificate ee 316 Pee Te PE iranin TEE E ET 317 FTP NNN 317 Figure 288 Opera 9 Certificate manager cccccccccssssssssseeeeeeececseuesseseeeeeeeesseeseaaseeeeeeeeesseenassessesess 318 Figure 289 Konqueror 3 5 Server Authentication rrrnrnnrnvvrnnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnsennnnnnnnsennnnnnnnee 319 Figure 290 Konqueror 3 5 Server Authentication cccccccccsssseeeeceeeeeeceueeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeseeeeeeeeeseaaaageees 319 Figure 291 Kongueror 3 9 KDE SSL ITAD sieicuinsainusacimrdixneesoaresiainwiarunianssonsdlnaattmieenearnieiadinananaes 319 Figure 292 Konqueror 3 5 Public Key Certificate File cccccccsseececceseceeeaeseeecseeeeeeesesseeessaaeeeseaeaes 320 Figure 293 Konqueror 3 5 Certificate Import Result rrrrrnrnrnnnnnernnnnrnnvnnrrnvnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnennnnnennnnnnen 320 EE Ge RED RER ER 320 Figure 295 Kongueror 3 5 Settings NN ene 321 Figure 296 FET GE wisssisnnseranasndneccrasecaneccanusareessxissnni lt qinenteinbiansdempixaeend Dani ENERE ENEA 321 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures 24 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables TETTE te 32 TN E A A em ee Rr ETE are Rae ec ee SET tora 32 Table 3 User level Global Labels and
209. een see Figure 133 on page 144 so you can make another 6 7 External Storage Disk Screen Use the external storage screens to manage the NSA s externally USB connected storage Connect USB devices to the NSA s USB ports Click Storage gt External Storage to open the following screen This screen provides information on disks connected to the NSA Figure 136 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk External Storage te Eject Locate Duplicate Key mr USB FLASH DRIVE 54CB 245 00 MB silicon power 0 00 3 73 GB Healthy NSA 2401 User s Guide 145 Chapter 6 Storage Screens The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 32 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk Icons Eject Select a USB connected device and click this icon to be able to remove the device Eject Disk re you sure you want to eject this disk Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect LAPPIY Cancel Locate Select a USB connected device and click this icon to have the device s LED flash so you can identify it Duplicate Key Connect a USB key device and another USB device to the NSA and click this to create a copy of the key Select the USB key device as the Source USB Connect another USB device and select it as the Destination USB Create a Duplicate USB Key Source Target Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the h
210. eeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeesaees 216 Fe 181 FOR gt NTN AND ioiei AE neon 218 Figure 182 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images ccseeeecccseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeueeeeeauseeeessaaesessaaees 219 Figure 193 Froteci gt Backup EE gt EE EE 221 FT PEN vr 224 gre eee a ERE ER 225 Figure 186 Applications gt Pint NE persisiran a Ea EEEE EEE EN EAREN 226 Figure 187 Applications gt Print Server gt Rename _ cccccseeecceseeeeceeeeeceseeeeceseeseasesecaueeeseeeeenaseeees 226 Figure 188 Applications gt Copy Button rrrrrerrrrrnnnnrorvrrrnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnnrrenrnnnnnnssrnnnnnnnssennnnnnnssesennnnnnnnsnee 227 Figure 189 Applications ry Bulon SET Leed 228 MERE EEE aita dnai roike iren itsin 230 Figure 191 Maintenance pnt aces santas atc r ame ME 231 Figure 192 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Classes r iid eeisieaeactimdeera hihi 231 Figure 193 Maintenance gt Log gt Search Filters sii cccsceccscuveiesceddccsstteusectsddenedscteuenediwssseaseceiicreieedaadendons 232 Figure 194 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Log Records Configuration rrrrrrrnnnrrnnnnnrnnnvvnnnnnnnnnn 232 Figure 195 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Buzzer Priority cccccssececeseeeeeeseeeceeseeseeseeseeeeeees 233 Figure 196 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Mail Setting rrrrrrnnnrrnnnnnnnrrnnvvvnnnnnnnnnn 234 Figure 197 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Repor
211. eeseeeeessaaaseeeeesenaseees 306 Figure 265 Internet Explorer 7 Certificates ooscceti ecesascetbleceneccagiassescexinddeuaeceiciatesanceiadcbaqeabiadsnacevieaieeaecteld 307 Figure 266 Internet Explorer 7 Certificates rrrrrrrrnnnrrrrrrrrnnnrnrrvrrrnnnnnrvnrrnnnnnnennnnnnnnneennnnnnnnnsennnnnnnssee 307 Figure 267 Internet Explorer 7 Root Certificate Store r rrnrnernnannavnnnnnnvrnvnnnnvennnnnernnnnnnenennnnsrnnnnnueenenne 307 Figure 268 Firefox 2 Website Certified by an Unknown Authority cccccccesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 308 PU Nr 308 ge Fl EEE EE 309 TET PG EEE EE 309 Figure 272 Firefox 2 Certificate Manager ccsssssssecceecceeeseeseeeeeeeeeesauaeeseeeeeeeesesaaaeeeeeeeeeessaaaseeeess 310 PN FN EF eee 310 Figure 274 Firefox 2 Tools Menu rrrnannnnennnnnvnnnnnnnenennnnnrnnnnnnennennnnenennnnnennnnnnnsnennnnernnnnnnnenennnnsennnnnnuenennen 311 FOUG e S PE Ge RE EEE ER 311 Figure 276 Firefox 2 Certificate Manager rrrrnnrnrrrrrnnnnnrovrrnnnnnnrnnrrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnssennnnnnsnssrnnnnnsnsssnnnnnnnnsnee 312 Figure 277 Firefox 2 Delete Web Site Certificates rrrrrrrrrrrnnnrrrrnnnnrrrrrannnrrnnnnnrnnrnnnnrrnnnnnnrrnrnnnsennnnnnn 312 Figure 2 5 Opera 9 NE signer Not TOUTO Luske de eek bedbiebaesekdenkne 313 Fig re 279 Opera 9 0 EE EEE als EEE LE Eh EE EEE 314 Figure 26 EG 0 eg RE ERE gE a riai 314 Figure 282 Opera 9 Certificate manager cccccccccccssssesseeeeeeeeeeenaueaaseeec
212. eives a certificate request from a website operator they confirm that the web domain and contact information in the request match those on public record with a domain name registrar If they match then the certificate is issued to the website operator who then places it on the site to be issued to all visiting web browsers to let them know that the site is legitimate Many ZyXEL products such as the NSA 2401 issue their own public key certificates These can be used by web browsers on a LAN or WAN to verify that they are in fact connecting to the legitimate device and not one masquerading as it However because the certificates were not issued by one of the several organizations officially recognized by the most common web browsers you will need to import the ZyXEL created certificate into your web browser and flag that certificate as a trusted authority You can see if you are browsing on a secure website if the URL in your web browser s address bar begins with https or there is a sealed padlock icon 44 somewhere in the main browser window not all browsers show the padlock in the same location In this appendix you can import a public key certificate for e Internet Explorer on page 300 e Firefox on page 308 e Opera on page 313 e Konqueror on page 319 NSA 2401 User s Guide 299 Appendix C Importing Certificates Internet Explorer The following example uses Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 on Windows XP Professional
213. el for the share You can assign users and groups an authority level by selecting them and clicking the right arrow Full Assign users and groups one of the following authority levels Read Only Full Grants read write privileges Den Read Only Grants read only privileges files and folders cannot be eny mp modified moved or removed Deny Removes all privileges files and folders cannot be read modified moved or removed You can remove users from any given authority level by selecting them and clicking the left arrow Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window 8 4 2 3 EVERYONE amp ANONYMOUS Share Access Rights With an EVERYONE access right you still need to log in Every local user with an account on the NSA can access this share using their username and password Users with accounts on a domain server cannot access shares with EVERYONE access rights EVERYONE has every local user as a member It does NOT include domain users With ANONYMOUS FTP you must enter either anonymous or ftp as the user name Any other name is considered a user name so must be valid and have a corresponding correct password LES If you are already logged into a share using your username and password you will NOT be able to access a share that has ANONYMOUS FTP only access rights as these require no login If this is not your intention it is recommended you set EVERYONE AND ANONY
214. enforceable such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable This License shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California with venue lying in Santa Clara County California with the losing party responsible for costs including without limitation court costs and reasonable attorneys fees and expenses The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License 12 Responsibility for claims NSA 2401 User s Guide 347 Appendix D Open Source Licences As between Initial Developer and the Contributors each party is responsible for claims and damages arising directly or indirectly out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admiss
215. ense because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for co
216. er configuration file If you forgot the NSA password then reset the device to go back to the factory default configuration Configuration File Backup and Restoration does not affect disk arrays volumes or data your files and folders on the NSA Genie Backup Manager BS Use the Genie Backup Manager to transfer data from your computer to the NSA You could use Genie Backup Manager to back up from one NSA to another NSA but it s recommended you use the NSA Protect gt Backup to do this see Section 9 2 on page 200 as the latter would be faster The Genie Backup program uses the same network port as the NDU to discover the NSA To avoid a port conflict do not run the Genie Backup Manager at the same time as the NDU Snapshots A snapshot is a record of changes to an internal volume at a particular moment in time As it only records changes to files made in a volume it s faster and takes up less space than a backup Snapshots are good for data that changes often and needs to have high availability If files within a volume become infected or corrupted you can revert files back to their state at a snapshot You create snapshots of a complete volume not a single file or folder within a volume NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens To use a snapshot to restore files use the MyNSA screens CIFS Windows Explorer or FTP to browse to the snapshot image folder The snapshot folder contains images nam
217. eral Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version 1s given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WA
218. erent LANs Users on either LAN or connected through the Internet can back up and share data on the NSA Two USB ports let you share USB printers and use external USB hard drives for extra storage space Figure 1 NSA Overview e The NSA s SATA II Serial Advanced Technology Attachment hard disk serial links are compatible with all major hard drive manufacturers e RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks protects your data even if a hard disk fails e The snapshot and backup features let you further protect your data e The NSA offers powerful security features Use HTTPS or FTPES for secure file transfers Create encrypted volumes so an attacker who removes the physical drive still cannot read the data The NSA can also record all user access to files and folders e The NSA lets you publish or mirror files to another NSA as a backup that others can access at a branch office for example e See the specifications appendix for a more detailed list of NSA features NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NSA 1 1 1 Front Panel LEDs The front panel LEDs tell you important information about the NSA Figure 2 NSA Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the disk drive LEDs Refer to the Quick Start Guide to see how to install and remove hard drives from the disk trays Table 1 Disk Drive LEDs COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green Off The hard disk drive tray is empty or not connected properly On T
219. es a RAID 1 RAID 5 or RAID 10 array to repair it When you add a disk to a three disk RAID 5 array the NSA reshapes it into a four disk RAID 5 array Resynchronizing or reshaping an array is done block by block so the time it takes depends on the size of your hard drive s not the amount of data you have on them BS Do not restart the NSA while the NSA is re sychronizing or reshaping an array as this will cause the process to start over from the beginning again after the NSA fully reboots You can access data on a RAID array while the NSA is re sychronizing or reshaping it but it is not recommended The performance will be slower and your data is at risk until the resychronization or reshaping is complete 6 5 RAID Screen Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID to display the RAID array summary screen as shown Use this screen to manage the NSA RAID and JBOD arrays Figure 128 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID A elm 3 Wizards Create Rename Delete Repair Resync Add Disk Remove Speed Hot Spare Status Disk RAID Volume NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 25 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Icons DESCRIPTION Wizards Click this icon to open the Disk Setup Wizard to create a new disk array or volume Create If you have disk space available for a new disk array then click this icon to open a screen wher
220. es this screen Table 22 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Brief Summary LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Device Info Format Select Brief Summary to display basic information about the drive and its status Select Full Summary to display advanced details about the drive and its Status This field displays the hard drive s temperature in degrees Celsius Health This field displays a general rating of the hard drive s overall operating condition This field displays a general rating of the hard drive s overall operating speed Detail Information These fields tell you details about the hard drive such as identification information They are not indicators of the hard drive s health or performance Device Model This field displays the hard drive model number that uniquely identifies a hard drive Serial Number This field displays this individual hard drive s serial number from the manufacturer Firmware Version This field displays the version number of the hard drive s internal operating software User Capacity This field displays the hard disk s usable size ATA Version This field displays the hard disk s Advanced Technology Attachment version number ATA Standard This field displays the Advanced Technology Attachment standard the hard drive supports This field displays the local time that the hard drive is using SMART support This field displays whether or not the hard drive is SMART capable SMART
221. eshooting discovery 252 network connection test 164 protocols 260 security 260 Network Attached Storage see NAS NFS 168 share name details 170 non admin users 180 NSA Discovery Utility see NDU NSA LEDs 32 NTFS 150 O open source licences 323 Open SSL License 337 338 OpenLDAP 337 OpenLDAP Public License 337 operating humidity 260 operating temperature 260 OS X 65 P parity 151 password 36 38 46 change screen 37 changing 46 default 36 forgot 52 Patent 353 path 43 PHP License 340 ping 164 power 89 button 33 consumption 261 failure 89 244 restart 89 resume 89 244 schedule 244 power adaptor pinout 261 power management 242 hard drive sleep time 243 Index primary domain controller 258 print server 224 226 rename 226 tutorial 104 printer 31 proof of purchase 354 protect 96 197 backup 89 backup tutorial 92 snapshot 89 public key certificate 229 240 editing 240 publish 203 purge 200 PWR LED 32 troubleshooting 250 Q quota for storage 178 R RAID 31 125 132 add disk 137 background information 151 data protection 156 degraded 250 down 250 expand JBOD 137 file storage 257 four disks 134 hard drives to use 132 hot spare 137 level 139 levels 132 migrating 110 one disk 133 quick comparison 132 RAID 0 153 RAID 10 154 RAID 5 155 RAID 5 spare 155 remove 136 reshape 137 reshaping 107 resync speed 137 resynching 250 resynchronizing 135 status 134 de
222. etwork And Internet Gr t Control Panel Network and Internet p se Fore PI File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home Mi kid and Shuang Center System and Maintenance a Konnect to a network View network computers and devices Add adevicetothenetwork Set up file sharing security Network and Internet n Internet Options Connectto theInternet Changeyourhomepage Manage browser add ons Programs Delete browsing history and cookies Hardware and Sound NSA 2401 User s Guide 279 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 4 Click Manage network connections Figure 219 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center Gr ue Network and Internet p Network and Sharing Center File Edit View Tools Help Network and Sharing Center View computers and devices Connect to a network Set up a ranna chan ar network 4 J j j z hjel Manage network connections TWPC99111 Internet Diagnose ana repair This computer a Not connected 5 Right click Local Area Connection and then select Properties Figure 220 Windows Vista Network and Sharing Center LAN or High Seeed Internet i 4 Collapse group Left Arror Expand all groups Collapse all groups Disable Status Diagnose Bridge Connections Create shortcut Delete Rename Ka Properties 5 mm LS During this procedure click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permiss
223. f and 2 the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version or portions of such combination the licenses granted in Sections 2 2 a and 2 2 b are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code Notwithstanding Section 2 2 b above no patent license is granted 1 for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version 2 separate from the Contributor Version 3 for infringements caused by 1 third party modifications of Contributor Version or 11 the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software except as part of the Contributor Version or other devices or 4 under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor 3 Distribution Obligations 3 1 Application of License The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License including without limitation Section 2 2 The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6 1 and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients rights hereunder However You may include an additional document of
224. f snapshots per volume A snapshot failure dues to low disk space for example generates a critical log If you enable the mail log feature and set the level to critical log the NSA sends an e mail alert Click Protect gt Snapshot in the Navigation panel to display the following screen Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Figure 180 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs Snapshot tr O Fa amp Addlob Snapshot Edit Job Take Delete Image Snapshot Selected ACCESS Now Jobis Snapshot Jobs 8 napshot Images ni ge Hourly example volume Hourly de WAITING 00 216 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 83 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Jobs Icons DESCRIPTION Add Job Click this icon to create a new snapshot job see also Section 9 2 3 on page 208 Snapshot Image Access Click this icon to open a screen where you can define where the NSA stores the snapshot images which also determines who can access them Snapshot Image Acce Te allow Only Admin C By Share Permission Allow Only Admin Store all snapshots for all of a disk array s volumes in a single snapshots system share Only the administrator can access the snapshots share by default The administrator can change the snapshot share s share permissions By Sh
225. fering the additional rights described in Section 3 5 3 2 Availability of Source Code NSA 2401 User s Guide 343 Appendix D Open Source Licences Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism must remain available for at least twelve 12 months after the date it initially became available or at least six 6 months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party 3 3 Description of Modifications You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived directly or indirectly from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in a the Source Code and b in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code 3 4 Inte
226. formance hard disk capacity usage with data protection in case of disk failure See Section 6 4 on page 132 and Section 6 9 on page 151 for more information on storage systems Disk Name Select which disks should make up this RAID array A disk can only belong to one RAID array RAID Label Specify a name to identify the RAID array Use 1 to 31 characters To avoid confusion it is highly recommended that each RAID use a unique name Acceptable characters are all alohanumeric characters A Z 0 9 and spaces dashes underscores and periods The first character must be alphanumeric The last character cannot be a space Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA Cancel Click this button to discard your changes and close this screen 6 6 Internal Volume Screen Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume to display the internal volume summary screen as shown Use this screen to manage the NSA s internal volumes The NSA has the following classifications for the status of a volume e Healthy if the volume is OK and the file system is functioning properly e Unlocked when the NSA allows access to an encrypted volume e Locked when the NSA blocks access to an encrypted volume When a volume is locked you the administrator can enter the password or insert the USB key whichever you used to encrypt it to unlock the volume Down when a volume is down and cannot be fixed The volume
227. from lt http www php net gt THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PHP DEVELOPMENT TEAM OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the PHP Group The PHP Group can be contacted via E mail at group php net For more information on the PHP Group and the PHP project please see lt http www php net gt This product includes the Zend Engine freely available at lt http www zend com gt The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRING
228. fter a power failure before the NSA turns on Apply Click this to save your changes in this section Power On Off Schedule Enable Power Control Select this option to have the NSA turn itself off and on or reboot Schedule according to the schedules you configure Click Edit to go to the screen where you can configure the power control schedules Apply Click this to save your changes in this section 11 6 1 Power Control Schedule Click Maintenance gt Power Management gt Edit to open this screen where you can configure power control schedules to have the NSA turn on turn off or reboot at specified times Figure 206 Maintenance gt Power Management gt Edit Power Control Schedule List Frequency Execute Time Actions Er Note You must click on the apply button for your power control schedule settings to apply Add Power Control Shceduler Type Reboot Frequency Monthly Execute Time hh mm 0 sfo Please select the day Day of the month C First gt Monday 244 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 107 Maintenance gt Power Management gt Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Power Control Schedule This table lists the power on power off and reboot schedules For List example you could have one schedule to turn the NSA on every morning at 8 00 another schedule to turn it off every eveni
229. ftware FTP Print Server Copy Button Log Configuration SSL Fw Upgrade Power Managemen Shutdown Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Languace Ee PET AP Fy System Resource System Information cPpUUsage D iiS o Server Name intern CPU Sanne Model Name NS4 2401 Temperature Ss 122 F FUTOWSES V1 00 AFF 0 b5 Version FAN Speed 1876RPM 2167RPM 00 19 CB B9 FF 45 MAC Address BAe Gs E n Memory 14 Used 00 19 CB B9 FF 44 Usage 36MB 256MB FTP Server Enabled Status UPS N A ERR AR amp volume Status Internal Yolume mo Healthy 3 SSS 4 30 ne jbodD1 volumet Normal Used o Healthy i 74 50 GBTotal 28 50 36 48 GB Total 00 Ho GBFree External Yolume EUSB FLASH MB Used DRIVE 34CB1 aoe 244 98 MB Total 77 Free Healthy Active Sessions Connected at IPAddress _ 2008 09 09 13 39 30 192 168 1 33 Message 2 6 1 Global Administration Icons The icons and language label at the top right of the screen 11 are visible from most of the administration screens The following table describes the global icons and labels Table 13 Global Labels and Icons LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Select the Web Configurator language from the drop down list box Help Click this icon to open a web help page specific to the screen you are currently configuring About Click this icon to view the model name firmware version and copyright Wizards Click t
230. g negligence contract or otherwise shall you the initial developer any other contributor or any distributor of covered code or any supplier of any of such parties be liable to any person for any indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character including without limitation damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such party shall have been informed of the possibility of such damages This limitation of liability shall not apply to lability for death or personal injury resulting from such party s negligence to the extent applicable law prohibits such limitation Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so this exclusion and limitation may not apply to you 10 U S government end users The Covered Code is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 11 Miscellaneous This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any provision of this License is held to be un
231. g table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Maintenance gt SSL LABEL DESCRIPTION Force HT TPs Select the Force HTTPs option to turn on the NSA s web browser security Anyone who connects via HTTPS to the NSA must install the public key certificate associated with it The NSA displays a warning screen if applying your change may disconnect some users Click Apply if you want to continue The following users are currently connected If you decide to continue they may be disconnected s Share pceenan isar Web admin 192 168 1 33 Gonzo Gonzo 192 168 1 33 Performing this operation vill cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Install System Default CA Click Download button to save a copy of the NSA S public key certificate to your local computer This is useful for installing the certificate without having to connect to the NSA or for sending by email to other users for them to install prior to logging into the NSA for the first time After saving the certificate to your computer double click it to install it Note Each web browser handles certificate installation differently See Appendix C on page 299 for more information Modify the Existing Select Edit a self signed CA certificate then follow the on screen Certificate instructions for creating a public key certificate signed by the NSA as the local certificate authority Note Use certificates created and signed by the NSA if the devic
232. ge Snapshot Image Name Image 0 to Increase Freespace Snapshot CRIT The following snapshot is Snapshot Size invalid 0 Its snapshot size is name 1 MB Storage INFO Disk 0 is plugged Disk Storage INFO Disk 0 is unplugged Disk Storage INFO An external Mass Storage Disk device is plugged Storage INFO An external Mass Storage Disk device is unplugged Storage INFO Create RAID raid label 0 RAID Success Storage INFO Relabel RAID Success RAID Storage INFO Delete RAID Success RAID Storage INFO Start Repairing Degraded Raid RAID Success Storage INFO Modify Rebuild Priority to high RAID normal low Success Storage INFO Reshape Raid5 by Adding Disk Slog ID RAID disk 0 Success Storage INFO Add Hot Spare disk 0 to Raid Disk Slog ID RAID Success Storage INFO Remove Hot Spare disk 0 from Disk Slog ID RAID Raid Success Storage CRIT Create RAID raid label 0 RAID FAILED Storage CRIT Relabel RAID FAILED RAID Storage CRIT Delete RAID FAILED RAID 268 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S Storage CRIT Start Repairing Degraded Raid RAID FAILED Storage CRIT Modify Rebuild Priority to high RAID normal low FAILED Storage CRIT Reshape Raid5 by Adding Disk Slog ID RAID disk 0 FAILED Storage CRIT Add Hot Spare disk 0 to Raid Disk Slog ID RAID FAILED Storage CRIT Rem
233. gin This is the rate of the magnetic heads seek errors A failure in the mechanical positioning system such as servo damage or a thermal widening of the disk results in seek errors An increasing number of seek errors indicate the condition of the disk surface and the mechanical subsystem are worsening Seek Time i This is an average performance indicator for the seek operations Performance of the magnetic heads Mechanical subsystem problems cause this value to decrease Power On Hours This is how many hours the hard drive has been in a power on POH state The raw value lists the total number of hours or minutes or seconds depending on the manufacturer Spin Retry Count This is the total number of spin start retry attempts This is the number of attempts to spin up to fully operational speed the hard drive has made when the first attempt did not succeed An increase in this value is an indicator of hard disk mechanical subsystem problems 10 1 Retries first attempt did not succeed A decrease in this value is an indicator of hard disk mechanical subsystem problems 156 NSA 2401 User s Guide Recalibration i This is the number of times recalibration was requested when the Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 42 S M A R T Attributes continued ATTRIBUTE NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION This is the number of times the hard drive has gone through a full power on and power off This is the number of uncorrected read errors
234. graded 134 NSA 2401 User s Guide 359 Index down 135 healthy 134 summary 135 three disks 134 two disks 133 recycle bin 194 Redundant Array of Independent Disks see RAID ReiserFS 150 related documentation 3 repair 126 replacing disks 128 reset button 257 procedure 52 reset defaults 52 reshape 137 reshaping 107 restart 246 restoring by backup files 212 by backup files tutorial 102 by backup job 209 by backup job tutorial 99 files 99 restricted file 190 file example 88 folder 190 restrictions on folder names 45 on replacing disks 128 on share names 45 on volume names 45 resync speed 137 resynching 134 250 resynchronizing a RAID 135 rights 353 S S M A R T 129 attributes 156 safety warnings 6 SATA 31 257 scan external volume 147 internal volume 140 screen links 49 summary 49 50 secure connections 75 security 68 Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology see S M A R T Serial Advanced Technology Attachment see SATA server name 119 share 38 174 access 44 83 189 193 anonymous access 193 browsing 40 changing properties 43 configuration 42 conflicting access settings 175 everyone access 193 file path 43 list 186 management details 39 name details 44 name restrictions 45 paths 46 190 recycle bin 194 troubleshooting local user access 253 tutorial 59 shared folder 38 sharing 55 shut down procedure 33 shutdown 245 sleep time 243 smb 68 snapshot 89 174
235. groups See Section 8 3 on page 182 for details e Create and manage shares See Section 8 4 on page 186 for details 8 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Sharing Screens Local User Group A local user or group is one created on the NSA when the NSA is in workgroup mode A workgroup is a collection of computers on a Windows network that can share files printers Internet access and so on Domain User Group A domain user or group is created on a centralized Windows based domain controller This list is used by the NSA when authenticating accounts and or groups that seek access to a share If a user belongs to different groups with different access rights to the same share then the more restrictive access right applies That is deny access overrides read access and read write access For example let s say that user Joe belongs to the Sales group He has read access to the MIS share The Sales group is denied access to the MIS share however Therefore Joe is also denied access to it due to the fact that he s in a more restrictive group LES More restrictive access rights override less restrictive ones In Conflict A user account is in conflict when the account name that exists on a network attached storage device also exists on the domain controller See Section 8 2 0 1 on page 177 for more NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Share A share is a set of access permissions mapped to a specific f
236. gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy rrrrrnnnnrvrnnnnrvrvnnnnnevnnnnnrennnnn 86 Figure 72 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy gt Set ACL eee 87 Figure 73 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy ccccccceccseseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeaes 88 Figure 74 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL gt Strategy ccccccsseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 88 Figure 75 Maintenance gt Power Management mrannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssennnnnennnnnnnnnnsennnnsvennnn 89 Eee ES EEE ENER EG 90 Figure 77 Protect SN AL cescnssoctiwavnsersiesoviesiassisorsoscias sec raastseericsteecp eens ese 91 Figure 78 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Image ACCESS rrrnrnnrrnvannvnvnnnrnnnnnrrnnnnsrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnsrnnnnnennnn 91 Figure 7o omoa ere EA 92 MSN FE are een 92 Foure GT Protect gt Backup gt 0 JOD Step EEE 93 18 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures Figures PORN gt Backup a cl Jarra pen 94 Figure 83 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 secccsctisstcceceicinnsncsictensmectivedenanariciccibactitinsiensdeGrseracaeemereias 95 Figure 84 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step J sninccossnssevsaersnonunssuiannennceovereninaadsdoantncevexevesbenaieeieapensoxereres 95 Figure 85 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 Leiden 96 Figure 86 Protect gt Backup sesisissisianiedtssnsatadisrantanterdscianioniciercaubissanisaladd
237. gure the NSA to delete old backups e Keep All Old Backups Purge is in effect disabled Select this if backup space is not a concern Keep Only __ backups All backup files older than the last one are deleted You will not be able to recover files that existed only in those previous backups Select this if backup space is limited and recovery of old files is not important Keep Backups for _ day s Backups older than the number of days you enter here are deleted 0 days means that all old backups are deleted when a new one is done Click this button to proceed 9 2 3 1 Editing a Backup Job Step 2 Figure 172 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 2 Edit Step 2 Scheduler Settings Backup Frequency Monthly t Start Time hh mm jo a jo Step 1 Please select the monthis of a year E January February E March April E May June E July August E September E October E November December Step 2 Please select the day of the month C Day of the month ThelFirst Monday Elof the month previous dene The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 75 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Frequency Select how often the job should run Hourly Daily Weekly or Monthly Enter the time day and or month as appropriate for your selection above Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to save your changes back to the N
238. hares gt Add Share dit Share Share Name Kermit volume volumet 111 76 GE J Make This Share Kermit m Owned By cull Enable This Share Ed Enable Action Log Enable Recycle bin kd Share Access Advanced w ADEN Now that you have created Kermit s share you can go through the steps again to create another share for Gonzo For Gonzo s share set the Share Access to Keep it private to owner 3 3 How to Use Shares Here is how people use the shares you have created In this example Gonzo creates a folder named Strategy and puts files named 2009 Plan doc and 2010 2014 Plans doc into it 3 3 1 Using a Share with Windows Explorer Gonzo wants to use his share from his computer at the office 1 Open Windows explorer and click Tools gt Map Network Drive to open the Map Network Drive screen 2 Inthe Folder field enter two backslashes followed by the IP address of the NSA 192 168 1 35 another backslash and the name of the share Gonzo and click Finish Figure 28 Mapping a Share Map Network Drive l X Windows can help you connect to a shared network Folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the Folder using My Computer Specify the drive letter For the connection and the Folder that you want to connect to Drive fH Folder 11192 168 1 351G0nzo Browse Example Vserverlshare Connect using different user name Create shortcut to We
239. he NSA creates automatic volume names for external USB disk volumes These are a type of share so the share name you configure cannot conflict with the external USB disk volume names ExtVol1 or ExtVol2 are examples of external USB disk volume names Folder names must be unique they cannot be the same as other folder names The minimum character length of a name is one character that is a name cannot be blank The maximum character length of share name is 255 characters Unicode is supported for share names although your FTP client must support UTF 8 Full support should be available in all Windows versions after Windows 2000 2 5 6 Share Paths A share path is the full path to a folder on a volume that will be shared for example mynsa topsecret ugs This is independent from a share name which is the name shown for this share when accessing the share via CIFS or FTP The path should start with a forward slash followed by a parent folder child folders leading to the folder that is to be shared 2 5 7 Password Screen Click Password to open the following screen Use this screen to change an account s password Enter a new password and confirm it by re entering it Figure 14 Password EL OT SLOT aye New Password m F APPIance i Password Confirm te My NSA Password Administration Modify Password Account Name Old Password Er Er Caution Please keep
240. he hard disk drive is connected properly to the NSA Blinking The NSA is reading data from the hard disk drive or writing data to it Off The hard disk drive is working properly if connected On The hard disk drive has a problem is not installed or you have used the Web Configurator to eject it shut it down Blinking The NSA is resynching or reshaping the hard disk drive The following table describes the LEDs related to the NSA itself lt gt The SYS LED blinks orange when firmware is being uploaded to the NSA Do not turn off or reset the NSA while the firmware update is in progress Table 2 NSALEDs COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION Green Off The NSA is turned off The NSA is turned on and receiving power NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NSA Table 2 NSA LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION SYS sams pe NSA has passed system tests JE The NSA is starting up or shutting down Quick blinking indicates a RAID array is in degraded mode Orange The NSA is unlocking an encrypted volume or there are no volumes in the NSA Blinking Firmware is being uploaded to the NSA The NSA has fully booted and is operating normally LAN1 LAN2 Green Off The LAN is not connected JED NSA has a successful 10 100 Mbps Ethernet connection Blinking The 100M LAN is sending or receiving packets Orange The NSA has a successful 1000 Mbps Ethernet connection Bli
241. he paa 218 NNN GG me 219 14 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents ee EE ERE RE RE EE 220 Chapter 10 re er eg eg EAA 223 Net APATIIT PEET E AIE A ERPAT 223 10 1 1 What You Can Do In The Application Screens rrrrrannrnnrnnnnrenvrnnnrvvrnnnnrrnnrnnnnennnnnre 223 10 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Application Screens cccceeecceeeeeeeeeee eens 223 VET 224 ER ET EEE ENE SE 226 NTP NNN 226 TN 227 10 4 1 Changing the Copy Button Share sanere skrekk 227 Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Lammssmmsnssnmksennmmibadddkuvkukenunekdlkdiinnkneke nd 229 NI NNN 229 11 1 1 What You Can Do In The Maintenance Screens rrrnnrrnnnnnrvvvnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnne 229 11 1 2 What You Need to Know About The Maintenance Screens rrrrrnnnrvrrnnnnrrnnnnnnennnnn 229 EE RER EE EE EE NE EEE 230 EE TT NN NE NE 232 11 2 2 Log Records Configuration ccccccssssesccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeessaaeseeees 232 11 2 3 LE PN MN sessen 233 REE Ne EET GE EE T E 233 TT PN 236 EE pe RE SR EE ET SETE 237 11 3 1 Restoring the Configuration File sette 238 EE ER ERE EEE ER 239 Ge En EE 241 11 6 Power Management jeiicinesnicsecesiarssivescntaesvnabievesavendteneneenssuiceaseatiedensenenecnsaeeeiaiseusnebiatenecren 242 ETP NTN 244 EE 00 EEE EE 245 Part Ill Troubleshooting and SpecificationS rwranurrnannvrnnnnvvnnnnunen 247 Chapter 12 TN TV 249 12 1 Troubleshooting Overview 2 2 ccccccssesccccseeeeeceeee
242. he remote NSA s IP address user name password and share name Internal or External Select this to restore files from another volume on the NSA or a USB Volume connected device Specify the share name you can browse for it Click this button to proceed NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 3 1 Protect gt Restore Step 2 Figure 177 Protect gt Restore Step 2 Restore Step Z Select Restore Point an recycle Restored Time 2008 09 08 14 35 45 2008 09 08 14 37 28 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 Protect gt Restore Step 2 Select Restore Point Select to which backup job and backup time you want to return The NSA restores the files included in the backup archive Files not in the backup archive are not modified Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this button to proceed NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 3 2 Protect gt Restore Step 3 Figure 178 Protect gt Restore Step 3 eee Restore Step 3 Please select which file s folder s to restore Folder Chooser Selected Folder EH 4 Gonzo Gonzo Planningz H recycle Gonzo Strategy El Planning G 2010 2014 Plans doc EG 2009 Plan doc Strategy Previous Hest The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 Protect gt Restore Step 3 LABEL DESCRIPTION Folder Chooser Select the folders you want to restor
243. he same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it 1s irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish t
244. help 48 home 49 357 Index logout 38 49 user 52 web help 38 idle timeout 225 hard drive 243 in conflict 173 internal file system 174 hard drives 39 IP address default 36 J JavaScript 35 JBOD 132 152 expand 137 jumbo frames 160 161 164 L LAN LEDs 33 troubleshooting 251 LAN1 36 LAN2 36 language 48 leave domain 168 LEDs disk drive 32 front panel 32 NSA 32 troubleshooting 249 Leopard 65 liability 353 license 353 agreement 349 links to screens 49 Linux 31 local group 173 user 173 locate 146 lock 141 148 external volume 148 locked volumes 126 log 230 buzzer priority 233 classes 231 237 CSV 236 export 236 records configuration 232 report configuration 233 search 232 severity 237 logging monitoring 261 logical volume 174 manager 174 login troubleshooting 252 username 36 logout automatic 37 icon 38 49 Mac 65 MAC address 119 management session timeout 37 managing files 40 shares 43 mapping a share 61 mapping shares 61 MDI MDI X 257 message text box 51 Microsoft Excel 236 migrating a RAID 110 mirror 203 mirroring 151 MIT License 348 mode domain 177 workgroup 177 model name 48 119 moving share contents 42 Mozilla Public License 341 My NSA 38 changing share properties screen 43 management overview screens 42 screens 37 38 tutorial 63 My Own Shares 39 N name details 44 358 NSA 2401 User s Guide NAS 174 navigation panel 49 NDU 35 troubl
245. her NSA s Backups share can be used directly by anyone with access to that share 3 7 5 Creating an Archive Backup To backup the NSA every week to a remote NSA 1 Click Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Figure 86 Protect gt Backup Backup Status gt Os ie ge pA 7 gt Add Job Edit Job Delete Execute Restore Abort Job Date Time Selected Job Now Archive Jobis Internal Storage External Storage Currently there are no jobs TCP IP Windows CIFS HFS Users Groups Chares Backup NeEs OE 96 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Identify the backup job and select Archive New files are often added to the shares that you need to back up and existing files are not frequently changed so select Incremental The NSA does a full backup first and later only copies source files that are new and or modified since the last backup This example sets the NSA to do another full backup after every four incremental backups Figure 87 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 1 Add anew backup Job Step 1 Job Information Job Mame weekly backup Job Description Backup Type archive Full Incremental Perform full backup job after 4 Increments Max 30 c Synchronization NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Select the volumel check box to select all the folders and files Select Remote and enter the other NSA s address username pass
246. her Windows shares Since DFS is a logical mapping the physical location of data becomes transparent to your users and applications You can use DFS links when accessing the NSA using CIFS not FTP Figure 165 Sharing gt Shares gt DFS DES Links DFS Root shugs207 pa ene ee Name d l shug2000 172 23 57 202 remote shug delete this link Note You must click on apply button if you add or delete a DFS link Add DFS Links Link Name Remote Server IP Remote Share Name 1194 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 Sharing gt Shares gt DFS LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Name Enter a name for the new DFS link The text may consist of letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard Remote Server IP Enter the remote server s IP address Remote Share Name Enter a name for the new remote share The text may consist of letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard Add Link Click this button to add the information in Add DFS Links to the list Delete This Link Click this button to permanently remove the associated DFS link Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window NSA 2401 User s Guide 195 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 196 NSA 2401 User s Guide Protect Screens 9 1 Protection Method
247. here exists a domain group with the name BOB you cannot create a local group named bob If you enter a group bob but use BOB when connecting via CIFS or FTP it will use the account settings used for bob The group name cannot be EVERYONE nor be the same as an existing local or domain group Other reserved group names that are not allowed are e daemon e disk e ftp e nobody Ip root e tty utm NSA 2401 User s Guide 185 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 8 4 Shares Click Sharing gt Shares to open this screen where you can create and manage shares Figure 158 Sharing gt Shares 5 hares BIER Add Share Recycle Edit Share AZL Delete Share Bin Properties Share Browser user create volumel Bob private user create volurne1 Bill private user create volumei Jinm private user create volumel Fred private user create volurel Sales private user create volurel Sue private user create volumel Jeff private user create volurel nfs private built in snapshots snapshots advanced The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 56 Sharing gt Shares Icons Add Share Click this icon to open the Add Share screen where you can create new shares See Section 8 4 1 on page 188 for details Recycle Bin Click this icon to open the Recycle Bin Configuration screen See Section 8 4 3 on page 194 for details Change Share Properties Select a share from the list then click this icon to edi
248. hey enable data transfer with less overhead The bigger the frame the better the network performance Windows CIFS Common Internet File System CIFS is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems in order to share files across the network CIFS runs over TCP IP but uses the SMB Server Message Block protocol found in Microsoft Windows for file and printer access therefore CIFS will allow all applications not just Web browsers to open and share files across the Internet NFS NFS Network File System is a protocol most commonly used on Unix like systems in order to share files across the network 7 2 TCP IP Screen Teaming Mode Here are the teaming mode settings the NSA s two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces can use Stand Alone LANI and LAN2 each use a unique IP address These IP addresses are independent of each other Figure 139 Stand Alone Teaming Mode Fault Tolerance LAN2 serves as a backup fail over for the LAN1 Both Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are connected to the same subnet There is one IP address If LAN1 loses its connection LAN takes over LAN I s IP address and traffic 160 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens Figure 140 Fault Tolerance Teaming Mode Load Balancing This distributes the traffic load across LAN and LAN2 LAN and LAN2 are on the same subnet with the same IP address It also includes backup functionality fault tolerance Figure 141 Load Balancing Teaming
249. hich you want the logs e mailed This is the address that appears in the e mail s From field Email Server Enter the SMTP server the NSA will use to send the e mail Email Format Select whether to send e mails as HTML or as plain text Use SMTP Check this option if your SMTP mail server requires authentication in order to send Authentication e mails If so then you must also fill in the Account and Password fields User Enter the account name with which you log into your SMTP mail server Password Enter the password for the account name with which you log into your SMTP mail server Password Re enter the password for the account name with which you log into your SMTP Confirm mail server to ensure you have entered it correctly After applying Select this to have the NSA send an e mail so you can may sure the settings are settings Senda correct and the NSA s sending of e mail is working properly test email Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 2 4 2 Report Setting This screen lets you configure which types of logs are e mailed during alerts and reports 234 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 197 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Report Setting Log Report Configuration ey a Eraill Settini Email Alert P E C LJ LI LJ C E L C Alert Email Report Report Time weekly Sy Sunday at 0 hou
250. his icon to open a sub menu of wizard s NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 13 Global Labels and Icons LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Home Click this icon to return to the user level My NSA screens si Logout Click this icon at any time to exit the Web Configurator This is the same as clicking the Logout link at the bottom of the Navigation panel 2 6 2 Navigation Panel The navigation panel on the left of the Web Configurator screens 2 contains screen links Click a minus link to hide a category s screen links Certain screens also contain hyper links that allow you to jump to another screen Click the Status icon to open the Status screen Figure 16 Navigation Panel Links Status F Date Time Internal Storage External Storage TCP IP Windows CIFS NFS Users Groups Shares Backup Restore Snapshot Backup Software FIP Print Server Copy Button Log Configuration SSL Fw Upgrade Power Managemen Shutdown NSA 2401 User s Guide 49 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the navigation panel links Table 14 Screens Summary CATEGORY SUB LINK FUNCTION Status This screen shows system information the status of the volumes and the users who are currently using the NSA System Setting Date Time Choose a time zone and or allow the NSA to synchronize with a time server Storage Internal View
251. however they can also apply to Internet Explorer on Windows Vista 1 If your device s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification then the first time you browse to it you are presented with a certification error Figure 249 Internet Explorer 7 Certification Error ir ake E Certificate Error Navigation Blocked There is problem with this website s security certificate The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted certificate authority The security certificate presented by this website was issued for a different website s address Security certificate problems may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage and do not continue to this website Click here to close this webpage Continue to this website not recommended More information 2 Click Continue to this website not recommended Figure 250 Internet Explorer 7 Certification Error amp Continue to this website not recommended 3 Inthe Address Bar click Certificate Error gt View certificates Figure 251 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Error ov b l Certificate Error RJ Certificate invalid The security certificate presented by this website has errors This problem may indicate an attempt to fool you or intercept any data you send to the server We recommend that you close this webpage About certific
252. hts under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to
253. i 49 KE TT 0 EN EEE EE 51 2 6 4 Status Messages aiainciinincaiaticiseeniciucactniacssinnaladisisaidebinnssiadenitsnenabstiadcehabduemasialiadeeeraseds 51 NN NNN eske 51 Fe eer tee EY aN STETA 52 EE NE NE i E E AN ARR A E EN E ee 52 2 7 2 Reload Factory Default Configuration File vasseemimmomnenvaresmnmdmken enet 52 Chapter 3 PE A EEE E E E AET EE EN A TE 55 BEE REE EE EE E A ANE EEE A 55 Lg EGP ea EE pees dared EE RE 55 3 2 1 SV User AN ic tacrcncaicieressadsireperaansitapanecisneyeshedsaveiakiensinaysnaclenepesnosastanscneasi 55 ERE AE 9 2 a E ee Meer eee eee Meee S 58 NN Nebe 59 NTN NN 61 3 3 1 Using a Share with Windows Explorer rrrrnrrnnnnnnorvnnnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnnrnvnnnnnnnssennnnnnnnnennnnnnn 61 3 3 2 Using a Share with a Web Browser rrranrnrvrrnnnnrnnnnnnnrvnnnnnrrnnnnnnnennnnnnrrnrnnnsrnnnnnsnsennnnn 62 3 4 How to Find the NSA in OS X rrrannnrnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnsennnnnennnnnsnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnsennnnnennnnnennnnnsen 65 NNN keen 68 3 5 1 Configuring Security for Web Configurator Sessions rrrrrrrrnnrrrvrnnnnrrnrrnnnrenrnnnsrrnnnnn 68 3 5 2 Using PIPES NN to the NSA ee 81 3 5 3 Controlling Access to Shares Folders and Files ccccccccceccesseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeaees 83 PT E E N 89 3 7 Fow to Use Backups and SACI veken 89 NNN 90 3 7 2 Configuring Snapshot Image ACCESS ccccccccsseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeseaeaeeeeeeeseaaeeeees 91 3 7 3 Using Snapshot Image to Restore Files sc
254. ibrary complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 328 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section I above
255. ield and then click Apply Get from Time Server Select this to have the NSA get the time and date from the time server you select in the Time Server Address field Time Server Address Select a time server from the drop down list box Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Synchronize Now Click this button for the NSA to retrieve the correct time from the configured time server right away Choose the NSA s time zone Enable Daylight Saving Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to gain more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving The hour field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would use March Second Sunday at 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select March Last Sunday The time you specify depends on your time zon
256. iew the NSA system logs and configure where to send log and report emails Configuration Manage the NSA configuration file SSL Configure HTTPS and the NSA s SSL certificate F W Upgrade Upload new firmware to your NSA Power Set the hard drive sleep timer Management Shutdown Restart your NSA or turn it off Logout Click Logout to exit the Web Configurator This is recommended to prevent unauthorized administrator access to the NSA J UJ OD pe 2 2 O C oO D 50 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 6 3 Main Window The Web Configurator s main window 8 shows the screen you select in the navigation panel It is discussed in the rest of this document The Status screen is the first administration screen to display See Chapter 4 on page 117 for more information about the Status screen 2 6 4 Status Messages The message text box at the bottom of the screen displays status messages as you configure the NSA 2 6 5 Common Screen Icons The following table explains some icons that appear in several configuration screens Table 15 Common Configuration Screen Icons ICON DESCRIPTION wizard Click this icon to open the Disk Setup Wizard to create a new disk array or volume Eject Select a hard drive and click this icon to shut it down Do this before removing a hard drive to help increase its usable lifetime Note Ejecting a disk from a JBOD or RAIDO array causes the array to
257. igure 146 Network gt Windows CIFS Workgroup cccccsseeecceeeeeceesceseeecaaaeeeseeeaeeeesseeeeessaeeessaaaes 166 Figure 147 Network gt Windows CIFS Domain scctesassrarerpeasiasestinssiesciioisrersermasionsanerndisianainaaienths 167 PT E a a a E A E E E E E E ena as EE ene eo ener 168 Figure 149 Network gt NFS gt Add NFS Share siete recdninieninidinernvi igieiainierininiosducisdaaeNienaneieieneast 169 Figure 150 Network NFS s NFS Yee carte ira A 170 ETE EEE EEEE E 175 Figure 152 Shanng gt Users s Add User eee a e r aO 178 Figure 193 MY NDA eee GN 180 PEE TTF a O a E R 180 Figure 155 Sharing gt Users gt User Information ccccccssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaesssseceeeeeeeeseaseeeeeeeeseesaaeageeeess 181 SNE EE 182 Figure 157 Sharing gt Groups gt Add a New Local Group ssasssmesemsssmamstinejernemnarensievne 184 PO Toe S S Ne 186 Figure 159 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share mmrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnsvnnnvvvnnnnnnnnnsennnnnvrnnnnnnnnrnnsennnnnnnnnnnn 188 Figure 160 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration 0 cc 189 Figure 161 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration cccccccceeceeeeecceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeasaeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeeess 190 Figure 162 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration errrnrrrvrnnnnrvennnnvrrennnn 191 Figure 163 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission
258. igure 253 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard rrrrrrrrnnnrorvrrrnnnnnrrvnrnnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnnsrennnnnsnnee 301 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures Figure 254 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard rrernrrrannnnrrnnrnnnnnrrvnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnsennnnnnnnnee 302 Figure 255 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard rrrrrnnnnrevrnnnnrvnvnnnnvnnrnnnnrnnrnnnrennnnnenrennnnnnenn 302 Figure 256 Internet Explorer 7 Select Certificate Store cccccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeaueaeeseeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeeeeess 302 Figure 257 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard LQjessumesenmaselnikasekeaniemevieddejninv 303 Figure 258 Internet Explorer 7 Security Warning cseeeecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeaseeeeeesasaeeeeseeseaseeeeeeees 303 Figure 259 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Import Wizard rrnnvvvnnnnnnnvnnrrnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnee 304 Figure 260 Internet Explorer 7 Website Identification rrrrnrrnnnnnnnnrvvnernnnnnnvrnvnvnnnnrnvnnnnnnnnnnvnvnvnnnnsnene 304 Figure 261 Internet Explorer 7 Public Key Certificate File rrrrrnrrrnnnrnrvnrrrnnnnrvvnvrnnnnnrvvnvnnnnnnnrrnvnnnnnnnee 305 Figure 262 Internet Explorer 7 Open File Security Warning ccccccssscceceeessseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeenaseeeeeenes 305 Figure 2693 Internet Explorer 7 Tools ERE 306 Figure 264 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Options cccccessssecceeesseeeeeeceeeseeeeesee
259. ime the NSA deletes files according to the purge policy setting before doing the back up If space on the backup NSA is a concern then configure the NSA to delete old backups After purging old backups the NSA does not check if enough space is available before backup commences The NSA starts transferring files and if not enough space is available it issues a log or alert to tell you that the backup failed due to lack of space and deletes any files already transferred A full backup copies all files from your NSA to the backup device It may take some time depending on how many files you have to back up See also this related information e Snapshots Versus Backups on page 199 for a comparison of backups and snapshots e Section 6 9 8 on page 156 for a comparison of backups and RAID e Section 9 1 on page 197 for an overview of protection methods available on the NSA LES To best protect data back up data to another NSA or computer or an external hard drive and store in an off site location 9 2 1 Backup Summary Click the Backup link in the Navigation panel to access the Protect gt Backup summary screen This screen shows a list of all backup jobs created and scheduled You can also edit or delete an existing backups or create a new one from here Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9
260. ini randsi 144 Table 32 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk ICONS cc cccccsseececcceeeeescceseececseneeesceereeeseeseeesscoeeees 146 Table 33 Storage gt External Storage DISK SE 146 Table 34 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume ICONS ou eecccceecceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeceeueeeeseeeesseneeeeaeeeeeaes 147 Table 35 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume rrrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnrnnnnseennnnnnn 148 Table 36 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Create rrrrnrnrrnnnnevrrnnnnenrnnnnrrnnrnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnnnene 149 TEN ee 182 TETT 2 aa ee tnenreT Hern Cere eee ee er Mente Pi atRRrTE a RErE Cea ae RoR I S 153 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Tables FE AN Te 153 TE NN stctargnscn pte ae or tetedecreee cee eatin eee eadevneuiy antici ER 154 TEN en 155 TRES MART MN seisseen e ia 156 Table 43 Network gt TCP IP sicsseiccissetecssinsniscvessniserasasdtnaiasenssnnaiensdccinstedsdianmeanienceisasasasianetenediensiessabannaade 163 Table 44 Network Wind ows GIFS EE erorar rns dan r dE SEA EEES E nE ieee 167 TN aea o i NTE EEE E E E T E E T E T 168 TORS NOR S NFS o eae eS a ae eee re Seen eee ee ara OR earn eer eer ee 169 Tables He s NFo s GU NFS SMIG RE a NE 170 Table 48 Network gt NFS gt NFS Session aannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonrrnsnrrrnnrnsenrrsnrnnnnernnrrnnnrrnnrrnnnrrrnnrnnnrrene 171 Toe Se Shaina s gt Users EOTS EEE 175 Table 50 Sharing gt USOS ee EEE a 17
261. ion of liability 13 Multiple licensed code Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple Licensed Multiple Licensed means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses if any specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A Exhibit A Mozilla Public License The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1 1 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www mozilla org MPL Software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS basis WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License The Original Code is The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Portions created by are Copyright C All Rights Reserved Contributor s Alternatively the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the license the __ License in which case the provisions of License are applicable instead of those above If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with th
262. ion 2 7 on page 52 for detailed information on the reset button pa The NDU cannot discover my NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting e Confirm that the computer running the NDU has a network connection See the section on the NSA s LAN connection for related information The computer running the NDU can only discover NSAs in the same subnet NSAs connected to the same switch or router as your NDU computer are usually in the same subnet unless the router is doing subnetting or the switch 1s implementing VLAN The Genie Backup program uses the same network port as the NDU to discover the NSA To avoid a port conflict do not run the Genie Backup Manager at the same time as the NDU pa non admin user wants to change her password Non admin users can change their passwords directly See Section 2 5 7 on page 46 for details on how to do that o cannot see or access the Login screen in the Web Configurator Make sure you are using the correct IP address e 192 168 1 3 is the default LANI IP address and 192 168 100 1 is the default LAN2 IP address e If you changed the IP address use the new IP address e If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the NSA on page 251 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See the Quick Start Guide and Section 1 1 1 on page 32
263. ion in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact_us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office e Product model and serial number e Warranty Information e Date that you received your device e Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it NSA 2401 User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide lt gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device LS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions e The NSA may be referred to as the NSA the device or the system in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font e A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard e Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu
264. ion to continue 280 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and then select Properties Figure 221 Windows Vista Local Area Connection Properties i AEE Area Connection Properties Networking Connect using S Intel R FROATODD MT Desktop Connection Configure This connection uses the Following items vok S Client for Microsoft Networks A E Network Montord Driver amp File and Printer ee for Microsoft Networks h l Intern men arg Internet Protocol Version 4 TER AR v4 re h l Link Laper Topology Discovery Mapper LO Driver l Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Install Urinstall Properties J Description Transmision Control Protocol nternet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks OF Cancel NSA 2401 User s Guide 281 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties window opens Figure 222 Windows Vista Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties P se General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports Ehis capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator
265. iously saved login information that may be different to NSA login Check that the array in which the share resides exists and is not down or degraded If the array is down or degraded see Section 12 2 on page 249 e If the user is using DFS links then he can only access the NSA using CIFS and not FTP Check that the share has not been disabled pa cannot import domain user or user group information even though testing of the connection to the domain controller is OK e Check the NSA s DNS setting The DNS server the NSA is using must be able to resolve the domain controller s address If the domain controller uses a private IP address the NSA needs to use a private DNS server If the domain controller uses a public IP address the NSA needs to use a public DNS server NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting e Leave the domain and re join it pa A domain user can t access a share In addition to the checks listed previously for local users check that the domain controller is turned on and connected to the network A user can access a share but cannot access individual folders or files within the share Check the Access Control List ACL of read write permissions associated with the share s specific files and or folders Account names added to the list are linked to the files and folders that they are allowed to access along with what kinds of actions they are allowed to perform with
266. is field displays whether the group is a local group or a domain group Group Name This field displays the group name 8 3 1 Add a New Local Group amp Change Group Properties To create a local group click Sharing gt Groups gt Add Group To edit an existing local group click Sharing gt Groups gt Edit Group The group creation and group editing screens are identical in appearance Figure 157 Sharing gt Groups gt Add a New Local Group Add a New Local Group Group Name Description Available User s Group Membership Group Membership The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Sharing gt Groups gt Add a New Local Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Name Enter a local group name The text may consist of up to 16 letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard with certain limitations due to the nature of the NSA system See Section 8 3 1 1 on page 185 for more details on account names Group Membership Choose which user accounts should be added to or removed from this group You can select multiple user accounts by holding the Ctrl key while you Click A group is a set of users that have common NSA access rights A user can belong to more than one group Description Enter details about the user group The text may consist of up to 110 letters numerals and any printable character found on a typical English language keyboard except quo
267. is the NSA firmware version and the date created Click the Update link to go to the Maintenance gt FW Upgrade screen where you can upload new firmware MAC Address This displays the unique network adapter Media Access Control numbers of the NSA s Ethernet ports Every device on your network has a different MAC address FTP Server Status This lets you know whether the FTP server is enabled or disabled Click the Edit icon to go to the Applications gt FTP screen where you can change your FTP settings Velie Sat a Internal Volume This displays the disk arrays and volumes created on the hard drives installed in the NSA The first icon represents a disk array The text below the icon shows the array s status Healthy Resynching Degraded or Down followed by it s name type total storage capacity and free storage capacity The second column of icons represents the storage volumes on the array CPU Temperature Firmware Version The text below the icon shows the volume s status Healthy Locked Unlocked or Down The following columns display the volume s name whether the volume is encrypted CRYPTO or not NORMAL the total size of the volume how much is currently in use and how much is still available NSA 2401 User s Guide 119 Chapter 4 Status Screen Table 17 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION External Volume This displays the volumes created on USB hard drives connected to the NSA USB
268. ission screen See Section 8 4 2 2 on page 192 for details Unrestricted Folder This is a folder that has no ACL permission set Restricted Folder 7 This is a folder that has ACL permissions set i Unrestricted File This is a file that has no ACL permissions set E Restricted File 7 This is a file that has its ACL permissions set NSA 2401 User s Guide 191 Chapter 8 Sharing Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Type This indicates whether the item in the list is a folder or file as well as whether it is locked or unlocked Name This indicates the file or folder s name on the share Size This indicates the file or folder s size on the share in kilobytes Modified Date This indicates when the file or folder was last altered on the share When a file is uploaded to the NSA that is classified as a modification as it is considered newly written data by the device Close Click this to close the screen 8 4 2 2 ACL Permissions Use this screen to set who can access the selected folder or file Figure 163 Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration gt ACL Permission OO ACL Permission Target Test MyTest ACL Options _ Apply to all directories and files under this folder Available User s Groupts lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt admin lt DOMAIN
269. ity is another way to allow data recovery in the event of disk failure using calculations rather than duplicating the data If you have n pieces of data parity computes an extra piece of data The n 1 pieces of data are stored on n 1 drives If you lose any one of the n 1 pieces of data you can recreate it from the n that remain regardless of which piece is NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens lost Parity protection is used with striping and the n pieces of data are typically the blocks or bytes distributed across the drives in the array The parity information can either be stored on a separate dedicated drive or be mixed with the data across all the drives in the array LES In the following figures A1 A2 A3 and so on are blocks of data from the A file Similarly B1 B2 B3 and C1 C2 C3 ar blocks of data from the B and C files 6 9 2 JBOD e Minimum number of disks I e Total capacity Sum of the member disks e Advantages Maximum storage capacity especially for disks of mixed sizes Flexibility you can add disks to the JBOD e Disadvantages Not as fast or reliable as RAID JBOD allows you to combine multiple physical disk drives into a single virtual one so they appear as a single large disk JBOD can be used to turn several different sized drives into one big drive For example JBOD could convert 100 GB 200 GB 250 GB and 500 GB drives into one large logical drive
270. l parts during operation L This is the total number of load cycles This is the total time that the magnetic heads actuator has had a Ww OW OW OW load not been in the parking area OW 227 Torque Amplification L Count 228 Power Off Retract Cycle 230 GMR Head Amplitude 240 Head Flying Hours 250 Read Error Retry Low Rate This is how many times the magnetic armature was automatically retracted because the power was cut This is the amplitude of thrashing or the distance of repetitive Low forward and reverse head motion OW This is the hard drive s temperature This is the total time that the head has been positioning This is the number of errors in reading from the disk NSA 2401 User s Guide Network Screens This chapter discusses the network screens 7 1 Network Screens Overview Use the network screens to configure the NSA s network settings so computers can access it 7 1 1 What You Can Do in the Network Screens e Use the TCP IP screen Section 7 2 on page 160 to configure the NSA s TCP IP network connection settings such as the teaming mode and IP addresses e Use the Windows CIFS screens Section 7 3 on page 164 to configure CIFS settings such as your Windows CIFS server name and workgroup name so programs like Windows Explorer can access the NSA e Use the NFS screens Section 7 4 on page 168 to configure NFS settings so computers using the NFS file system
271. ld service or disassemble this device Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the power outlet Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY on the motherboard IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS Dispose them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment For detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the store where you purchased the product Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation
272. lders in the target that are different From the source content will be DELETED re vou sure the target is empty Cancel 5 For this example assume the connection to the German branch office is a good one and not many files need to be backed up so leave the compression off e Turn on the encryption to protect these sensitive files during the transfer The final files stored on the remote NSA will be unencrypted usable e Restrict the bandwidth usage to 256 KB s to stop the archives from using all of your network connection s available bandwidth e You don t have to configure a purge policy for a synchronization backup e Click Next Figure 84 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 Add anew backup Job Step 3 Compression C Yes ir Mo Encryption Use Encrypted Connection G Yes C no Bandwidth 256 KBs 0 No Limit Purge Policy te Keep All Old Backup files z Keep Only the last backup files 1 30 C keep Backups For day sif1 3650 NSA 2401 User s Guide 95 Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Schedule the backup to occur every morning at 3 00 and click Done Figure 85 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 Add anew backup Job Step 4 Scheduler Backup Day sid Frequency Start H a Time hhirmd i jo Every how many days fi You do not need to use a special restore process to use the files a synchronization backup creates The copy of files that the NSA creates on the ot
273. le describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID LABEL DESCRIPTION Label This field shows the name of the array RAID Level This field shows which type of data storage system a RAID level or JBOD the array is using See Section 6 4 on page 132 for details on the different levels Capacity This field shows the total size of the array how much is currently in use and how much is still available Disk This field shows the hard disks that are in the array Hot Spare If the array has a standby disk this field identifies it 6 5 1 Creating a New RAID Click the Create icon in the RAID screen as shown in Figure 128 on page 135 to create a new RAID array Figure 129 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Create RAID Level raid diski disk disk3 disk4 RAID Label Disk Mame ud es 138 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens The following table describes this screen Table 27 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Create LABEL DESCRIPTION RAID Level Use JBOD or RAID 0 if you want maximum capacity and or maximum speed for your disks and or you have other means of protecting your data Use RAID 1 to mirror primary data to another disk s with high performance Use RAID 5 with three disks to balance performance hard disk capacity usage with data protection in case of disk failure Use RAID 10 or RAID 5 with four disks to balance per
274. les By default only the administrator can access the snapshot images You want to allow users to access snapshot images in the shares that they use Click Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Image Access to open the following screen Then select User Share Permissions and click Apply Figure 78 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Image Access PEPPER ee Snapshot Image Access Settings C Allow Only Admin User Share Permissions Ollow other users to access images Inside each share in snap share folder 3 3 Using a Snapshot Image to Restore Files To use a snapshot to restore files use the MyNSA screens CIFS Windows Explorer or FTP to browse to the folder named snap share Open or copy the folder or file that you want to restore NSA 2401 User s Guide 91 Chapter 3 Tutorials For example Gonzo accidently overwrote his 2009 Plan doc file Use Windows Explorer to browse to the Gonzo share The Quick Start Guide covers how to map a share to a Windows network drive Figure 79 Using a Snapshot Image Address I snap shareltake 080904160008 hourly example SyearPlan Folders p l pr z EE Gonzo on 172 23 37 110 1 a 4 2009 Plan doc HC SyearPlan 2010 201 4 Plans dac HO This folder is Online PP PP GJ Strategic Fartners l o e There is a snap share folder with a folder for each snap shot of volume contents to which Gonzo has access A snap shot folder s name identifies
275. lets you continue Yes in this example Figure 102 Printer Connected to NSA Windows Explorer Warning EF i Before you can use the printer 11192 168 1 21Canon PRT 1 it must be set up on your computer Do you want Windows to set up the printer and continue this operation 6 If your computer does not already have the printer s driver installed you will need to install it In this example click OK Figure 103 Printer Driver Needed Connect to Printer 7 Use the wizard screens to install the printer driver on the computer You may need to get the file from the printer s CD or the printer manufacturer s website the driver is not installed on the NSA LES You must install the printer driver on each computer that will use the printer NSA 2401 User s Guide 105 Chapter 3 Tutorials Figure 104 Applications gt Print Server x Select the manufacturer and model of your printer fF your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA rccuset vad 3 AGFA AccusetSF v z 3 AGFA Accuset 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F 52 3 AGFAa Accuset 8005F v2013 108 AGFA Accuset 1000 AGFAa AccuSet 10005F v 2 3 Have Disk i Cancel After the driver installation finishes the computer is ready to use the printer Select the printer in an application to use it to print Browse to the NS
276. levels are low BS If the new hard drives have any data you want to keep back it up to another location before you install them Adding these hard drives to a disk array formats them so all data stored on them will be lost To migrate a RAIDS array to a higher capacity hard drive 110 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk to list the installed disks Select a disk to replace first disk 1 in this example and click Eject Figure 114 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk Internal Storage aN Wizards Status Type Ype RAID Array Model Name Capacity raids rald5sDiD3D4 WDC WOSO00484V5 002TB 01 0 465 76 GB Healthy 2 Click Apply Figure 115 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt Eject Eject Disk re you sure to eject the disks Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Cancel 3 Remove the hard drive The NSA sounds an audible alarm 4 Log out of the Web Configurator and then back in The Log Message screen shows that the RAID is degraded click Turn Off Buzzer to stop the audible alarm Then click OK to continue Figure 116 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt Eject Log Message Time class severity Messane q 2008 09 01 14 44 02 storage emerg There is RAID Degraded EE Turn OG Burzer NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 5 Open the ad
277. llectual Property Matters a Third Party Claims If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party s intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2 1 or 2 2 Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled LEGAL which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3 2 Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or unscrupulous reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained b Contributor Apes If Contributor s Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API Contributor must also include this information in the legal file c Representations Contributor represents that except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3 4 a above Contributor believes that Contributor s Modifications are Contributor s original creation s and or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License 3 5 Required Notices You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit
278. llowing example uses Konqueror 3 5 on openSUSE 10 3 however the screens apply to Konqueror 3 5 on all Linux KDE distributions 1 If your device s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification then the first time you browse to it you are presented with a certification error 2 Click Continue Figure 289 Konqueror 3 5 Server Authentication 4 Server Authentication Konqueror The server certificate failed the authenticity test 172 20 37 202 Continue 3 Cancel 3 Click Forever when prompted to accept the certificate Figure 290 Konqueror 3 5 Server Authentication Server Authentication Konqueror Would you like to accept this certificate forever without being prompted Forever 4 Click the padlock in the address bar to open the KDE SSL Information window and view the web page s security details Figure 291 Konqueror 3 5 KDE SSL Information al amp KDE SSL Information Konqueror ag Current connection is secured with SSL Chain Peer certificate Issuer Organization ZyXEL Organization ZyXEL Organizational unit XYZ200 Organizational unit XYZ200 Country US Country US Common name 172 23 37 202 Common name 172 23 37 202 IP address 172 23 37 202 URL https 172 23 37 202 lo0ginwrap ht mi Certificate state Certificate is self signed and thus may not be trustworthy Valid from Wednesday 21 May 2008 06 42 35 am GMT Valid until Saturday 21 May 2011 06 42
279. lower USB port is USB2 It is recommended that you use a USB device to store a volume key only and not also use it for storage Create USB Drive Click this button to go to screens you can use to create a password for unlocking the volume and store the password on a connected USB device You also use the screens to create copies of the USB key Note Create duplicate USB keys now since you cannot make them later Apply Click this button to create the volume Click this button to discard your changes and close this screen 6 6 2 USB Key Creation When you create a volume encrypted by a USB key click the Create USB Drive button to open a series of screens for creating a volume encryption password and storing it on a connected USB device 6 6 2 1 Selecting the USB Device When you click the Create USB Drive button a screen displays Select the USB device on which to create the USB key and click Next Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order NSA 2401 User s Guide 143 Chapter 6 Storage Screens Figure 132 Selecting the USB Device Create a new USB Key The following table describes this screen Table 31 Selecting the USB Device LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field shows USB1 USB2 and so on for disks connected to the NSA s USB ports Type This shows whether or not the device has an encrypted volume Model Na
280. lowing table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder The text may consist of 1 to 255 characters See Appendix on page 44 Select a volume for the share to be located on Make This Share Owned Select an owner for the share By Enable This Share Select this to activate the share Enable Action Log Select to keep a log of all actions performed on files folders in the share These actions include whenever anyone adds or removes a folder and reads writes or deletes a file Enable Recycle Bin Select this to create a recycle bin on the share Whenever a user with sufficient permissions deletes a file or folder it is stored here until it can be deleted permanently By default the recycle bin is enabled This ensures that any inadvertently deleted data can be recovered Because the NSA file system uses XFS the data recovery depends on the system administrator s use of a volume manager As such this feature is enabled automatically until explicitly disabled in order to facilitate file restoration should the need arise Be sure to use the recycle bin configuration screen Section 8 4 3 on page 194 to clear out the recycle bin periodically or else its host volume will fill up and users will not be able to store any new files on it Share Access Choose whether the share is public or private or choose Advanced to open the Share Access Config
281. lt gateway address in this field DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it If you have the IP address es of the DNS server s enter them Dynamic Select the checkbox to have the DHCP server automatically assign a DNS server address to your NSA Static Select the checkbox to choose a static DNS server address Type the DNS server IP address es into the fields below Primary DNS Type a primary DNS server IP address Server Secondary Type a secondary DNS server IP address DNS Server Jumbo Frames Jumbo frames improve network performance You must have a 1 Gbps Gigabit Ethernet network that supports jumbo frames Select the largest size of frame that all of your network devices including computer Ethernet cards and switches hubs or routers support Note If you enable jumbo frames on the NSA in a network that does not support them you will lose access to the NSA If this occurs you will have to restore the factory default UD Z Op configuration Network Diagnostic Tool Use this section to test the network connection to a particular IP address or domain name Select an address or type it into the field Then click Ping to have the NSA send a packet to test the network connection If the NSA is able to ping the host the netw
282. lume gives someone access to a folder It is similar to a shared folder in Windows but the access rights are independent of the folder you configure the share and the folder separately You can map a share to a network drive for easy and familiar file transfer for Windows users 38 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The main My NSA screen displays the shares to which you have access Figure 8 My NSA Screen Language 2 a E Password Administration Ba My NSA My Shares Jason Jirga gd HuulEie ji USB Card I Other Shares Currently there are no other shares that are accessible to you on the system The following table describes this screen Table 4 My NSA Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION My Own Shares These are the shares that you own and manage The share icons are folder shaped Click a share icon to access the share s contents System Share This icon displays for a system share created by the NSA User created Share This icon displays for a user created share External USB Share This icon displays for a share on an external USB device An external share s icon disappears if the share is not currently available because the USB device was removed for example The administrator owns and manages the public shares Click this button to see and configure the management details for a share Other Shares These are other shares on the inte
283. me This is the device s model name that uniquely identifies it in the NSA Capacity This field shows the device s storage size Next Click this button to proceed Cancel Click this button to discard your changes and close this screen 6 6 2 2 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Strongly Recommended Use these screens to create extra copies of your USB key in case one is lost damaged or stolen Without a USB key you cannot access the volume if it becomes locked All of the volume s data will be unusable 1 Select Yes to copy the USB key to another USB device After the duplicate USB key creation completes you return to this screen so you can make another Click No when you are done making USB key copies Figure 133 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Create Duplicate USB Key USB Key had been created Please keep it in safe place Do you want to duplicate other USB key fille suggest creating usb keys more than two ves no 2 The NSA ejects stops the USB device Remove the USB key and click Next 144 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Figure 134 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Eject Create Duplicate USB Key USB has ejected now Please remove USB2 3 Insert a different USB key and click Next Figure 135 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Insert Create Duplicate USB Key please plug in USBZ After the duplicate USB key creation completes you return to the first USB key duplication scr
284. ministration screens In the Status screen the RAID array shows up as degraded Figure 117 Status RAID Degraded CPU Usage CPU Temperature FAN Speed 1254RPM 1934RPM Memory U OE i e EE Sees d 31MB 256MB Server Name nsaz401 d Model Name WS4 2401 Firmware Version 1 00 AFF O01b4 ok 00 19 CB 02 90 63 BEE Bre Ene Enabled d MAC Address FTP Server Status Internal Yolume Degraded raidSoibsb4 volumedl Normal raids Healthy 223 56 GBTotal 110 75 GBFree Status File System Disk s Disk Usage Install the new hard drive In this example it s in disk drive bay 2 Bee 40 06 MR Used 111 76 GB Total 100 Free O 7 The NSA automatically repairs a degraded RAID if you insert an empty disk without an existing file system Otherwise after you insert a disk you must go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screen and click Repair Figure 118 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Internal Storage i cai r Wizards Create Rename Delete Resync Add Disk Remove Speed Hot Spare 8 Select the disk you want to use to repair the RAID and click Apply Figure 119 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Repair SS Repair NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 9 The RAID s status displays as Recovering Figure 120 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID Internal Storage i pr i 2 Wizards Create Rename Delete Repair Resyne Add Disk Remove
285. n Type from 0 to 60 characters to further describe this backup Archive Select this to make a separate copy of the source files for each backup The backup copy can be on this NSA another NSA or a computer that uses CIFS Full copies all of the source files at each backup This provides the most protection but also requires the most storage space Incremental copies only source files that are new and or modified since the last backup The first backup is a full backup The NSA also does a full backup at the backup interval you specify You can manually delete backup files but you must keep the latest full backup to be able to restore the files later Synchronization Select this to keep updating a single copy of the source files to the target At the time of writing the target must be another NSA 2401 Publish makes a copy of the source files Additional files in the target folder can remain Mirror makes the target folder identical to the source folder The NSA deletes any other files in the target folder Next Click this button to proceed NSA 2401 User s Guide 203 Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 2 2 1 Creating a Backup Job Step 2 Figure 168 Protect gt Backup gt Add Step 2 Add new backup Job volumet ER d volume BHO Gonzo EO Kermit EH Strategy EO Business Plan Sales a m Remote Remote NSA Address Username Password Share Name Local External Previous NSA 2401 User s G
286. n a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work
287. n conflict on the NSA LES You cannot set a disk quota for users that are in conflict If you started in Domain mode and later you switch to Workgroup mode the NSA will allow you to create user names and group names that already exist on the domain controller If the conflicting domain user s password and local user s password are NOT the same than the two users are treated as two distinct users Therefore each user can only access shares to which they have been given access rights However if the domain user s password and local user s password are also the same then only shares set to be accessible by the local user are actually accessible by both the domain user and local user The NSA has no way to distinguish these two users as their passwords and user names are exactly the same BS During a conflict situation the local user takes precedence ONLY if the domain user and local user s passwords are the same NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens 8 2 1 Create a New Account amp Change Account Properties To create an account click Sharing gt Users gt Add User To edit an existing local user account click Sharing gt Users gt Edit User The account creation and account editing screens are identical in appearance Figure 152 Sharing gt Users gt Add User a Add User Username New Password Password Confirm Quota per volume volumet 111 76 GB lo MB 0 means unlimited
288. n of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessories and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy
289. n of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3 2 The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients rights relating to the Covered Code You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice which may contain terms different from this License provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient s rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer 3 7 Larger Works You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product In such a case You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code 4 Inability to Comply
290. n user domain seconds to group s It took 2 seconds group take when import domain user and group CIFS INFO Import Domain User and Group number of number of domain Description success 0 user s domain user domain 1 group s description group description GIFS share NOTICE _ Delete share 0 ShareName 1 CIFS share NOTICE Add new disabled share 0 for Share Name Folder Volume unshared folder 1 in volume Name Name 2 CIFS share NOTICE Recycle bin disabled Remove Share Name recycle bin folder in share 0 NSA 2401 User s Guide 265 Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S NOTICE Purge all files in recycle bin Share Name folder in share 0 Expire recycle bin finish for Share Name How log it share 10 process time 1 seconds remove 2 file 3 CIFS share CIFS share INFO takes to process bytes this recycle bin CIFS user CIFS user CIFS user NOTICE The user 0 from 1 has attempted to change the user 2 password but old password verification fail CIFS user CIFS group CIFS group COPY BIN NOTICE Add new group 0 Group Name NOTICE Copy Button Can not get configuration for Copy Button COPY BTN NOTICE Copying content of 0 to 1 USB Internal USB Start Path Internal Path Copying content of 0 to 1 USB Internal USB Failed P
291. name that uniquely identifies the backup It is read only Job Description Type from 0 to 60 characters to further describe this backup Backup Type This field displays what kind of backup is to be performed It is read only Source folder s file s Specify the path of the folders and files to back up Backup Target These fields display where the backups are to be saved to Target path Compression Compression reduces the size of the file that you want to back up Backup is then faster but restoring may be slower so if backup space is nota concern and recovery speed is then turn off compression Encryption You can have the NSA use a password to encrypt the backup files 208 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens Table 74 Protect gt Backup gt Edit Job Step 1 continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bandwidth For backups to a remote NSA you can restrict the bandwidth to help prevent the backups from using all of your network connection s available bandwidth This is more important when backing up to a remote NSA or computer through the Internet Purge Policy These fields display for archive backups Select a policy for deleting archive backups This purge runs first before a new backup is done For example if you have a backup scheduled to begin at midnight then at that time the NSA checks these settings and deletes files accordingly before backup takes place If soace on the backup NSA or disk is a concern then confi
292. nd charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Version 1 1 Copyright c 1999 2003 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever s
293. nd the NSA checks this list when authenticating users and or groups that seek access to a share This is suitable for a large number of CIFS users where accounts are stored on an external server A domain is organized in levels and is administered as a unit with common rules and procedures Each domain has a unique name You must be logged on as an administrator to your local computer and have a valid user name and password to join your computer to a domain If you do not know which user name and password to use contact your network administrator The NSA automatically synchronizes its time and date with those on the external domain controller Active Directory Example The next figure shows an example application for the NSA in a small office network AD is an Active Directory that contains the user names and passwords of all users that are allowed access to the NSA Users U1 U2 U3 can all back up and share data on the NSA Important data stored on servers S1 and S2 may be also stored there It is recommended that you place the NSA behind a firewall and or IDP device for protection NSA 2401 User s Guide 165 Chapter 7 Network Screens Figure 145 Active Directory Example Application AD 7 3 1 Windows CIFS Screen Click Network gt Windows CIFS to display this screen Figure 146 Network gt Windows CIFS Workgroup Server Identification Server Name rsa2401 Description i Note Modifying your Server Name will affect
294. neral Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can re link them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipient
295. ng at 18 00 and a third schedule to have it reboot every Friday at 14 00 Click a column s heading cell to sort the schedules by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Type This field displays whether the power control schedule has the NSA turn on turn off or reboot Frequency This field shows how often monthly weekly or daily the NSA is to apply this power control schedule Execute Time This field shows when the NSA is to use this power control schedule when the NSA is to turn on turn off or reboot a Delete Click this to remove a power control schedule from the list Add Power Control Use this part of the screen to configure power on power off and reboot Schedule times Type Select whether this power control schedule has the NSA turn on turn off or reboot Frequency Select whether the NSA is to apply this power control schedule entry on a monthly weekly or daily basis Execute Time Enter the time day and or day of the month as appropriate for this power control schedule entry Leave more than 10 minutes between the execution times of the entries If the NSA turns off or restarts while a user is transferring files to or from the NSA the transfer fails The user will need to restart the transfer The NSA skips a scheduled restart or power off if the execution time comes while the NSA is doing any of the following e Resynchronizing a RAID e Upgrading firmware e Replacing
296. ng screens use the default Ubuntu 8 installation BS Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in GNOME 1 Click System gt Administration gt Network Figure 234 Ubuntu 8 System gt Administration Menu ol a fr Authorizations ne Hardware Drivers lt Help and Support JE About GNOME 43 About Ubuntu 9 quit Hardware Testing pa Language Support E Login Window 2 When the Network Settings window opens click Unlock to open the Authenticate window By default the Unlock button is greyed out until clicked You cannot make changes to your configuration unless you first enter your admin password Figure 235 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections Tal Network Settings 7 Location Connections General DNS Hosts Point to point connec This network interface is not c NSA 2401 User s Guide 289 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 Inthe Authenticate window enter your admin account name and password then click the Authenticate button Figure 236 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication Authenticate System policy prevents modifying the configuration An application is atternpting to perform an action that requires privileges Authentication as one of the users below is required to perform this action i C EEEE chris gt Details 4 Inthe Network
297. nge their passwords by using the username and password in the My NSA gt Password screen See Section 2 5 7 on page 46 for details 36 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 5 NSA Login Screen Z XEL NSA 2401 Welcome to NS4 2401 Enter Username password and click to login Username Password maximum of 14 alphanumeric printable characters no single and double quotes i Note Please turn on the Javascript and Activex control setting on Internet Explorer Login Reset Copyright 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corp You should see a screen asking you to change your password highly recommended as shown next Type a new password and retype it to confirm and click Apply or click Skip Figure 6 Change Password Screen fi vn Admin Info s a security precaution it is highly recommended that you change the admin password New Password Password Confirm a masimum of 14 alphanumeric printable characters no single and double quotes Apply Ignore B Copyright 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corp BS The Web Configurator session automatically times out after 15 minutes Simply log back into the NSA if this happens to you 2 4 User level Screens Overview All users including the administrator first see the user level access My NSA screen after login NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 7 My NSA BEE
298. nking The 1000M LAN is sending or receiving packets COPY Green On A USB device is connected to the NSA bus The NSA is copying files from the USB device Copying files from the USB device failed Press the COPY button to set the COPY LED back to green Of No USB device is connected 1 1 2 Power Button Press the power button on the front panel to turn the NSA on and off To turn the NSA on press the power button and release it e To turn the NSA off press the power button in and hold it until you hear a beep Then release the button The SYS light blinks red until the NSA is shut down e If the above shut down procedure does not work which may happen if the NSA has crashed hold the power button in a few more seconds until you hear a second beep The NSA turns off immediately 1 1 3 COPY Button Use the COPY button on the front panel to copy files from a connected USB device to the NSA Use the Applications gt Copy Button screen Section 10 4 on page 227 to choose where the NSA stores the files The name of the folder created for the copied files consists of the date and time of the copy in year_month_day_hour_minute_second format NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your NSA 34 NSA 2401 User s Guide Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access the NSA Web Configurator and provides an overview of its screens 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The Web Configurato
299. nnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnnsnnee 112 Figure 119 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Repair rurrrnnnnnevvnnnnnenennnnnvnennnnnenennnnnennnnnnnenennnnusnnenen 112 Figure 120 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID 0 ccccccsscssecesccsscaseecececscsesseceeecsedaesecnsctenssnarsetscuseneranss 113 ge ee ae T ec NNN 117 Fig re 122 System Seming Date IME EE aiiai 121 Figure 123 Disks RAIDS and VOWS savsss ere Genesee 125 Figure 124 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status rrrrrrrrrrnnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnsrrnnnnnnnnnsrenrnnnnnenennnnnnnnusnee 127 NSA 2401 User s Guide 19 List of Figures Figure 125 Storage gt ntemal Storage gt DISK siessressetrarernessveniareripeiairenestaawisientaiemamweteacia 128 Figure 126 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Brief Summary rrrrnnnnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnnvennnnn 130 Figure 127 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Full Summary rrrrrrrnnrnrrrnnnnrernnnnnnnnnnn 131 Figure 128 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID caecs cscs icaetintdvaciolaidanadaietearetoiaeiicsiotatdeians Naisecsiaiiabasueiees 135 Figure 129 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Create mrmmmeerrrvrrrrrrrrvevrrrrsnrrrrerrrrererrrrnnne 138 Figure 130 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume rrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnsnnvnnnnnnssrnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnssee 140 Figure 131 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume gt Create mmmrrnnnrnrerv
300. nnrenrrnnnnnnennn 284 Figure 226 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt TCP IP Tab rrrrnnrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnsrennnnn 284 Figure 227 Mac OS X 10 4 Network Preferences gt Ethernet rrrnnrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnovnrrnnnnnnvrnnrnnnnnnrennnnnnnnner 285 Fe 228 Mac OS X 104A NKL eee 285 Figure 229 Mac OS X 10 5 Apple NENU esse erin ra ENA EAEE EEEE eee 286 Figure 230 Mac OS X 10 5 Systems Preferences rrrrrrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnrrnnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnennrnnnnnnssennrnnnnnnennn 286 Figure 231 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet rrrrnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnovrrnnnnnnnernnrnnnnnnrennnnnnnnner 287 Figure 232 Mac OS X 10 5 Network Preferences gt Ethernet cccccsscccecssseceeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeaeees 288 Poue NNN OS STR NN LUY wcsaviscrexssncrrencrenrsecrepinscnyaiieisereaavienstosneiersyesetreieraanemeaviaeiean 288 Figure 234 Ubuntu 8 System gt Administration Menu cccccccccccceseececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeesesaneeeesaaes 289 Figure 235 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections vumenesmenstsuensetsniensmesenmnneinie e 289 Figure 236 Ubuntu 8 Administrator Account Authentication rrrrrnnnrnornnnnrrrrrnnnrrrrrnnnnrnnrnnnnrennnnnrennnnn 290 Figure 237 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Connections rrrrrrrnnnnnnrrnnrrrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnvrnnnnnssenrrnnnnnnennn 290 Figure 238 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt Properties rrrrrrrrrnnnrrnnrnnnnrrnvnnnrrnnrnnnrennnnnnnrennnnnnenrnn
301. ns of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Edit a self signed CA certificate Stepl Edit the Self signed Certificate Download the self signed CA file E ont HA StepS Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser C Create a Certificate To Be Authorized By My Own Certificate Authority 2 Save the file to your computer Figure 46 Downloading the NSA s Certificate Opening CA cer x You have chosen to open CA cer which is Security Certificate From http f 192 168 1 35 what should Firefox do with this File Open with Browse E FlashGat T Do this automatically For files like this From now on NSA 2401 User s Guide 71 Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Find the certificate file on your computer and double click it Figure 47 Downloading the NSA s Certificate am im My Metwork Places Rec cle Bin 4 Install the certificate The rest of the steps in this section are an example of installing a certificate in Windows See Appendix C on page 299 for other examples In the Certificate dialog box click Install Certificate Figure 48 Certificate Certificate General Details Certification Path Certificate Information This CA Root certificate is not trusted To enable trust install this certificate in the Trusted Root Certification Authorities store Issued to nsaz401 Issued by nsa2401 Valid from 5 20 2008 to 5 20
302. nsennnnn 291 Figure 239 Ubuntu 8 Network Settings gt DNS rurnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnsnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnennnnssennnnnnn 291 FUP UN NNK TN ae eedeeeid se 292 Figure 241 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu rrrnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnennrnnnnnnsrennnnnnnnsseene 293 Figure 242 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu rrrnnnnnnnnnnovnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnssrnnrnnnnnsseene 293 Figure 243 openSUSE 10 3 YaST NNN arken 294 Figure 244 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings cccccccccccsssseeccceseeeeceeeececseaueeessseaseeessageeeessenseesssagss 294 Figure 245 openSUSE 10 3 Network Card Setup ccccccccccesssseceeeeeeeeseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeess 295 Figure 246 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings Lasse dela elticha edie kes 296 Figure 247 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager cccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaas 297 Figure 248 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager ccccssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaees 297 Figure 249 Internet Explorer 7 Certification Error cccccccccccssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseuaaaeeeesssaaaeeeeeess 300 Figure 250 Internet Explorer 7 Certification Error Luren 300 Figure 251 Internet Explorer 7 Certificate Error asi ichsasicraridinteisnsiiaianatiieiiaeria eelisiioieitaniasieeidiudig 300 Figure 252 Internet Explorer 7 Cerificate eee eee eee eee nee one ae eel een eRe ee EEE Ree ena 301 F
303. nt names are e All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically e Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space e Account names are case insensitive The account name cannot be the same regardless of the letter case as an existing local account or domain account For example if there exists a domain account with the name BOB you cannot create a local account named bob If you enter an account bob but use BOB when connecting via CIFS or FTP it will use the account settings used for bob e The account name cannot be the same as a system account name such as FTP or EVERYONE nor be the same as an existing local or domain account Other reserved user names that are not allowed are e bin e daemon e ftp e anonymous e nobody e root e pc guest NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens e admin 8 2 1 2 Account Password Management Non admin users may change their passwords themselves by logging into the NSA Web Configurator using the username and password as defined in the Create New Account screen After logging in select the Password tab in the account toolbar Figure 153 My NSA My Own Shares Nason Sori APP lance There are no my own shares on the system Other Shares There are no other accessible shares on the system In the Password tab create a new password and then click Apply Figure 154 Password Account Name Asr as Old Password
304. nymous 193 ANONYMOUS FTP 193 253 anonymous FTP access 225 Apache License 323 Apple 31 65 archive 96 203 array 125 degraded 126 down 126 repair 126 resynching 134 B backup 89 96 200 archive 96 203 bandwidth 206 compression 206 create 202 edit 208 encryption 206 mirror 203 publish 203 purge settings 207 purging 200 restore by files 212 restore by job 209 software 220 synchronization 203 Index Index synchronization tutorial 92 troubleshooting 254 tutorial 92 backup files restoring files by 102 backup job restoring files by 99 backups purge settings 209 versus snapshots 199 bandwidth 206 browsers 35 browsing shares 40 BSD 340 buzzer 233 troubleshooting 251 C capacity 106 using 109 certificate 229 240 editing 240 tutorial 69 verifying 79 certifications 260 353 notices 353 viewing 354 change password 37 CIFS 160 164 Comma Separated Value see CVS Common Internet File System see CIFS common screen icons 51 compatible hard disks 259 compression 206 configuration file backup 237 maintenance 237 restore 237 configuration file backup 198 conflict user 177 conflict in 173 conflicting access settings 175 conflicting settings 175 connection limit 225 NSA 2401 User s Guide Index copied files folder format 33 COPY button 33 227 folder format 33 LED 33 share 227 COPY LED troubleshooting 255 copying 33 42 copyright 48 353 CPU temperature 119 usage
305. o copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not NSA 2401 User s Guide 329 Appendix D Open Source Licences compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it 1s called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distributio
306. o disable this option if you connect to different networks Name Server 3 9 Click Finish to save your settings and close the window NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Verifying Settings Click the KNetwork Manager icon on the Task bar to check your TCP IP properties From the Options sub menu select Show Connection Information Figure 247 openSUSE 10 3 KNetwork Manager 7 Disable Wireless ne KNetworkManager ri Wired Devices t F 63 Switch to Offline Mode X Wired Network T Show Connection Information Dial Up Connections Configure 2 Options When the Connection Status KNetwork Manager window opens click the Statistics tab to see if your connection is working properly Figure 248 openSUSE Connection Status KNetwork Manager Connection Status KNetworkManager 2 Device Sy Addresse Y Statistics Received Transmitted Bytes 2317441 841875 MBytes 2 2 0 8 Packets 3621 3140 Errors g 0 Dropped 0 0 KBytes s 0 0 0 0 NSA 2401 User s Guide 297 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 298 NSA 2401 User s Guide Importing Certificates This appendix shows you how to import public key certificates into your web browser Public key certificates are used by web browsers to ensure that a secure web site is legitimate When a certificate authority such as VeriSign Comodo or Network Solutions to name a few rec
307. o reverse the sort order The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk LABEL DESCRIPTION Name This field shows disk1 disk2 disk3 and or disk4 for disks installed in the NSA disk trays labelled 1 2 3 and 4 respectively Model Name This is the hard drive model number that uniquely identifies a hard drive Capacity This field shows the size of the hard disk Type This shows the kind of array to which the disk belongs See Section 6 4 on page 132 for details 6 3 2 S M A R T Screen Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk to display the disk summary screen Select a disk and click the S M A R T icon to display the following screen This screen provides details about the drive and its status NSA 2401 User s Guide 129 Chapter 6 Storage Screens Figure 126 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Brief Summary Device Info Format Brief Summary Ra Temperature 29 ac Health Good Performance Good Detail Information Device Model WOE WOSO0044V5 002TBO Serial Number WO WCAaSUO984565 Firmware Version 01 01601 User Capacity 467 00 GB Not in smartctl database for details use P showall 474 Version 8 Device Exact ATA specification draft version not indicated Local Time Mon May 19 11 06 46 2008 GMT SMART support Available device has SMART capability SMART support Enabled 474 Standard The following table describ
308. o the same subnet There is one IP address If LAN1 loses its connection LAN2 takes over the IP address and traffic Load Balancing Select this option to use both Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the same subnet with the same IP address The NSA distributes the traffic load across both interfaces Link Aggregation Select this option to use IEEE 802 3ad port link aggregation to combine the two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces into a single logical link Connect both Gigabit Ethernet interfaces to the same device The peer device must also have IEEE 802 3ad port link aggregation enabled for the two interfaces connected to the NSA Both interfaces use the same IP address If one interface loses its connection the NSA continues to use the other interface LAN Use this section to configure the NSA s IP address or IP addresses configure LAN1 and LAN2 separately when the Teaming Mode is set to Stand Alone Dynamic Select the Dynamic checkbox to have a DHCP server automatically assign an IP address to your NSA If none is assigned then the NSA reverts to the default IP address of 192 168 1 3 NSA 2401 User s Guide 163 Chapter 7 Network Screens Table 43 Network gt TCP IP LABEL DESCRIPTION Static Select the Static checkbox for the NSA to use fixed TCP IP information You must fill in all of the following fields IP Address Type an IP address in this field IP Subnet Type an IP subnet mask in this field Mask Gateway Type a defau
309. ocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected NSA 2401 User s Guide 2771 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens Figure 215 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General lterate Configuration Tou can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically O Use the following IP address Obtain ONS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Advanced 6 Select Obtain an IP address automatically if your network administrator or ISP assigns your IP address dynamically Select Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields if you have a static IP address that was assigned to you by your network administrator or ISP You may also have to enter a Preferred DNS server and an Alternate DNS server if that information was provided 7 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 8 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window Verifying Settings 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Command
310. of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution in
311. of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relent to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version th
312. older Windows operating systems Supports volume and file sizes of up to 2 GB ntfs The newest Windows file system Linux file systems ext2 Older file system ext3 The same as EXT2 but adds a journaled file system and is more robust reiserfs Offers better performance for small files xfs Offers good performance for larger files You can also have the NSA encrypt a volume that uses the xfs file system Select this check box and an option from the drop down list box to encrypt the volume This option is only available when you create a volume using the xfs file system The NSA automatically locks an encrypted volume if the NSA restarts or loses power or the disk is removed An administrator can also manually lock the volume Once a volume is locked no one can use it again until an administrator unlocks it password Select this option to manually enter a password for unlocking this volume You can also enter a password prompt You will need to manually re enter the key every time the NSA restarts USB key Select this option to have the NSA create a password for unlocking the volume and store the password on another connected USB device Note that if the volume is later locked the NSA automatically unlocks it if the USB device containing the key is inserted when the NSA restarts At start up if a USB key is inserted the NSA automatically unlocks any volumes encrypted by it The password fields display if you choose to enc
313. older on a volume It is equivalent to the Windows concept of a shared folder You must have an internal volume before you can create shares Volume A volume is a storage area on a single disk or spread across a number of disks typically known as a disk array or RAID within a single file system XFS XFS is journaled file system that allows for files as large as 16 terabytes Due to the system s design it does not easily support snapshots Instead it was designed with the intention that a logical volume manager would handle the snapshot snapshot restoration process The NSA 2401 utilizes XFS for its internal file system Logical Volume A logical volume is the portion of a physical hard disk drive that allows data to be written and read It is represented in your computer s operating system as a drive with a letter and is sub divided into its component files and folders For example on a typical home computer the logical volume that exists on the hard drive that hosts the Windows operating system is most often labeled the C drive A physical hard disk drive can contain a single logical volume or it can be partioned into multiple logical volumes Furthermore with the assistance of a logical volume manager a logical volume can actually span multiple physical hard disk drives Logical Volume Manager A logical volume manager is tool that allows system administrators greater flexibility in setting up and managing their system
314. olume only read write operation FAILED Storage CRIT Cancel Internal Volume Scan Volume FAILED Storage CRIT Scan External Volume FAILED Volume Storage CRIT Cancel External Volume Scan Volume FAILED Storage CRIT Eject External Disk 0 disk id Volume FAILED Storage CRIT Detected Disk 0 I O error Volume NOTICE Hostname is set to 0 Ld NOTICE System description is changed EMERG Temperature is too high NSA 2401 User s Guide 271 Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY MESSAGE ARGUMENT S System EMERG Temperature exceeds the upper bound and may cause damage System is going to shutdown INFO Temperature is back to normal EG System EMERG Fan speed is too low and may cause damage System ERR Fan speed is lower than normal speed INFO Fan speed is normal me System INFO Device is shutdown by administrator System NOTICE The system was shutdown abnormally PWR BTN NOTICE System is shutdown by power button UPS EMERG Remaining battery charge below limit on UPS Doing shutdown USB NOTICE An external APC UPS device is plugged USB NOTICE An external APC UPS device is unplugged USB NOTICE An external Printer device is plugged USB NOTICE An external Printer device is unplugged USB NOTICE An external USB hub device is plugged USB NOTICE An external USB hub device is unplugged System INFO CGI File uploaded File name File Name File Size FW
315. olumn s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Protect gt Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field shows whether the backup job is currently running or waiting to run The percent complete also displays for a currently running job This is the name of the backup Job Description This is some extra descriptive text on the backup Backup Info This field displays the backup s type source and target Scheduler Info This field displays the backup s frequency the time it was last run in and whether or not it succeeded and when it is scheduled to run again The times use yyyy mm dd hh mm ss format 9 2 2 Creating a Backup Job In the Protect gt Backup screen click the Add Job icon to create a new backup job Figure 167 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 1 Add anew backup Job Step 1 Job Information Job Name i Job Description Backup Type archive Full f Incremental C Synchronization 202 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 1 LABEL DESCRIPTION Job Name This is a required field that uniquely identifies the backup Type from 1 to 15 characters You can use alphanumeric characters A Z 0 9 and underscores The first character must be a letter Job Descriptio
316. olumn shows data if your connection is working properly Figure 240 Ubuntu 8 Network Tools Devices Network Tools Pa en Tool Edit Help Network device IP Information Protocol IP Address Netmask Prefix Broadcast Scope Pv4 10 4 2 15 255 255 255 0 10 0 2 255 IPy amp feg0 a00 27fHfe30 elfc 64 Link Interface Information Interface Statistics Hardware address 08 00 27 30 e 1 6c theres 684 6 KiB Multicast Enabled Transmitted packets 1425 MTU 1500 Transmission errors 0 Link speed not available Received bytes 219 5 KIB State Active Received packets 1426 Reception errors 0 Collisions 0 292 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address Linux openSUSE 10 3 KDE This section shows you how to configure your computer s TCP IP settings in the K Desktop Environment KDE using the openSUSE 10 3 Linux distribution The procedure screens and file locations may vary depending on your specific distribution release version and individual configuration The following screens use the default openSUSE 10 3 installation BS Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address in the KDE 1 Click K Menu gt Computer gt Administrator Settings YaST Figure 241 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu seen OOOO O Applications u Administrator Settings oy Q Install Software 7 System Information S
317. on IDP Intrusion Detection and Prevention and anti virus like ZyXEL s ZyWALL USG products for example Configure strong user passwords and Access Control List ACL settings See Chapter 8 on page 173 for details Use HTTPS for Web Configurator access to the NSA see Section 11 4 on page 239 Theft of files by removing the physical hard Store sensitive data in encrypted NSA volumes see drives page Encrypted Volumes on page 126 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens 9 1 1 What You Can Do in the Protect Screens e Use the Backup screens Section 9 2 on page 200 to back up data and restore backup files by archive backup job e Use the Restore screens Section 9 3 on page 212 to restore by backup files e Use the Snapshot screens Section 9 4 on page 215 to create and manage snapshot jobs e Use the Backup Software screen Section 9 5 on page 220 to locate the Genie Backup Manager license keys 9 1 2 What You Need to Know About Protection Methods Configuration File Backup and Restoration BES Use the Maintenance gt Configuration menus to create a file of your NSA configurations such as passwords shares and volumes created network settings and so on If you re going to do some major configuration changes then it is advisable to create a configuration backup file If things go wrong after you make the configuration changes you can always go back to the previous configuration by restoring an earli
318. on to open the New ACL Configuration screen See Section 8 4 2 1 on page 191 for details Modify ACL Click this icon to open the ACL Permission screen See Section 8 4 2 2 on page 192 for details i Reset ACL r Click this to reset the ACL permissions on the selected file or folder Restricted Folder This is a folder that has ACL permissions set Restricted File This is a file that has ACL permissions set 190 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration Type This indicates whether the item in the list is a folder or file as well as whether it is locked or unlocked ACL Path This indicates the file or folder path and name on the share Click this to close the screen 8 4 2 1 New ACL Configuration This screen allows you to create a new ACL configuration Figure 162 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration ACL Configuration ow Set ACL Current Location Tam 2008 05 09 09 37 47 2008 05 09 0937 40 2008 05 09 093726 2008 05 09 09 37 34 2008 05 08 16 47 46 127 035 MB 2008 05 08 1647 44 The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 62 Sharing gt Shares gt ACL Configuration gt New ACL Configuration Icons DESCRIPTION Set ACL Select a file or folder from the list then Click this icon to open the ACL Perm
319. ong with what kinds of actions they are allowed to perform with those files and folders delete move rename and so on e The user s computer may already be connected to another of the NSA s shares using a different user name and or password This can happen without the user realizing it if the user s computer automatically connects to a share at logon Right click any other connected shares and click Disconnect Then re attempt to connect to the desired share Check if the share has an ANONMYOUS or EVERYONE access right If the user is already logged into a share using her username and password she will NOT be able to access a share that has ANONYMOUS FTP only access rights as these require no login In this case she should log out and try to access the share again without logging in See Section 8 4 2 3 on page 193 for more details Check if the shared folder is a subfolder of another parent share Check that the parent share s access rights do not conflict with the subfolder share It is recommended that you do not create subfolder shares Check if the user belongs to a group with conflicting access rights DENY always takes precedence If you allow a user FULL access to a share but set his group to DENY then he will NOT be able to access the share The local user should check if there are any existing mapped network drives to the NSA He may need to disconnect existing CIFS connections as new CIFS connection may use prev
320. ons gt FTP Enable FTF l Connection Connection Limit 10 Limit 60 Max Timeout Idle Timeout 15 Minutes 300 minutes Enable Anonymous FTP Access i Note To configure a share to allow anonymous FTP access go to the configure shares page and modify a share s access rights to allow the user Anonymous FTP Character Set UTF 8 E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Applications gt FTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable FTP Select this to allow users to connect to the NSA via FTP This also enables FTP over Explicit TLS FTPES You can use FTP or FTPES to send files to the NSA or get files from the NSA Connection Limit Enter the maximum number of concurrent FTP connections allowed on the NSA in this field Idle Timeout Enter the length of time that an FTP connection can be idle before being disconnected by the NSA Enable Anonymous FTP Select this to allow any user to log into the NSA using FTP or Access anonymous as a username and no password Any other name is considered a username so must be valid and have a corresponding correct password Character Set Select the appropriate language encoding here If the NSA s folders or file names do not display correctly in your FTP client The NSA uses UTF 8 format for FTP by default This setting applies to all FTP client connections to the NSA It does not affect your Windows CIFS connections it will not correct the
321. ooting e Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected properly to the NSA and connected to another Ethernet device Make sure the other device is turned on If it s connected directly to a computer make sure that the computer network card is working ping 127 0 0 1 on the computer e Use another Ethernet cable If you re connecting to a Gigabit Ethernet make sure you re using an 8 wire Ethernet cable e If the problem continues contact the vendor See Section 1 1 1 on page 32 for a description of NSA LEDs hear a buzzer sound coming from the NSA e By default when the NSA generates an emergency log it also sounds an audible alarm to warn you e Log into the Web Configurator You will be presented with a screen that displays the log and lets you disable the buzzer 12 3 NSA Login and Access pa I forgot the IP address for the NSA e 192 168 1 3 is the default LANI IP address and 192 168 100 1 is the default LAN2 IP address e Use the NDU NSA Discovery Utility to discover your NSA If you have admin privileges you can directly change the IP address of the NSA using the NDU e If you changed the default password and you don t have the NDU use the RESET button at the front of the NSA Refer to Section 2 7 on page 52 for detailed information on the reset button pa I forgot the password e The default password is 1234 e You may have to reset the NSA password or configuration see Sect
322. oped by the Apache Software Foundation under Apache License Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections I through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means 1 the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or 11 ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or 111 beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types
323. or selling of Original Code to make have made use practice sell and offer for sale and or otherwise dispose of the Original Code or portions thereof the licenses granted in this Section 2 1 a and b are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License Notwithstanding Section 2 1 b above no patent license is granted 1 for code that You delete from the Original Code 2 separate from the Original Code or 3 for infringements caused by i the modification of the Original Code or 11 the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices 2 2 Contributor Grant Subject to third party intellectual property claims each Contributor hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Contributor to use reproduce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor or portions thereof either on an unmodified basis with other Modifications as Covered Code and or as part of a Larger Work and under Patent Claims infringed by the making using or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and or in combination with its Contributor Version or portions of such combination to make use sell offer for sale have made and or otherwise dispose of 1 Modifications made by that Contributor or portions thereo
324. ork connection is OK Click Apply to save your TCP IP configurations After you click Apply the NSA restarts Wait until you see the Login screen or until the NSA fully boots and then use the NDU to rediscover it Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh Apply 7 3 Windows CIFS BS Use this screen to configure your CIFS settings In this screen you can set your server name and specify if your NSA is a part of a workgroup or domain CIFS is always enabled on the NSA NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens BS The NSA automatically restarts its network services after you apply changes in the TCP IP or Windows CIFS screens Workgroup Security Mode A workgroup is a group of computers on a network that can share files On the NSA use Workgroup Security Mode if the user names and passwords for these computers are maintained on the NSA This is suitable for users using the Common Internet File System CIFS protocol for remote file access in a small to medium sized office Windows Domain Security Mode A domain is a group of computers that are part of a network and share a common directory database On the NSA use Windows domain security mode if you want centralized management of shared resources services and user on a centralized Windows based domain controller You can create users and groups on the centralized Windows based domain controller such as an active server directory a
325. other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it 1s a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your a
326. ove Hot Spare disk 0 from Disk Slog ID RAID Raid FAILED Storage EMERG There is a RAID Degraded RAID Storage CRIT Please check disk 0 Which disk to RAID check when degrade Storage NOTICE Auto Repair Degraded RAID by Disk Slog ID RAID disk 0 Storage NOTICE Raid Rebuild Percentage 0 20 40 60 80 RAID 100 Storage INFO Create Internal Normal Volume Volume Name Size Volume 101 Size 1 MB SUCCESS Storage INFO Create Internal Crypto Volume Volume Name Size Volume 101 Size 1 MB using PASSWD SUCCESS Storage INFO Create Internal Crypto Volume Volume Name Size Volume 0 using USB Key Size 1 MB SUCCESS Storage INFO Create External Normal Volume Volume Name Filesystem Volume 101 1 SUCCESS type Storage INFO Create External Crypto Volume Volume Name Filesystem Volume 101 1 using PASSWD SUCCESS Storage INFO Create External Crypto Volume Volume 0 using USB Key 1 SUCCESS Storage INFO Delete Volume SUCCESS Volume Storage INFO Create USB Key SUCCESS Volume Storage INFO Duplicate USB Key SUCCESS Volume Storage INFO Rename Internal Volume to Volume Name Volume O SUCCESS Volume Name Filesystem Storage INFO Expand Volume Increased Size Volume Size 0 MB SUCCESS Storage INFO Lock Internal Volume Volume SUCCESS NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix A Log Messages Table 114 Log Messages FEATURE SEVERITY M
327. own locked or degraded If it is then see Section 12 2 on page 249 The snapshot or backup does not run at the time configured e Check that the correct time is configured on the NSA e Check that the NSA is able to access the time server from which it gets the time see Chapter 5 on page 121 12 6 External USB Disks m The COPY LED is red Copying files from a USB device failed The USB device may not be compatible with the NSA Press the COPY button to set the COPY LED back to green Try saving the files onto a computer and then from the computer to the NSA through the network connection NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 12 Troubleshooting 256 NSA 2401 User s Guide Product Specifications See also the Getting to Know Your NSA chapter for a general overview of the key features 13 1 Feature Tables These are the main external physical features Table 109 Physical Features 2 USB Ports Expand storage capacity by attaching compatible USB version 2 hard drives to the USB ports 2 Gigabit Ethernet Ports The 10 100 1000 Mbps auto negotiating Ethernet ports allow the NSA to detect the speed of incoming transmissions and adjust appropriately without manual intervention They allow data transfers of either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network Use 8 wire Ethernet cables for Gigabit connections The ports are also auto crossover MDI MDI X
328. page 299 for more information on browsers and certificates 1 Close your web browser and open it again to reset its session with the NSA Log in and click Maintenance gt SSL Select Force HTTPS and click Apply Figure 54 Maintenance gt SSL Force HTTPS TLS SSL Connections A Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network Services 4 Force HTTPs Install System Default CA This action will install the system default C4 in the trusted CA list of your browser Stepi Download the default CA file Benissa Step Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser Modify the Existing Certificate fi Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Edit a self signed C4 certificate Stepl Edit the Self signed Certificate Step Download the self signed CA file Beris Step3 Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser C Create a Certificate To Be Authorized By My Own Certificate Authority NSA 2401 User s Guide 15 Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 A warning screen pops up if applying your change may disconnect some users Click Apply to continue Figure 55 Maintenance gt SSL gt Force HTTPS Warning DT Warning Confirmation The following users are currently connected If you decide to continue they may be disconnected Username IP Address admin 192 168 1 33 Gonzo 192 168 1 33 Performing this operation vill cau
329. peed 119 FAT16 150 FAT32 150 FCC interference statement 353 file access 85 browsing 40 path 43 restricted 88 security 85 storage system 260 system 150 troubleshooting access 254 File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS see FTPES File Transfer Protocol see FTP files deleting 41 FileZilla 81 fingerprint 79 firmware 241 specifications 260 upgrade 241 version 1 119 200 folder 38 40 access 85 browsing 40 name restrictions 45 security 85 troubleshooting access 254 folders copying 42 deleting 41 moving 42 forgot password 251 front panel LEDs 32 FTP 81 223 224 anonymous access 225 character set 225 connection limit 225 idle timeout FTP 225 over Explicit TLS 81 settings 169 FTPES 81 223 NSA 2401 User s Guide Index FTPES FTP over explicit TLS SSL 82 G Genie Backup Manager 258 license keys 220 port conflict 198 Gigabit Ethernet 31 257 global icons 38 48 labels 38 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 333 GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE 326 group name restrictions 185 group names 185 groups 58 182 H hard drive 125 external 39 internal 39 manufacturers 31 recommendations 132 see also disk sleep time 243 hardware specifications 259 help icon 48 home icon 49 hot spare 137 155 HTTP over SSL see HTTPS HTTPS 75 229 239 humidity 260 hyper links 49 HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer see HTTPS icons 38 about 48 administration 48 common 51 global 38 48
330. penSSL Your Certificates icati Peer SSL Certificates i Organization Common Name Remove Verify Proxy Stylesheets a Organization ZyXEL Organization zy m 23 Organizational unit XYZ200 A Oraanizational unit XYZ C t Om sten rv tie bz 4 MA el 4 gt o Valid from Wednesday 21 May 2008 06 42 35 am GMT Valid until Saturday 21 May 2011 06 42 35 am GMT Browser Identification Cache Policy Permanently Vg Until gt Reject Plugins J Prompt MDS digest 3F 9A 76 6E A9 F5 07 41 BE 4C 8B 8B A2 D3 F0 2F Performance Accept Help Defaults w OK 4 The next time you go to the web site that issued the public key certificate you just removed a certification error appears BS There is no confirmation when you remove a certificate authority so be absolutely certain you want to go through with it before clicking the button NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates NSA 2401 User s Guide Open Source Licences Information herein is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose except the express written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation This Product includes software devel
331. penSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core Qopenssl org Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDI
332. pload its log files to the syslog server Server Server Address Enter the syslog server s IP address in this field when the Enable Syslog Server option is selected Syslog Choose the type of logs to upload to the syslog server See Section 11 2 0 1 on page 231 for information on the different log classes Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window 11 2 5 Export Log Click Maintenance gt Log and then select a log from the list To export it click the Export Log icon Your web browser prompts you to download the log file as a CSV Comma Separated Value file type which is compatible with Microsoft Excel and other spreadsheet software 236 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens 11 3 Configuration Click Maintenance gt Configuration to open a screen where you can backup and restore the NSA configuration settings or restore the device to its factory default settings Figure 199 Maintenance gt Configuration Backup Current Configuration Settings Click the Backup button to save the current configuration of our system to your local computer Include Volume Encryption Settings To restore previously saved configuration file to your system browse to the location of the configuration file and click Restore Stepl Restore File Croce MEN Step Select Restore Type Restore Configuration Restore Volume Encryption Settings Reset to Defa
333. printable characters no single and double quotes i Note Please turn on the Javascript and Activex control setting on Internet Explorer Login Reset Copyright 2008 by ZyXEL Communications Corp 2 Click the Gonzo share Figure 33 Gonzo s My NSA Screens Es Password he My NSA My Shares Meer Stora m Applianes 5 Gonzo angi aa Other Shares NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 Open the Strategy share Figure 34 Gonzo Share Screen Share Browsing t SG Create Folder Upload Delete Move Copy Current Location Gonzo recycle 2008 09 16 09 37 36 Strategy 2008 09 16 09 43 04 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Click Upload Figure 35 Strategy Folder Screen ii co r z E ile Create Folder Upload Delete Move Copy Current Location Gonzo Strategy m l 2009 Plan doc 35 00 KB 2008 09 04 15 17 07 5 Browse to the 2010 2014 Plans doc file and click Apply Figure 36 Upload Files Screen Upload Files File 1 Browse File 2 Browse File 3 Browse File 4 Browse File 5 Browse Cl Mote The size of uploaded files can t be more than 2 GB 3 4 How to Find the NSA in OS X Here s how to find the NSA 2401 OS X This example uses Mac OS X 10 5 Leopard NSA 2401 User s Guide 65 Chapter 3 Tutorials 1 Click the Finder icon in the dock Figure 37 Opening the Finder Finder
334. pts cause a reallocation not read errors This can be difficult to test since only direct I O writes to the disk cause reallocations not cached writes 198 Uncorrectable Sector Count Low This is the number of errors reading or writing a sector that were not correctable An increase in this value is an indicator of disk surface defects or mechanical subsystem problems 199 UltraDMA CRC Error Count Low This is the number of data transfer errors through the interface cable according to the ICRC Interface Cyclic Redundancy Check Write Error Rate Low This is the total number of errors in writing sectors Multi Zone Error 200 Rate This is the number of read write head off track errors If the value is not zero make a backup This is the number of data address mark errors This could also be a different manufacturer specific attribute This is the number of ECC Error Correction Code errors 201 Soft Read Error Rate 202 Data Address Mark Errors 203 Run Out Cancel 204 Soft ECC Correction L L L OW OW OW Ow This is the number of errors corrected by software ECC Error Correction Code NO O1 Low Thermal Asperity Rate TAR This is the number of thermal asperity errors Thermal asperity is a read signal spike caused by sensor temperature rise due to touching the disk surface or contaminant particles This is the height of the hard drive s read write heads abov
335. pying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a l
336. r is an HTML based management interface that allows easy NSA setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 Mozilla firefox 1 0 Netscape Navigator 7 0 or later versions of these browsers The recommended screen resolution 1s 1024 by 768 pixels or higher In order to use the Web Configurator you need to allow JavaScripts 2 2 Accessing the NSA Web Configurator Make sure your NSA is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 2 1 Access the NSA Using the NDU If you don t know the IP address of the NSA then use the NDU to find it Refer to the Quick Start Guide to see how to install and run the NDU NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 3 NDU Main Screen gt He neaddll 1921 68 1 34 Local IP 192 168 1 33 C Copyright 2008 by Zus EL Communications Corp From the NDU main page click the icon under Admin to see the Web Configurator screen login screen 2 2 2 Web Browser Access Open your browser and type in the IP address of the NSA If the NSA does not get IP addresses from a DHCP server the default LANI IP address is 192 168 1 3 and the default LAN2 IP address is 192 168 100 3 Figure 4 NDA URL File Edit Viem Favorites Tools Help sack x gt m f Pp Search 2 3 Login The default user name and password are admin and 1234 respectively Enter your user name and password then click Login Non admin users can cha
337. raded array so it s recommended that you replace the faulty disk and repair the array as soon as you can Down Indicates that a disk array is down and cannot be fixed Healthy Green indicates a healthy volume The volume is OK and the file system is functioning properly Locked Volume Indicates that the volume has been locked with encryption The password is set the first time the volume is locked Unlocked Volume Indicates that the volume has an encryption layer than can be activated on the fly The first time you lock a volume this encryption layer is created Down Indicates that a volume is down and can not be fixed The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION CPU Usage This displays a summary of CPU usage by all current processes Click the Refresh icon to update this display It also automatically updates itself every 10 seconds Note If too many users are using the NSA then the NSA may appear sluggish 118 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 4 Status Screen Table 17 Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION This displays the current temperature near the NSA s CPU The NSA generates an emergency log if the temperature goes out of the normal operating range If the temperature goes even higher the NSA shuts down automatically to avoid damage from overheating If the NSA overheats make sure the fans are working and it is in a well ventilated place Click the
338. reate up to four JBOD arrays e one or two JBOD arrays and one RAID 0 or RAID I array e two RAID 0 arrays or two RAID I arrays e one RAID 0 array and one RAID I array e one RAID 5 array with three disks and one JBOD array e one array using one of RAID 10 RAID 5 or RAID5_ 3 hot spare e RAID 10 RAID 1 0 offers maximum data security but just 50 of the storage space RAID 10 RAID 1 0 is a nested RAID where two RAID I arrays are stored on the physical disks with a RAID 0 array on top You can recover all data even if two disks not in the same RAID 1 array fail If two disks in the same RAID 1 array fail then all data in the array is lost If two disks in different RAID I arrays fail then you effectively have a RAID 0 configuration e RAID 5 provides more storage space and protection against up to one disk failure RAID 5 uses 75 of the available space for your data All data can be recovered if one disk fails If two disks fail then all data in the array is lost If one disk fails the array is degraded and will perform more slowly than a healthy array You should replace the faulty disk and re synchronize the array to attain previous performance e RAIDS with hot spare automatically recovers the array if a disk fails It operates as a three disk RAID 5 array with the fourth disk on standby If a disk in the 3 disk RAID5 array fails the NSA automatically uses the standby disk to re synchronize the array so it gets back to opera
339. reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University nor of the Laboratory may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This Product includes php software under the PHP License The PHP License version 3 0 Copyright c 1999 2006 The PHP Group All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification is permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions an
340. rhood ere Neighborhood Network HK pees Neighborhood iDisk m Neighborhood Applications DBA Guss Neighborhood ST Utilities HU nnn Neighborhood Server Recent Folders P desktop ae Mac Server Go to Folder OEG Connect to Server K NSA 2401 User s Guide 67 Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 When the Connect to Server dialog box opens type smb and the IP address of your NSA 2401 or click Browse to find it in your network Click Connect Figure 41 Connecting to the NSA A Network a Eo im View Quick Look Name Date Modified 11800 nb A ONO Connect to Server Server Address 7 108 smb 172 16 37 108 ote de h HD Favorite Servers Browse Min 5 Once connected you can now access the NSA from the finder or directly from the desktop 3 5 How to Configure Security Use these tutorials to help you secure your NSA See also Chapter 6 on page 125 for details on encrypting volumes 3 5 1 Configuring Security for Web Configurator Sessions These tutorials show you how to configure security for the NSA s Web Configurator sessions You will customize the NSA s self signed SSL certificate and distribute it to your users 68 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 5 1 1 Customizing the NSA s Certificate 1 Click Maintenance gt SSL and then select Edit a self signed CA certificate and click Edit Figure 42 Maintenance gt SSL Force HTTPS TLS SSL Conn
341. riginally have two disks configured in a RAID 1 array and you then buy two more disks and want to configure all four at RAID 5 you should first back up all your data on those disks see the Genie Backup Manager utility on the included CD and then restore your data later after you create the new array Below is a table that summarizes some attributes of the various array levels as supported on the NSA For capacity and storage efficiency S is the size of the smallest drive in the array and N is the number of drives in the array Performance rankings are approximations Table 24 RAID Array Levels Quick Comparison Write Performance YYY YYY A Storage efficiency means what percent of the possible storage capacity can be used This table assumes all drives in a RAID array are of identical size A JBOD array provides capacity equal to the sum of all disks in the array The following is a guide to help you choose a RAID level depending on how many disks you have installed in the NSA See Section 6 9 on page 151 for technical background on JBOD and the RAID levels used on the NSA One Disk With only one disk you must use JBOD All disk space is used for your data none is used for backup If the disk fails then you lose all the data on that array You can later add another disk to your one disk JBOD array without having to re create shares access rights and so on or create a different JBOD array and create new shares acces
342. rmware is being uploaded to the NSA Do not turn off or reset the NSA while the firmware update is in progress Figure 204 Maintenance gt FW Upgrade Firmware Upgrade To Upgrade the firmware browse to the location of the binary BIN upgrade file and click Upload Upgrade files can be downloaded from the website If the upgrade file is compressed 2IP file you must first extract the binary BIM file In some cases YOU may need to reconfigure this device after upgrading You are currently using firmware version 1 00 4FF 0jb4 Firmware File Browse The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Maintenance gt FW Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION Enter the location of the firmware file you want to upload Browse Click this open a Browse dialog box to find the file on your computer if you don t want to manually enter the location Click this to upload the new firmware The NSA automatically restarts after you upgrade Wait until the restart completes before accessing the NSA again If you interrupt the upgrade then the NSA may become unusable Click this to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 6 Power Management Click Maintenance gt Power Management to open this screen where you can set the NSA s power management settings 242 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 205 Maintenance gt Power Management a Hard Drive Sleep Time Settings i Note Se
343. rnal hard drives or external USB devices that you can access but not manage NSA 2401 User s Guide 39 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2 5 1 My NSA Share Browsing Screen Click My NSA and then click a share to open the following screen Use the My NSA share browsing screens to see and access share contents e Click a folder s name to go into the folder e Click a file s name to be able to save the file to your computer e Click the play icon to play the file At the time of writing this is only for MP3 files e Click to the right of a file or folder name to select it e Use the SHIFT key to select a range of entries Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple individual entries Figure 9 My NSA Share Browsing Share Browsing gr Create Folder Upload Delete Move Copy Current Location Test MyTest 2008 07 21 08 45 37 Example 2008 07 21 08 44 24 CIMG3822 1PG 2008 07 21 08 45 54 CIMG3823 1PG 2008 07 21 08 45 56 The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 5 My NSA Share Browsing Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Create Folder Click this icon to open a screen where you can create a new folder Create Folder Folder Name Upload Click this button to copy a file from your computer to this location in the NSA 40 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 5 My NSA Share Browsing Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Delete Sel
344. rnal volume 147 file system 150 key 142 143 149 locate 146 lock 148 scan 147 unlock 148 volume 149 user 46 access permissions 38 accounts 55 conflict user disk quota 177 conflict users 177 group names 185 groups 182 icon 52 list 175 name restrictions 179 non admin 180 password management 46 passwords 258 quota 178 screens 37 storage quota 178 user level screens 49 username 36 using increased RAID capacity 109 UTF 8 45 V volume 125 174 choosing a storage method 133 create 142 149 creating 138 crypto 141 148 down 139 edit 142 encryption 126 healthy 139 lock 141 NSA 2401 User s Guide 361 Index locked 126 139 name restrictions 45 password 142 149 RAID 1 153 scan 140 status 134 summary 139 unlock 140 141 146 unlocked 126 139 USB key 142 143 149 W warranty 354 period 354 web browsers share access tutorial 62 supported 261 Web Configurator 35 browsers 35 logout 38 49 troubleshooting access 252 web help 48 icon 38 web security 75 Windows 31 Windows domain administrator 167 administrator password 168 leave 168 security mode 165 Windows Explorer 61 workgroup 177 258 workgroup security mode 165 write performance 91 218 affected by snapshots 91 218 X XFS 150 174 Z ZyXEL Communications Corporation 353 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 354 362 NSA 2401 User s Guide
345. rnannennnnnennnnnennnn 220 Table 87 Protect gt Snapshot gt Snapshot Images _ 0 cccsecceeceseseeceesesesescecescuseseeeeseeseseeeesseeeses 220 TENT jr 225 Table S9 Applicalions Prini Se crosses oo ee ti ee eesti 226 Table 90 Applications gt Print Server gt Rename ae ktenknkk daa 227 Table 91 Appicalons CODY BUTOI aS 227 Table 92 Applicat ns gt Copy Button EGIT cnisicieicanccnieeuniienstenaninnninnaernseriemcniens 228 Table 93 Applications gt Copy Button gt Edit ciccscaccic tie cascpiecevecnctinicanannctpicapensniuianengeledceeaocuigiaerseaotieismened 228 Table 94 Maintenance gt Log ICONS rrurrrrrnnrennnnnenrnanernannernnnnnrnnanennnansennansennanssnnansannnunnnnnansennnssennnessennnn 230 Table 95 Maintenance gt Log gt Search Filters hen Gd 232 Table 96 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Log Records Configuration ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 233 Table 97 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Config gt Buzzer Priority rrrrnennnnnennnnnerrnanernnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnrennnnsennnnne 233 Table 98 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Mail Setting rrrrrrerrnnnenrnnnrenrannennnnnennnn 234 Table 99 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Report Setting rrrrrrrnnnnennnnnvnnnnnenvnnnennnn 235 Table 100 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Syslog Server Setting rrrrrrnnrrvvrnnnnre 236 Table 101 Maintenance gt Configuration ua
346. rray display under the array s volumes NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 19 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Status continued LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Hot Spare This is the array s standby drive if it has one There are not disks displays if the array does not have a standby drive These are installed disks that do not already belong to a disk array 6 3 Disk You can view information on the NSA internal disks in this screen Disk Replacement Restrictions See the Quick Start Guide for information on replacing disks in the NSA When replacing a disk in a degraded or down RAID array the new disk must be at least the same size or bigger than the array s smallest disk so the NSA can restore all data in the array For optimal performance all disks in the array should be the same model capacity and speed For example if you have RAID with 250 GB disks you must put in a 250 GB or bigger disk as a replacement in order to restore all original data in that array If you use a bigger disk the extra space on the disk will not be used BS The NSA automatically repairs a degraded RAID if you insert an empty disk without an existing file system Otherwise when you replace a disk you must go to the Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screen select the degraded array and click Repair 6 3 1 Internal Disks Screen Click Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk to display the following
347. rrnnnnnrvrrrrnnnnnrrrvrrnnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnn 142 Figure 132 Selecting tbe USB Device vha 144 Fig re 139 Cressing a Duplicate USB KOy nisaidia a Eaa ai 144 Figure 134 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Eject rrnrrrnevvrnnnnnrrevvvnnnnnnrvvnnnnnnnnvnnnvnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsrnennnnnnnsee 145 Figure 135 Creating a Duplicate USB Key Insert mmmmnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrnrovvnvvnnnnnnnnrsrrnnnnnvrnnnnnnennsssnnnnnnnnnnssenn 145 Figure 136 Storage gt External Storage gt Disk ois ccrentictoranesdawtarancrtiaissearevioaoraansyadionancctiaidarsanetaeserumanic 145 Figure 137 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnsrennnnnnnnnennn 147 Figure 138 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume gt Create mmrrnnnrnrvvvvrnnnnervvnrnnnnnnrrnvvnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnn 149 Figure 139 Stand Alone Teaming Mode scccsrisasraradincnass raanandsnareadsdanssiaeiincereraciainaisninabarielnaaraiaied 160 Figure 140 Fault Tolerance Teaming Mode sa snannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnesnnnnsnnnnrenrnrrrnrnreernnneranrnrenrrneennnreennreeenntenene 161 Fe 141 Loa Balancing Teaming MOGE asked Ea 161 Figure 142 Link Aggregation Teaming Mode rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnsnnvnnnnnnssvnnnnnnnnassnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnusene 161 A PM gg EE rere seein it erate oe NE i 162 FOWO ee Pl aie TOR Pusse enee 163 Figure 145 Active Directory Example Application rrrrnnnrrnvrnnnnvvennnnvrrrnnnnnrennnnnereenrnnerrennnnerrennnnereennnnnn 166 F
348. rs 0 sy minutes a FP a O L Li Li a Report The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Report Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Alert Select the kind of log s to be sent out during mail alerts Alerts are issued when a critical or system event requires immediate attention See Section 11 2 0 1 on page 231 for information on the different log classes Report Time Set the frequency with which log files are mailed out Report Select the kind of log s to be sent out during mail reports Reports are issued at set intervals See Section 11 2 0 1 on page 231 for information on the different log classes Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens 11 2 4 3 Syslog Server Setting This screen lets you set up the NSA to upload log files to a syslog server Figure 198 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Syslog Server Setting Log Report Configuration Report Setting Syslog Server Setting Enable Syslog Server Server Address s Please select which log categories you wish to include in the log report Syslog The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Syslog Server Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable Syslog Select this option to have the NSA u
349. rts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact your vendor You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought the device at http www zyxel com web support warranty info php Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com 354 NSA 2401 User s Guide A about icon 48 access configuration 44 189 Access Control List see ACL accessing share contents 40 account names 179 ACL 85 174 175 190 Active Directory see AD active sessions 120 AD 165 add disk 137 administration screens 38 47 ALM LED 32 troubleshooting 250 ano
350. rvrrnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnsennnnnnnen 125 HE NEA Storage Status FN tdcievra ves sveiscixtrwinvesremnduaieeiarasdeeetssiantanisiarsdsdeesanetaerderdies 127 EE EEE ERE NE 128 KR PTE EE EE EE EEEE 128 LENIN 129 FE eee aeiiae dikei iniaa kaana iE 132 MILL vr 132 EEE EEE NK 134 PANNEN 135 Cem BR ERE EE TE Te mere sree ee 138 Go Merai roume Soo een eee ene Meee one ee a 139 6 6 1 Creating or Editing an Internal Volume rrrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnrnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 142 GJE EE ERE EE 143 6 7 External Storage Disk Screen rrrrnnnrannnnrrvnnnnnnnnrrennnnnnnnsrnnrnnnnnnsennnnnnnnssrnnnnnnnnssennnnnnsnsennn 145 DE JE aC EE EE NR 147 6 8 1 Creating or Editing an External Volume rrrnnnannnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnennnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnnnene 149 TN NNN een ee pene a One er ene rien a oer errs ne printer ernnnr er 151 ee EE RENEE 151 ENN 152 EE go EE EE EE EE EE 153 EE EE EE too ieccieeces 153 DET Lenkene 154 SE REE EEE EEE oceme E 155 NN ET 155 Doo RAD and Dala PN Beep renner eenien e ia ir 156 Cra ARAO AG 156 Chapter 7 E E AR 159 TA Nolwork Screens IVI PE EE ia eaa Eaa 159 NSA 2401 User s Guide Table of Contents 7 1 1 What You Can Do in the Network Screens icc eset sisiatvisdvereciavavecsavidtervorianedvaresneveres 159 7 1 2 What You Need to Know About the Network Screens rrrrrnnnnnnnnvrnrnnnnrrrrnnnnnnrrnennnn 159 RTP NNN 160 TEN PEN 162 MN S osiinsa niaaa eiaa aaki iak ai 164 Tal GE POE 166 FE DE EEE EEE
351. rypt the volume by manually entering a password Enter a password for encrypting the volume Password Confirm Re type the password to make sure you entered it correctly Password Prompt Enter a hint to help you recall the password if you forget it USB Key The USB field and button display if you choose to encrypt the volume by USB key Select a USB key device that you created previously or select a USB device that you want to make into a USB key If the USB device is not already connected connect it and click the Refresh icon The NSA s upper USB port is USB1 and its lower USB port is USB2 It is recommended that you use a USB device to store a volume key only and not also use it for storage NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 36 Storage gt External Storage gt Volume Create continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Create USB Drive Click this button to go to screens you can use to create a password for unlocking the volume and store the password on a connected USB device You also use the screens to create copies of the USB key See Section 6 6 2 on page 143 for details Note Create duplicate USB keys now since you cannot make them later Without a USB key you cannot access the volume if it becomes locked All of the volume s data will be unusable Apply Click this button to save your changes back to the NSA Click this button to discard your changes and close this screen 6 9 Technical
352. s Backups are more reliable than snapshots 2 Backups are more reliable than snapshots So have backups available in case snapshots become invalid 3 Backups may require several hours depending on the amount of data you have to back up it s a good idea to schedule backups at non peak times so you should take a snapshot of your data before the backup is run If a file becomes corrupt during the backup you can still revert to the previous snapshot and back up again 4 If files to be backed up are open at the time of the backup then make sure that snapshots are allowed If they are allowed and files are open at the time the backup is run then backup first takes a snapshot and then copies the files from this snapshot BS A backup proceeds without the snapshot if there is not enough space for the snapshot but if an open file changes during the backup the backup fails NSA 2401 User s Guide 199 Chapter 9 Protect Screens Finding Out More See Chapter 6 on page 125 for more information on RAID See Section 3 7 on page 89 for backup and snapshot tutorials 9 2 NSA Backup Screens Use the Protect gt Backup menus to create data backups to another volume an external USB disk drive or a computer or another NSA over the network The NSA deletes old backups according to the backup job s purge policy see Section 9 2 2 on page 202 before creating a new backup If you have a backup scheduled to begin at midnight then at that t
353. s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 3 7 1 Creating a Snapshot Job Here s an example of configuring hourly snapshots for a volume 1 Click Protect gt Snapshot gt Add Job Figure 76 Protect gt Snapshot ss Protect Snapshot Snapshot Status i PIG Ga Add Job J Snapshot Edit Job Take Delete Date Time Image Snapshot Selected ACCESS Now Jobisi Internal Storage Snapshot Jobs External Storage TCPFIP Windows CIFS HFS Users Groups Shares Backup Restore Snapshot Backup Software NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Enter a name for the job select the volume of which to take snapshots set the number of snapshot images to keep 2 in this example For the frequency set it to occur every hour Click Apply LES It s strongly recommended to set the maximum amount of snapshots setting as low as possible as a high amount of snapshots can significantly reduce the volume s file write performance Figure 77 Protect gt Snapshot gt Add Job Add a New Snapshot Job Job Mame hourly example Volume Name volume x Max Number of Snapshot Imagefs 2 w Frequency Hourly i Every how many hours 1 On which minute of the hour o 5 Cl Mote You can edit the related settings in the Snapshot Image Access menu or go to Sharing page to edit the snapshots share 3 2 Configuring Snapshot Image Access Taking a snapshot creates an image file that you use to restore fi
354. s Overview This chapter introduces different ways of protecting data on the NSA and explains how to use the Protect screens to create and schedule snapshots and backups There are a variety of ways to protect your data on the NSA Below is a summary table of preventative steps you should do in advance to protect against various problems Table 67 Protection Methods Overview PROBLEM RECOMMENDED PREVENTATIVE ACTION PREVENTATIVE ACTION Unexpected ea behavior after Back up the r A configuration file before you make configuration changes major configuration changes On Your Computer Use the Genie Backup Manager Corrupt data files Use anti virus software on your computer Data infected by virus Data files incorrectly deleted or modified On the NSA Create regular snapshots recommended for volumes Corrupt data files with data that changes often Data infected by virus Use anti virus software on your computer to scan files from others before saving them on the NSA You can also use anti virus software on your computer to scan the NSA for viruses On the NSA Use RAID Hard drive malfunction NSA malfunction Back up data to another NSA or computer or an external Network down USB hard drive Data files incorrectly deleted or modified Natural disaster such as a fire or earthquake occurs where your NSA is located Hacking Place the NSA behind a hardware based firewall Ideally the firewall should include deep packet inspecti
355. s for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so the
356. s if the current normalized value of the attribute is less than or equal to the threshold Updated This indicates when the hard drive updates the value for this attribute Always means the hard drive updates this attribute during normal operation and during offline activities Offline means the hard drive only updates this attribute when no one is accessing the hard drive NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 23 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Full Summary continued LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION When Failed This column indicates when if ever the attribute failed An attribute has failed if the normalized value is less than or equal to the threshold This displays if the attribute is not failing now and has never failed in the past FAILING NOW This displays if the attribute s current normalized value is less than or equal to the threshold In_the_past This displays if the attribute s current normalized value is greater than the threshold but the worst recorded value is less than or equal to the threshold Raw Value This is the attribute s unprocessed raw data These values show exact amounts of time or numbers of attempts or errors The meaning to the raw values is specific to the hard drive manufacturer Table 42 on page 156 has some information about whether a higher or lower individual raw S M A R T attribute value is better OK Click this button to close the screen
357. s leaving the domain You must also enter the Windows domain administrator password This option is only available with active directory domains Click Forcefully Leave Domain to have the NSA leave the domain without notifying the Windows server domain controller Apply Click here to save your changes back to the NSA Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh 7 4 NFS Screen Click Network gt NFS to display the NFS screen Configure this screen to let computers use NFS to access the NSA Figure 148 Network gt NFS NFS Service gt E 9 Z 8 Enable Disable Add NFS NFS Edit NFS Delete NFS NFS Share Session Share NFS Server Server Shares The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 45 Network gt NFS Icons ICON DESCRIPTION Enable NFS Server gt Click this icon to allow access to the NFS shares Disable NFS Server Click this icon to stop access to the NFS shares Click this icon to create a new NFS share KE ne 168 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 7 Network Screens Table 45 Network gt NFS Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Edit NFS Share Select an existing NFS share and click this icon to open a screen where you can change the share s settings NFS Session Click this icon to open a screen that shows who is currently connected to the NSA using NFS Delete NFS Share s Select an existing NFS share and click this icon to remove the share Sort Click a column
358. s rights and so on Two Disks You may choose JBOD RAID 0 or RAID 1 With two disks you could create one or two JBOD arrays e JBOD gives flexibility and maximum disk space usage You can later add another disk to your JBOD array without having to re create shares access rights and so on or create a different JBOD array and create new shares access rights and so on e one RAID 0 or RAID I array e RAID 0 offers higher performance but no data security It has the fastest read and write performance since it reads and writes to both disks simultaneously but if one disk fails you lose all your data in the array Performance may matter more than data security to gamers for example This method may also be acceptable for data that is already backed up somewhere else e RAID 1 offers data security although the performance is slower than RAID 0 Since RAID 1 mirrors data onto a second disk you can recover all data if one disk fails NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Three Disks Choose a combination of JBOD and or RAID 0 or RAID 1 for the reasons already outlined With three disks you could create up to three JBOD arrays e one RAID I array with a hot spare one single disk JBOD array and one two disk RAID 0 or one two disk RAID 1 array e one RAID 5 array Four Disks In addition to the JBOD RAID 0 and RAID I choices you may choose RAID 10 RAID 5 or RAIDS 3 hot spare With four disks you could c
359. s should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library NSA 2401 User s Guide 327 Appendix D Open Source Licences We call this license the Lesser General Public Lic
360. schedule interval Next Run Time This field displays the schedule for the next snapshot in yyyy mm dd hh mm ss format 9 4 1 Creating Editing Snapshots In the Protect gt Snapshot screen click the Create Job icon to open the following screen Use this screen to create a new snapshot job You can also select an existing snapshot job in the Protect gt Snapshot screen and click the Edit Job icon BES It s strongly recommended to set the Maximum Number of Snapshots Image s as low as possible as a high amount of snapshots can significantly reduce the NSA s file write performance See Table 112 on page 260 for the maximum number of snapshots allowed in the NSA You can only create one snapshot job per volume Figure 181 Protect gt Snapshot gt Add Job Job Name P Volume Name volume l Max Number of Snapshot Image s f Frequency Hourly Every how many hours On which minute of the hour Q E Cl Note You can edit the related settings in the Snapshot Image Access menu or go to Sharing page to edit the snapshots share 218 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Protect gt Snapshot gt Add Job LABEL DESCRIPTION Job Name This is a required field that uniquely identifies the snapshot Type from 1 to 15 characters You can use alphanumeric characters A Z 0 9 and underscores The first char
361. screen This screen provides information on disks installed in the NSA Figure 125 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk aw rh Wizards Eject SM AGT IEEE a jbod jbodD1D4D3 Seagate STIL2082745 3 42 111 79 GB Healthy DE jbod jbodDIiD4D3 WDC WDOSO0044VS 002TB 01 0 465 76 GB Healthy amet jbod jbodD1iD4D3 Seagate ST32508208C0E 3 40 232 859 GB Healthy 128 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 20 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk Icons DESCRIPTION Wizards Click this icon to open the Disk Setup Wizard to create a new disk array or volume Select a hard drive and click this icon to shut it down Do this before removing a hard drive to help increase its usable lifetime Note Ejecting a disk from a JBOD or RAIDO array causes the array to fail and the data to be lost re you sure you want to eject this disk Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect Select a hard drive and click this icon to display details about the drive and its status The S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology monitoring system detects and reports on hard drive reliability indicators to help anticipate failures This feature can be useful for troubleshooting Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again t
362. scribes this screen Table 30 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Create LABEL DESCRIPTION RAID Label Select the disk array upon which you want to create the volume This option is only available when you create a volume Volume Name Type a volume name from 1 to 31 characters To avoid confusion it is highly recommended that each volume use a unique name Acceptable characters are all alphanumeric characters A Z 0 9 and spaces dashes _ underscores and periods The first character must be alphanumeric The last character cannot be a space Size Enter the number of megabytes to use for the volume Click the screen to update the Available Capacity display You can edit a volume later to make it larger but not smaller You may want to leave some capacity on the array un allocated to volumes since the NSA uses that space to store snapshots So the bigger the volumes are the less space there is for snapshots See Chapter 9 on page 197 for more on snapshots Available Capacity This field shows the total storage space available on the array and how much of it this volume will take up NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens Table 30 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Create continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encrypted Select this check box and an option from the drop down list box to encrypt the volume This option is only available when you create a volume The NSA automati
363. se some network services to temporarily disconnect 3 The NSA logs you out and automatically redirects your formerly non secure HTTP connection to a secure HTTPS connection Your browser may give you a warning about the device s public key certificate Add an exception to allow your browser to bypass the warning Figure 56 Firefox Secure Connection Failed Secure Connection Failed 192 168 1 35 uses an invalid security certificate The certificate is not trusted because itis self signed The certificate is only valid for nsa2401 Error code sec error Untrusted issuer This could be problem with the server s configuration or it could be someone trying to impersonate the server If you have connected to this server successfully in the past the error may be temporary and you can try again later Or vou can add an exception 76 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 Click Add Exception Figure 57 Firefox Secure Connection Failed Secure Connection Failed 192 168 1 35 uses an invalid security certificate The certificate is not trusted because itis self signed The certificate is only valid for nsa2401 Error code sec error Untrusted issuer This could be a problem with the server s configuration or it could be someone trying to impersonate the server If you have connected to this server successfully in the past the error may be temporary and you can try again later Yo
364. ssion or under your control ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason including but not limited to if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License Agreement Upon notification of termination you agree to destroy or return to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies including backup copies have been destroyed All provisions relating to confidentiality proprietary rights and non disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement 12 General This License Agreement shall be construed interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC Taiwan This License Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto This License Agreement the rights granted hereunder the Software and Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of ZyXEL Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto If any part of this License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reason
365. support This field displays whether or not the hard drive has SMART monitoring turned on Click this button to close the screen 130 NSA 2401 User s Guide Device This field displays whether or not the hard drive is in the Control and Monitor Utility for SMART disks database Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 3 2 1 S M A R T Full Summary Set the Device Info Format field to Full Summary to display advanced details about the drive and its status Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order Figure 127 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Full Summary Device Info Format Full Summary H 11 Calibration Retry Count 0x0012 Always 197 Current_Pending Sector 0x0012 Old age Always 193 Load Cycle Count Ox0032 Old age Always 200 Multi Zone Error Rate 0x0008 Old age Offline 198 Offline Uncorrectable 0x0010 Old age Offline 192 Power Off Retract Count 0x0032 Old age Always 1 Power Cycle Count Ox0032 Old age Always q Power On Hours Ox0032 Old age Always 1 Raw Read Error Rate OxO00f Pre fail Always 196 Reallocated_Event_Count 0x0032 Old age Always 5 Reallocated Sector Ct 0x0033 Pre fail Always The following table describes this screen Table 23 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Full Summary LABEL ICON DESCRIPTION Device Info Format Select Brief Summary to display basic information about the drive and its
366. t Internal Storage gt DISK ICONS ooo ecccceecceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeceteeceeseueeeseuseecsueeessaeeesenes 129 Table 21 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk rrrrrrunnnennnnnnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnsnnnnnnnennnnnanennnnnnennnnnnseennnnnnee 129 Table 22 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Brief Summary rrerrnnnnornrnnnnnnnnnnnrennnnnre 130 Table 23 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Disk gt S M A R T Full Summary rrerrrrnnroerrnnnrennrnnnneennnnnre 131 Table 24 RAID Array Levels Quick Comparison cssseeeeeeeseeccecceceecececeeseeceaeeasaaseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 133 Table 25 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID lconS cctv ctsessercisnsmradresrareycewardideverravimaraaveraiecmnaiware 136 Table 26 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID ccesecavecdesenccescedensecsaheegeaccseuienaeccadiadiecsndeaneuseecteceemuererenbened 138 Table 27 Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID gt Create mrrmrrvvrrannrrvevvvnnnnnrernnnnnnnsrvnvrnnnnnssrnvnnnnnsseennnnn 139 Table 28 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume ICONS ccc cceeccccceccaseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeessaaaees 140 Table 29 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume rrrnerrrrnnnnrrrnnrrnnnnsrnnnnnnnnnsrennnnnnnnrsenrnnanssrnnnnnnnnennnnnne 141 Table 30 Storage gt Internal Storage gt Volume Create ooo eeccccscccccseeceeeeececeeeeeeseeeeeseeseseeeeeeseeeeesees 142 labie g1 Selecting the USB DEVICE je GG GAS eiii er
367. t continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Group Membership Choose the groups to which you want to assign this account You can select multiple groups by holding the Ctrl key while you click Before a user can be assigned a group you must first create one or more on the NSA A group is a set of users that have common NSA access rights A user can belong to more than one group More restrictive access rights override less restrictive ones Available Groups These are the groups that have been created on either the NSA or the domain controller Select the group s that you want the account to join and then click the Add Selected Group s button You need to click Apply for the changes to take effect Group Membership These are the groups that the account already belongs to on either the NSA or domain controller Select the group s that you want the account to leave and then click the Remove Selected Group s button You need to click Apply for the changes to take effect Apply Click this to save your changes Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the dialog box 8 2 1 1 Account Names Enter an account name from to 14 characters The first character must be alphabetical case insensitive A Z a z numeric characters are not allowed as the first character The account name can only contain the following characters e Alphanumeric A z 0 9 e Spaces e underscores e periods e dashes Other limitations on accou
368. t you may begin to access the system with its new firmware This page will TRY to automatically redirect you to the web configurator when the restart has completed If you are not redirected please do so manually by clicking the link below or typing the new host address in your browser s address bar If you continue to have problems connecting please use the NDU Network Discovery Utility tool to discover it 11 4 SSL Click Maintenance gt SSL to open this screen where you can turn on HTTPS create a public key certificate or upload a public key certificate that was issued by a known certificate authority Figure 202 Maintenance gt SSL Force HTTPS TLS SS5L Connections fi Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Force HTTPs Install System Default CA This action will install the system default C4 in the trusted CA list of your browser Stepi Download the default CA file feediglesjel Step Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser Modify the Existing Certificate A Caution Modifications of TLS SSL certificate settings will restart network services Edit a self signed CA certificate Stepl Edit the Self signed Certificate StepS Double click on the CA file to install it into your browser C Create a Certificate To Be Authorized By My Own Certificate Authority NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens The followin
369. t Setting rrrrrnnrrrnrnnnvrerrnnnrvennnnn 235 Figure 198 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Report Configuration gt Syslog Server Setting rrrrrrvrrnnnnrrr 236 Figure 199 Maintenance gt Configuration hv 237 Figure 200 Maintenance gt Configuration gt Restore isicsississiscessescavasasecsercareciaiereaiessasersbsesteiansasaveasereees 238 Figure 201 Maintenance gt Configuration gt Restore gt Restarting cccccecseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseaeees 239 Poue cos Te EEE EE cers eee iepop ernie erin inn 239 Figure 203 Maintenance gt SSL gt Edit a Self Signed Certificate rrrrrranrrrrvrnnnrnvrrrnnnrrvrnnnnrenrnnnnrennnnn 241 Figure 204 Maintenance gt FW Upgrade rrrrnnnnrnnvnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnnernnnnnnsernnnnnernnnnnsssnnnnnsssennnnn 242 Figure 205 Maintenance gt Power Management rrrnrnnannennnnnrnnnnnnvnvnnnrnnnnnrnvnnnnnnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnennnnsennnnnsene 243 Figure 206 Maintenance gt Power Management gt Edit mrunnrnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnsene 244 Figure 207 Mamtenance TN ccc eee 246 Figure 208 Maintenance gt Shutdown gt Confirm Restart rrrrrrnnnnnnnnrrrnrnnnnnnovnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnsennnnnnnnnee 246 Figure 209 Maintenance gt Shutdown gt Confirm Shutdown rernrnnnnrvnvnnnnnrvrnnnnnvnvnnnnrennnnnnnennnnnrennnnn 246 Fe PAR TT F L Saarem itari aE DANT EEEN REKO NEEE OEREIN 261 NSA 2401 User s Guide List of Figures TE Ge
370. t either the Original Code or another well known available Covered Code of the Contributor s choice The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form provided the appropriate decompression or de archiving software is widely available for no charge 1 12 You or Your means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under and complying with all of the terms of this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6 1 For legal entities You includes any entity which controls is controlled by or is under common control with You For purposes of this definition control means a the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or b ownership of more than fifty percent 50 of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity 2 Source Code License 2 1 The Initial Developer Grant 342 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world wide royalty free non exclusive license subject to third party intellectual property claims under intellectual property rights other than patent or trademark Licensable by Initial Developer to use reproduce modify display perform sublicense and distribute the Original Code or portions thereof with or without Modifications and or as part of a Larger Work and under Patents Claims infringed by the making using
371. t issued the public key certificate you just removed a certification error appears 3 12 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Opera The following example uses Opera 9 on Windows XP Professional however the screens can apply to Opera 9 on all platforms 1 If your device s Web Configurator is set to use SSL certification then the first time you browse to it you are presented with a certification error 2 Click Install to accept the certificate Figure 278 Opera 9 Certificate signer not found Certificate signer not found The root certificate for this server is not registered You may install this certificate Accept install 1172 20 37 202 The root certificate from 172 20 37 202 is not known to Opera Opera cannot decide if this certificate can be trusted 3 The next time you visit the web site click the padlock in the address bar to open the Security information window to view the web page s security details Figure 279 Opera 9 Security information SQZyXEL US s Secure site The connection to 172 20 37 202 is secure Certificate summary Holder 172 20 37 202 ZyXEL Issuer 172 20 37 202 ZYXEL Expires 05 21 2011 Encryption protocol TLS v1 0 256 bit AES 1024 bit DHE RSA SHA NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix C Importing Certificates Installing a Stand Alone Certificate File in Opera Rather than browsing to a ZyXEL Web Configurator and installing a public
372. t its settings See Section 8 4 2 on page 190 for details ACL Properties Click this icon to open the ACL Configuration screen where you can set up an Access Control List See Section 8 4 2 on page 190 for details NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 56 Sharing gt Shares Icons continued ICON DESCRIPTION Delete Share Select a share from the list then click this icon to remove it 6 Delete Share Ruroh a ee Delete all content associated with this share Do you wish to proceed DFS Click this icon to open the DFS Links screen See Section 8 4 4 on page 194 for details on creating DFS links Share Browser Select a share from the list then click this icon to view its folder and file structure You can also add remove and move files and folders within a share See Section 2 5 1 on page 40 for details on browsing screens Click a column s heading cell to sort the table entries by that column s criteria Click the heading cell again to reverse the sort order ACL Active Indicates that an ACL is being used to manage the files in this share Available Share Indicates the share can be used for file and folder management Unavailable Share Indicates the share cannot be used because the NSA cannot find the physical location of the share Disabled Share Indicates the share is no longer functional If this happens talk to your network administrator The following ta
373. t the Hard Drive Sleep Time to 0 minute s to Disable caution When your Hard Drive s are asleep it may take some time to wake up the hard drive s which may cause services to be non responsive for a brief period of time Hard Drive Sleep Time lo minutes Minimum UPS Capacity Minimum UPS Capacity 50 Yo i Note This feature will not work now because there is no UPS control cable connected i Note The NSA automatically shuts down if the UPS s remaining charge gets down to this level Power On After Power Failure keep Former Status If the system was on when the power failed it restarts automatically when the power is restored If it was off it stays off f Always Power On The system restarts automatically when the power is restored f Always Power Off The system will not restart after power failure You must press the power button manually to restart it Power On f Off Schedule Enable Power Control Schedule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 Maintenance gt Power Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Hard Drive Sleep Time Settings Hard Drive Sleep Time Enter the number of minutes the NSA will sit idle before spinning the hard disks down to sleep Apply Click this to save your changes in this section Minimum UPS Capacity Minimum UPS Capacity When you use an APC Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS with a USB connection to the NSA the NSA shuts itself down if the APC UPS
374. t the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC
375. tation marks 184 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 55 Sharing gt Groups gt Add a New Local Group continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Available Users These are the user accounts that have been created on either the NSA or the domain controller Select the user s that you want to join the group and then click the Add Selected Users button You need to click Apply for the changes to take effect Group Membership These are the groups that the account already belongs to on the NSA Select the group s that you want the user to leave and then click the Remove Selected Group s button You need to click Apply for the changes to take effect Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the dialog box 8 3 1 1 Group Names Enter a group name from to 16 characters The first character must be alphabetical case insensitive A Z a z numeric characters are not allowed as the first character The group name can only contain the following characters e alphanumeric A z 0 9 there is no unicode support e Spaces e underscores e periods e dashes Other limitations on group names are e All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically e Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space e Group names are case insensitive The group name cannot be the same no matter the case as an existing local group or domain group For example if t
376. ted volume Restore Click this to replace the selected NSA configuration settings with those in the file you uploaded NSA 2401 User s Guide 237 Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Table 101 Maintenance gt Configuration DESCRIPTION Reset to Default Click this to restore the NSA to its factory default settings 11 3 1 Restoring the Configuration File When restoring a previously saved configuration file you are presented with a warning screen if any users are connected Figure 200 Maintenance gt Configuration gt Restore O O Warning Confirmation The following users are connecting do you sure to continuet If you continue to do they will be disconnected admin 192 168 3 1 A Performing this operation will cause some network services to temporarily disconnect The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 Maintenance gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Indicates the kind of connection the user has to the NSA Share Name Indicates the share to which the user is currently connected Apply If the NSA is free of all connections then configuration file loads and the NSA restarts itself 238 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 201 Maintenance gt Configuration gt Restore gt Restarting Restarting current Status Waiting for completion of system restart The system is currently restarting now After the system has completed restar
377. the take number of the individual snapshot the time the snapshot was taken in year month day hour minute second format and the name of the snapshot job e The take4_080904160008_hourly_example folder contains a 5yearPlan folder with a 2009 Plan doc file Gonzo can open the 2009 Plan doc file or copy it to another location 3 7 4 Creating a Synchronization Backup Gonzo has an important folder that the German branch office uses on a daily basis Because Gonzo updates the files frequently you decide to create a backup job that has the NSA publish the contents of the folder to an NSA in the German branch office To create a synchronization backup 1 Click Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Figure 80 Protect gt Backup Status Protect Backup Delete Execute Restore Abort Job Date Time Selected Job Now Archive Jobis Internal Storage a ae Pee Tafa External Storage TE Name Description STMT Currently there are no jobs TCP IP Windows CIFS HFS Users Groups Chares Backup nestore Snapshot Backup Software 92 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 2 Name the backup job and select Synchronization Gonzo wants only his current set of files in the remote NSA s folder so you select Mirror to make the target folder identical to the source folder The NSA deletes any other files in the target folder Figure 81 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 1 Add new backup Job Step 1 Job
378. this license No use of any covered code is authorized hereunder except under this disclaimer 8 Termination 8 1 This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License Provisions which by their nature must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive 8 2 If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim excluding declaratory judgment actions against Initial Developer or a Contributor the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as Participant alleging that such Participant s Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2 1 and or 2 2 of this License shall upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either 1 agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant or 11 withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant If within 60 days of notice a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually
379. ting at healthy array speed as quickly as possible RAIDS with hot spare uses 50 of the available space for your data 6 4 2 Array Status You the administrator can see the status of an array in the Status or Storage gt Internal Storage gt RAID screens The NSA has the following classifications for the status of an array e Healthy if all disks in the array are OK and the file system is functioning properly e Resynching when you create or repair a RAID array e Degraded when an array is damaged a hard drive has failed but can be fixed The array is still operational but at risk since all of the array s data may be lost if a second hard drive fails Data access may be slower from a degraded array so it s recommended that you replace the faulty disk and repair the array as soon as you can 134 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens e Down when an array is down and cannot be fixed The array cannot be used and the data is lost Replace the faulty disk s and recreate the array volumes and sharing configuration If an array is down users can no longer transfer files to from the array s shares If an array is degraded then file transfer to from the shares in the degraded array will be slower BS Although there is no explicit message from CIFS that tells users an array is degraded or down you can have the NSA send the administrator an email alert Resynchronizing and Reshaping The NSA resynchroniz
380. tion and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be
381. to the defaults Press the RESET button and hold it for two seconds you will hear one beep and release it The NSA sounds another single beep after you release the button as confirmation 2 7 2 Reload Factory Default Configuration File Do the following to reload the factory default configuration file This resets the admin password and IP address settings to the default settings AND erases all other configurations such as user group share names passwords and share access rights Press the RESET button and hold it for ten seconds you will hear three beeps and release it The NSA sounds three more beeps after you release the button as confirmation NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 17 Reset and Reload Timeline Beep Beep Beep 0 2 10 Seconds Press Release Release button to reset to reload and restart The NSA automatically restarts to complete reloading the factory default configuration file NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 54 NSA 2401 User s Guide Tutorials 3 1 Overview These tutorials show you how to perform the following common tasks How to Configure Sharing page 55 How to Use Shares page 61 How to Find the NSA in OS X page 65 How to Configure Security page 68 Power Resume page 89 How to Use Backups and Snapshots page 89 How to Increase the NSA s Storage Capacity page 106 3 2 How to Configure Sharing This se
382. u should not add an exception if you are using an internet connection that you do not trust completely or if you are not used to seeing warning For this server Get me out of here Add Exception 5 Click Get Certificate Figure 58 Firefox Add Security Exception Add Security Exception x You are about to override how Firefox identifies this site A Legitimate banks stores and other public sites will not ask you to do this 4 Server Location gere et RE Get Certificate Certificate Status T view 7 Permanently store this exception Confirm Security Exception Cancel NSA 2401 User s Guide 11 Chapter 3 Tutorials 6 Before you add an exception verify that the device to which you are trying to connect is providing the correct certificate Click View Figure 59 Firefox Add Security Exception Add Security Exception x You are about to override how Firefox identifies this site DN Legitimate banks stores and other public sites will not ask you to do this Server Location https 1192 168 1 35 Certificate Status This site attempts to identify itself with invalid information Wrong Site Certificate belongs to different site which could indicate an identity theft Unknown Identity Certificate is not trusted because it hasn t been verified by a recognized authority IY Permanently store this exception Confirm Security Exception Cancel 78 NSA 2401 User
383. uch third party acknowledgments normally appear The names Apache and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their name without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see lt http www apache org gt Portions of this software are based upon public domain software
384. uide Chapter 9 Protect Screens The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 2 LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Source Select an internal volume and the folders and files to back up using this tree interface Click to browse through folders sub folders and files Click to close a folder in the tree This is useful if there are many folders or files that you wish to hide from view Click _ to select a folder or file to back up This also selects all sub folders and files Click to deselect the folder or file This also de selects all sub folders and files Mere and Mere appear when there are too many folders files to display Click the arrows to scroll up or down through the folders files L4 for a folder means all sub folders and files and new folders files added later will be backed up for a file means the file will be backed up a grayed out check box for a folder means that only some sub folders and files under the folder will be backed up Newly added folders files will NOT be backed up 4 means the file structure is still loading Please wait for the folders files to display Note If you select to back up an entire folder 4 and then de select a sub folder or file within that folder the main folder icon will turn 4 and any new sub folders and files added to this main folder after the initial backup configuration will NOT be backed
385. ult The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 Maintenance gt Configuration Include Volume Select this to have the configuration file include settings for unlocking the Encryption Settings encrypted volumes either by manually entering a password or using a USB key The password itself is not saved in the configuration file Backup Click this button to save the current NSA configuration to your computer Your browser prompts you to save the file Restore Configuration Browse Click this button to locate a previously saved configuration file on your computer or network location Upload Click this button to load the previously saved configuration file to the NSA This does not automatically apply the configuration file s settings Restore Configuration After you upload a configuration file to the NSA select this to replace the NSA s general configuration settings with the settings in the file you uploaded This does not include the volume encryption settings Restore Volume This option is available if you included the volume encryption settings Encryption Settings when you backed up the configuration Select this and an encrypted volume s to restore the settings for unlocking the encrypted volume s This restores the unlocking settings to what they were when you created the backup So whatever the encrypted volume s password or USB key was when you created the backup use the same to unlock the encryp
386. up A list of your select folders and files displays below the selection fields Backup Target Choose where to save the backup Remote Select this to back up to another device For Archives The remote device can be another NSA or a computer that supports CIFS Fill in the following fields in order to be able to access it e Remote NSA Address e Username e Password e Share Name Click Test Connection to see if your NSA can communicate with the remote device For Synchronization The remote device must be another NSA compatible with the NSA s synchronization feature Fill in the following fields in order to be able to access It e Remote NSA Address e Username e Remote Admin s Password Click Show target content to connect to the remote NSA so you can select the target share for the backup Local Select this to back up the files to another volume on the NSA Select the folder where you want to store the backup files It is recommended that the target be on a different disk array from the source volume to provide protection in the event that the source drive fails NSA 2401 User s Guide 205 Chapter 9 Protect Screens Table 71 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 2 continued DESCRIPTION External If there is an external USB hard drive connected to the NSA for example USB1 ExtVolume 1 you can select a backup target on the external USB hard drive Click this button to return to the preceding screen Click this
387. uration screen NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 8 Sharing Screens Table 58 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share continued DESCRIPTION Apply Click this to save your changes Click this to discard changes and close the window 8 4 1 1 Share Access Configuration This screen allows you to assign permissions to a share Figure 160 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration EOE Share Access Configuration Available User s Groupts lt LOCALUSERS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt anonymous ftp lt DOMAINUSERS gt admin lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt BYemMone Example Test lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Read Only lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt lt LOCALUSERS gt lt DOMAINUSERS gt lt LOCALGROUPS gt lt DOMAINGROUPS gt Ei Note Tou may select multiple users groups by using Ctrl Click The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Sharing gt Shares gt Create a New Share gt Share Access Configuration Available Users Groups This displays a list of users and groups that have not yet been assigned an authority level for the share You can assign users and groups by selecting them and clicking the right arrow Full Assign users and groups one of the following authority levels Read Only Full Grants read write privileges Deny Read Only Grants rea
388. ure 11 My NSA Share Configuration ZyXEL i ES My NSA Password Administration Bi My NSA Hasans Styre Na bo ANSIEN gt Share Owner A admin I gt Location volumet gt Fath i data Sf oagdcTest Share Browsing E Edit Share Ti Delete Share 42 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator The following table describes the icons in this screen Table 8 My NSA Share Configuration Icons DESCRIPTION Share This is the share icon followed by the name of the share i User This is the icon for the owner of the share Share Browsing EN Click this icon or link to see and access the share s contents Edit Share g Click this icon or link to configure the share s management details H Delete Share Click this icon or link to remove the share and its contents The following table describes the labels in the this screen Table 9 My NSA Share Configuration Share Owner The share belongs to and is managed by this user account The share owner controls access rights to the share The share is for a folder on this volume This is the share s file path 2 5 4 My NSA Change Share Properties Screen Use the My NSA Change Share Properties screen to configure share management details Click My NSA and a share s Configure button Then click Edt Share to open the following screen This screen displays a share s management details Figure 12 My NSA Change Share Properties
389. vely in one RAID 5 array then the maximum capacity is 450 GB 3 150 GB the smallest disk size and the remaining space 300 GB is unused Typical applications for RAID 10 are transaction processing relational database applications enterprise resource planning and other business systems For write intensive applications RAID 1 or RAID 1 0 are probably better choices as the performance of RAID 5 will begin to substantially decrease in a write heavy environment 6 9 7 Hot spare A RAID I or RAID 5 array with a hot spare operates as a three disk RAID 1 or RAID 5 array with the fourth disk on standby The standby disk automatically comes into play if a disk in the array fails The advantage of a hot spare is that if a disk fails then the array resynchronizes automatically with the standby disk and operates at healthy array speed after the resynchronization S You need four hard disks installed to use RAID 10 RAID 5 or RAID 5 with hot spare NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 6 Storage Screens 6 9 8 RAID and Data Protection If a hard disk fails and you re using a RAID 1 RAID 10 or RAID 5 array then your data will still be available but at degraded speeds until you replace the hard disk that failed and re synchronize the array However RAID cannot protect against file corruption virus attacks files incorrectly deleted or modified or the NSA malfunctioning See Section 9 1 on page 197 for what you should use in these cases
390. vice pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix E Legal Information Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Viewing Certifications 1 Go to http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty Zy XEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either pa
391. ware screen This screen provides you with your Genie Backup Manager Lite license key and directions to find the Genie Backup Manager Server license key You may need to use this screen if you cannot locate your license keys You can also locate your license keys on the back of the envelope of the CD that came with your NSA For more information about Genie Backup Manager please see Genie Backup Manager on page 198 220 NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens Figure 183 Protect gt Backup Software Backup Software Genie Backup Manager is Windows backup software developed by Genie Soft It is bundled with each NSA Storage unit This is not the same as server to server NSA to NSA backup feature which can be accessed here M5A 2401 provides an unlimited license for GBM Lite version and ONE license for GBM Server version backup software Genie Backup Manager LITE Serial Number Product License Key Genie Backup Manager Server Serial Number Product License Keyj The serial number Product License Key for Genie Backup Manager Server can be found on label located on the bottom of the NSA device NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 9 Protect Screens NSA 2401 User s Guide Application Screens 10 1 Overview This chapter introduces the NSA Application screens 10 1 1 What You Can Do In The Application Screens e Configure settings for FTP file transfers to from the NSA See Section 10 2 on page 22
392. with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program 18 void and will automatically terminate your rig
393. word and share name If you want to make sure the remote NSA is reachable click Test Connection Figure 88 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 2 Add anew backup Job volume Fl Rd volume Gonzo Kermit Strategy Business Plan Gs Username admin Password 0 Share Name Backups Oo f External Previous NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 3 Tutorials 4 In this example the target NSA is on the LAN so leave the compression off Security is already configured on the target NSA so you can leave the encryption off too Have the NSA keep 3 backups Figure 89 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 3 Add anew backup Job Step 3 Compression C Tes ho Encryption f Yes ng Purge Policy c Keep All Old Backup files o Keep Only the last 3 backup files 1 30 C keep Backups For daylsif1 3650 5 Set the frequency to Weekly Schedule the backup for 5 00 every Saturday morning Figure 90 Protect gt Backup gt Add Job Step 4 Add anew backup Job Step 4 Scheduler Backup Frequency Weekly E Start Time hh mm 3 i 0 Every how many weeks 1 1 52 on every Sunday Monday Tuesday wednesday Thursday Friday Saturda 3 7 6 Restoring Archived Files by Backup Job If you have backup jobs for which the NSA has already performed backups you can restore the files based on the backup job Gonzo accidently deleted all of the files in his share and ne
394. y know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that re distributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION NSA 2401 User s Guide Appendix D Open Source Licences 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright l
395. yed per page Go to Page Select a page number of logs to display Previous amp Next Click Previous to cycle back through the pages of logs and Next to cycle forward through them If only one page exists then clicking either of these simply refreshes the page Click this button to export the selected log s 11 2 0 1 Log Classes The NSA keeps detailed records of all activity that occurs on it These records or logs are organized according to class The following table describes the different log classes Figure 192 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Classes OG CLASS DESCRIPTION Action log If you enable the action log feature for a share s this class shows information about when users upload or download files or folders or create folders User This class shows information on user account access to the NSA Share This class shows information on shares being created or deleted NSA 2401 User s Guide Chapter 11 Maintenance Screens Figure 192 Maintenance gt Log gt Log Classes continued CLASS DESCRIPTION LOG Application This class shows information about the NSA s FTP print server and copy button applications This log class shows information about all backup related activity 11 2 1 Search Click the Maintenance gt Log gt Search icon to display the search filters Figure 193 Maintenance gt Log gt Search Filters Type View Al Logs 7 Severity B Keyword s Time E fo Shoursfo
396. ystem Folders Home Folder S p 2 My Documents es Network Folders UP 2 4G Media 2 0 GB available Favorites Applications Computer History Leave User zyxel on linux h20z openSUSE 2 When the Run as Root KDE su dialog opens enter the admin password and click OK Figure 242 openSUSE 10 3 K Menu gt Computer Menu Run as root KDE su Please enter the Administrator root password to continue Command sbinfyast2 Password Ignore NSA 2401 User s Guide 293 Appendix B Setting Up Your Computer s IP Address 3 When the YaST Control Center window opens select Network Devices and then click the Network Card icon Figure 243 openSUSE 10 3 YaST Control Center YaST Control Center linux h207 File Edit Help D software Kat Network Services Novell App rmor fe w4 Security and Users G 3 Miscellaneous Search 4 When the Network Settings window opens click the Overview tab select the appropriate connection Name from the list and then click the Configure button Figure 244 openSUSE 10 3 Network Settings Ol vrastz linux h20z Network Card 8 Network Settings Overview Obtain an overview of installed network cards Global Options Overview Hostname DNS Routing Additionally edit their configuration IP Address Adding a Network AMD PCnet Fast 79C971 DHCP Card Press Add to configure

ZyXEL NSA-2401 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents